Today's Hours: 8:00am - 10:00pm

Books

  • Digital
    Iñigo de Miguel Beriain.
    Summary: This book proposes an ethical and legal framework to improve the responses to social issues related not only to the current SARS-CoV-2 pandemic, but also to future pandemics. Its contents cover the issues that are likely to be most controversial in any public health crisis. It starts by discussing non-pharmacological measures, such as the appropriateness of confinement, how to control compliance with public health measures and the ethical, legal and social acceptability of health certificates. Then it turns to issues related to the production, distribution and administration of vaccines, with a particular focus on the design and implementation of vaccination policies. Finally, it analyses the most appropriate criteria to develop a triage, when the situation brings us to this terrible scenario. The analyses presented in this book are based on the ethical and legal frameworks, as well as the social context, of the European Union, and aims to address the main dilemmas faced by any liberal democracy dealing with a pandemic: how to reconcile the defense against a public health crisis together with a respect for fundamental rights and freedoms. The European legal systems have developed a number of conceptual tools designed to ensure that there is no room for arbitrariness in the restrictions introduced by the political power in emergency situations, and this book builds upon these tools. The Ethical, Legal and Social Issues of Pandemics: An Analysis from the EU Perspective is a predominantly practice-oriented book, which will help policy makers to adopt policies that effectively combine public health needs with individual rights and freedoms. It will also help health care givers to understand better the ethical and legal issues involved in their work and citizens, in general, to participate in public decision making in an informed manner. Finally, it will help to design tools that faithfully comply with existing fundamental rights standards.

    Contents:
    1.Confinement, isolation and tracking
    2.Immunity Certificates: The New Frontier
    3.Vaccines (I). Creation and distribution
    4.Vaccination (II). Vaccination policies
    5.Triage: when the tsunami hits.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital/Print
    Axel W. Bauer, Ralf-Dieter Hofheinz, Jochen S. Utikal, editors.
    Summary: "This book presents in detail the problems and ethical challenges in daily oncological practice. In western industrialized countries, roughly 25 percent of all citizens still die from cancer. Despite significant progress in basic science and in individual areas of clinical care, even in the 21st century, being diagnosed with cancer has lost none of its dread and can still be a death sentence. This situation raises many problems and challenges for medical ethics, e.g., the question of the benefits and risks of prevention programs, or the right to know and not to know. Clinical trials with cancer patients and quality assurance for surgery, radiotherapy and medication also pose a series of ethical dilemmas. Furthermore, cancer treatment is a psychological challenge not only for patients but also for physicians and caregivers. The issues of adequate pain management and good palliative care, of treatment limiting and the question of assisted suicide at the end of life also have to be considered. In order to reflect the subject's diverse and multifaceted nature, the book incorporates legal, ethnographic, historical and literary perspectives into ethical considerations"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Cancer as an ethical challenge
    Historical aspects of the fight against cancer
    One in four dies of cancer. Questions about the epidemiology of malignant tumors
    Ethical issues related to human papillomavirus vaccination programs: an example from Bangladesh
    Ethical challenges around cell lines in cancer research
    Risk-adapted prevention. Governance perspective for benefits of genetic (breast cancer) risk
    The right to know and not to know: predictive genetic diagnosis and non-diagnosis
    Benefits and harms of cancer screening
    Ethical dilemmas in conducting clinical trials
    Ethical aspects in cancer drug approval, balancing individual versus societal perspectives
    Liver living donation for cancer patients: benefits, risks, justification
    Quality assurance of cancer medication and the challenge of biosimilars
    Cancer in children
    Pain and palliative medicine
    Advance directives for medical decisions
    Euthanasia and assisted suicide
    Doctor's health and the health of caregivers
    Diagnosis breast cancer. An ethnographic study of illness and disease
    The patient's view
    The patients' advocate
    Cancer in literature.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Angela Georgia Catic, editor.
    Summary: This book is designed to present an overview of common geriatrics ethical issues that arise during patient care and research activities. Each chapter includes a case example and practical learning pearls that are useful in day-to-day patient care. Coverage includes a brief overview of geriatric epidemiology, highlighting the high rates of dementia, use of surrogate decisions makers at the end-of-life, relocation from home to long-term care facilities, and low health literacy in the geriatrics population. Sections are devoted to issues around capacity, surrogate decision making, end-of-life care, hemodialysis in the elderly, and futility as well as challenges presented by independence questions, such as dementia care, driving, feeding, and intimacy in nursing homes. The text also addresses questions around recognizing, reporting, and treating elder abuse and self-neglect, ethics related to research and technology in the geriatric population, and the use of e-mail, Facebook, and open notes. Written by experts in the field, Ethical Considerations and Challenges in Geriatrics is a valuable tool for trainees at a variety of levels including medical students, residents, and fellows. In addition, it provides practical guidance and a useful reference for practicing geriatricians, primary care physicians, geriatric nurses, social workers, nursing home workers, hospice care employees, and all medical health professionals working with the elderly.

    Contents:
    Geriatric Epidemiology
    Evaluating Capacity for Safe and Independent Living among Vulnerable Older Adults
    Surrogate decision making and advance care planning
    End of Life Care of Older Adults
    Special Considerations in Older Surgical Patients
    Ethical Issues of Renal Replacement Therapy in the Elderly
    Ethical Considerations for the Driver with Dementia
    Medical Futility
    Feeding Issues in Advanced Dementia
    Intimacy in the Long-Term Care Setting
    Elder Abuse and Neglect
    Hospital and Physician Rating Web Sites: Ethical Challenges without Context
    Considerations and Challenges in Information and Communication Technology
    Ethical Issues in Geriatric Research.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Janice L. Berliner.
    Contents:
    Introduction to clinical ethics / Rebecca R. Anderson
    The (micro) array of options for preconceptional and prenatal testing / Daragh Conrad and Christy Stanley
    The "ART" of assisted reproductive technologies / Sonja Eubanks Higgins
    Testing children for adult onset conditions / Dawn Allain
    These are not the genes you're looking for : incidental findings identified as a result of genetic testing / Curtis Coughlin, II
    Is that a threat or a promise? Direct-to-consumer marketing of genetic testing / Laura Hercher
    Genetics and patent law / Rebecca R. Anderson
    Ethical issues in genetic and genomic research / Dawn Allain and Kelly Ormond.
    Digital Access Oxford [2015]
  • Digital
    Barbara G. Jericho, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Informed Consent: Pediatric Patients, Adolescents, and Emancipated Minors
    2. Preoperative Testing: Ethical Challenges, Evidence-Based Medicine and Informed Consent
    3. Informed Consent and the Disclosure of Surgeon Experience
    4. Perioperative Considerations of Do Not Resuscitate and Do Not Intubate Orders in Adult Patients
    5. Pediatric Patients: Do Not Resuscitate Decisions
    6. Ethical Care of the Children of Jehovah?s Witnesses
    7. Fatigue and the Care of Patients
    8. Conscientious Objection
    9. Ethical Implications of Drug Shortages
    10. Ethical Challenges in High-Risk Innovative Surgery
    11. Professionalism in the Operating Room
    12. Honesty in the Perioperative Setting: Error and Communication
    13. Futility and the Care of the Perioperative Patient
    14. End-of-Life Issues: Management of Cardiac Implantable Electronic Devices
    15. End-of-Life Issues: Spirituality
    16. Ethics in Research and Publication
    17. Ethics and Evidence Regarding Animal Subjects Research: Splitting Hares- or Swallowing Camels?.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Grace Lee, Judy Illes, Frauke Ohl, editors.
    Summary: Behavioral neuroscience encompasses the disciplines of neurobiology and psychology to study mechanisms of behavior. This volume provides a contemporary overview of the current state of how ethics informs behavioral neuroscience research. There is dual emphasis on ethical challenges in experimental animal approaches and in clinical and nonclinical research involving human participants.

    Contents:
    Section I. Experimental Animal Research
    Ethical Issues Associated with the Use of Animal Experimentation in Behavioural Neuroscience Research
    The use of animal models in behavioural neuroscience research
    Does the goal justify the methods? Harm and Benefit in Neuroscience Research Using Animals
    A Framework for investigating animal consciousness
    Telos, Conservation of Welfare, and Ethical Issues in Genetic Engineering of Animals
    Would the elimination of the capacity to suffer evolve ethical dilemmas in experimental animal research?
    Section II. Clinical Research
    Ethics of human research in behavioral neuroscience: Overview of section II
    What?s special about the ethical challenges of studying disorders with altered brain activity?
    Effects of brain injury on moral agency: Ethical dilemmas in investigating human behavior
    Genetic testing and neuroimaging for youth at risk for mental illness: Trading off benefit and risk
    Externalization of consciousness: Scientific possibilities and clinical implications
    How does enhancing cognition affect human values? How does this translate into social responsibility?
    Deep brain stimulation: A principled and pragmatic approach to understanding the ethical and clinical challenges of an evolving technology
    Ethical issues and ethical therapy associated with anxiety disorders
    Just like a circus: The public consumption of sex differences
    Money and morals: Ending clinical trials for financial reasons.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Artemis Igoumenou, editor.
    Summary: This work explores and discusses the ethical dilemmas clinicians face in everyday forensic psychiatry practice. We discuss and reflect on ethical issues involving treatment decisions such as antipsychotic polypharmacy, high doses antipsychotics and prescribing anti-libidinal medications. Ethical issues surrounding the use of technology for the management of mentally disordered offenders are explored in depth. The use of the polygraph test, a controversial method of truth facilitation for sex offenders, is discussed. Similarly, we discuss the use of "tagging" for serious offenders that despite being used in the United States of America for a while it has been heavily criticized and opposed. Tagging is gradually being introduced in the UK and other European countries, making consideration of the ethical issues and dilemmas surrounding its use both timely and necessary. This work is a valuable guide for clinicians working in forensic psychiatry settings, particularly when faced with ethical dilemmas concerning decisions around interventions.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Clinical Forensic Psychiatry
    Clinical Forensic Psychiatry; Settings and Practices
    Forensic Psychiatry and the Mentally Disordered Offender. Ethical Issues in Treatment Provision within Secure Hospital Environments; Clinical and Legal
    Part 2: Ethical Issues in the Treatment and Management of Sex Offenders
    Introduction
    The Use of Medications for the Treatment of Sex Offenders. Ethical Issues and Controversies
    The Use of Polygraph Test in Clinical Forensic Psychiatry Settings
    Part 3: Ethical Issues in the Assessment, Treatment and Management of Violent Offenders and Sex Offenders
    Ethical Issues Arising from the Prescription of Antipsychotic Medication in Clinical Forensic Settings
    The Many Faces of Surveillance: Ethical Considerations that Encompass the Use of Electronic Monitoring in Criminal and Clinical Populations
    Assessment and Management of Specific Populations.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Kate A. Mazur, Stacey L. Berg, editors.
    Summary: This book identifies the various ethical challenges that arise in pediatric hematology/oncology and provides the necessary tools to overcome these challenges. Aiming to expand upon and strengthen providers' knowledge and experience in pediatric health care ethical issues, the text positions providers to be beneficial resources to faculty, staff, patients, and families within their institution. It presents a multidisciplinary approach to sound ethical practices that is necessary to effectively care for these patients and their families. The book reviews the principles of ethical decision-making, the unique difficulties in using children as research subjects, common ethical conundrums involved in providing end-of-life care, and general moralities of professional practice. Written by experts in their fields, Ethical Issues in Pediatric Hematology/Oncology is an innovative and valuable resource for clinicians, practitioners, and trainees who work in the field of pediatric hematology/oncology.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; Part I: Introduction to Ethics in Pediatrics;
    Chapter 1: Ethics: A Historical Perspective; Respect for Autonomy; Beneficence and Non-maleficence; Justice; The State of Medical Ethics Today: Practical Applications; Pediatric-Related Ethics; Best Interest Standard of a Child; Informed Consent Process and Assent in Pediatrics; Past, Present, and Future Pediatric Ethical Challenges and Controversies; References;
    Chapter 2: Ethical Principles in the Practice of Medicine; Introduction; Defining Ethics; Approaches to Medical Ethics; The Problem of Pluralism The Four Principles of Biomedical Ethics "Doing Ethics": A Modest Approach; Legal and Professional Considerations in Ethics; The Four Boxes of Clinical Ethics; Ethics Consultation; Conclusion; References; Part II: The Ethics of Everyday Clinical Encounters;
    Chapter 3: Communicating Prognosis at Diagnosis and Relapse or Progression; Evidence for Honest Communication; Why Is Honest Communication Difficult?; Why Is Honest Communication Important?; Why Is Honest Communication Vital to Decision Making?; Are We Taking Away Hope?; Parental Decision Making: Other Considerations for the Clinician Consideration of Cultural Variations Nuts and Bolts of Honest Communication; Conveying Prognostic Information; Complications in Communication; Communicating with Children; Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 4: Managing Conflict When There's Disagreement in Care Between Medical Providers, Caregivers, and Patient; Introduction; Conflict Between Patients/Families and Professionals; Source of Conflict #1: Decisional Authority and the Best Interest Standard; Ethical Considerations; Source of Conflict #2: Decisional and Non-decisional Rights of Adolescent Patients; Ethical Considerations Source of Conflict #3: Problems in Alignment and Communication Among ProfessionalsEthical Considerations; Strategies for Conflict Resolution; Conflict Within Teams and Between Specialties; Source of Conflict #1: Goals of Care; Ethical Considerations; Sources of Conflict #2: Disagreement Over Treatment Options/Interventions; Ethical Considerations; Source of Conflict #3: Clarification and Coordination of Roles; Ethical Considerations; Strategies for Conflict Resolution; Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 5: Unique Considerations for Adolescents and Young Adults Adolescence Is a Unique Developmental Period; Informed Consent and Decision-Making in Young Adult and Pediatric Populations; Negotiating the Parent: Patient-Provider Triad; Special Circumstances: Emancipated and Mature Minors; Case-Based Learning: Potential Conflicts in AYA Care; Factors to Consider; Conclusion; References; Part III: Ethical Issues Surrounding Children in Research;
    Chapter 6: Ethics in Genetic and Genomic Research; Pediatric Oncology Genomic Studies; Ethical Issues in Pediatric Oncology Genomic Research; Informed Consent in Pediatric Genetic and Genomic Research.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    edited by Rebecca A. Greenberg, Aviva M. Goldberg, David Rodríguez-Arias.
    Summary: This book offers a theoretical and practical overview of the specific ethical and legal issues in pediatric organ transplantation. Written by a team of leading experts, Ethical Issues in Pediatric Organ Transplantation addresses those difficult ethical questions concerning clinical, organizational, legal and policy issues including donor, recipient and allocation issues. Challenging topics, including children as donors, donation after cardiac death, misattributed paternity, familial conflicts of interest, developmental disability as a listing criteria, small bowel transplant, and considerations in navigating the media are discussed. It serves as a fundamental handbook and resource for pediatricians, transplant health care professionals, trainees, graduate students, scholars, practitioners of bioethics and health policy makers.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Rodríguez-Arias, Greenberg, and Goldberg
    1.0 Living Donation
    1.1 Minors as organ donors
    Freedman Ross, Parker and Thistelwaite
    1.2 Living donors for fulminant hepatic failure in children
    Segedi and Grant
    1.3 The Ethics of Persuasion: Evaluating the ethical limits on attempting to persuade families to donate the organs of deceased family members
    Chandler and Gruben
    1.4 Misattributed Paternity
    Freeman and Parker
    2.0 Deceased Donation
    2.1 Death determination in children
    Shemie and Ortega-Deballon
    2.2 Controlled donation after cardiac death (2 chapters)
    2.2.1 Controlled donation after cardiac death in pediatrics
    Talati and Frader
    2.2.2 Ethical and organizational challenges in controlled donation after cardiac death for children
    Harrison
    3.0 Emerging Technology
    3.1 Ethical issues in pediatric bowel rehabilitation and small bowel transplantation
    Fecteau
    3.2 Vascularized Composite Allotransplantation (VCA)
    Zlotnik Shaul, Wright, Flynn, Borschel, Hanson, and Zuker
    3.3 Media management
    Amaral and Feudtner
    4.0 Allocating Organs
    4.1Transplantation for pediatric foreign nationals
    Fortin and Greenberg
    4.2 Neurodevelopmental status as a criterion for solid organ transplant eligibility
    Wightman, Diekema and Smith
    5.0 Recipient Issues
    5.1 Psychosocial aspects of pediatric organ transplantation
    Derrington, Goldberg and Frader
    5.2 Ethical issues in adolescents and transplantation
    Goldberg and Fine
    Conclusion
    Rodríguez-Arias, Greenberg, Goldberg.
  • Digital
    Dónal O'Mathúna, Ron Iphofen, editors.
    Summary: This Open Access book provides illustrative case studies that explore various research and innovation topics that raise challenges requiring ethical reflection and careful policymaking responses. The cases highlight diverse ethical challenges and provide lessons for the various options available for policymaking. Cases are drawn from many fields, including artificial intelligence, space science, energy, data protection, professional research practice and pandemic planning. Case studies are particularly helpful with ethical issues to provide crucial context. This book reflects the ambiguity of ethical dilemmas in contemporary policymaking. Analyses reflect current debates where consensus has not yet been achieved. These cases illustrate key points made throughout the PRO-RES EU-funded project from which they arise: that ethical judgement is a fluid enterprise, where values, principles and standards must constantly adjust to new situations, new events and new research developments. This book is an indispensable aid to policymaking that addresses, and/or uses evidence from, novel research developments.

    Contents:
    Chapter1. Introduction: Making the Case for the Case (Dónal O’Mathúna)
    Chapter 2. Space: The Final Frontier (Emmanouil Detsis)
    Chapter 3. Research and the Ethics of Urban Exploration and Criminal Trespass (Mark Israel)
    Chapter 4. Science Advisors and "Good Evidence": A Case Study (Gabi Lombardo)
    Chapter 5. Automated Justice, Automated Policing: Issues, Benefits and Risks in the Use of Artificial Intelligence and its Algorithms in Access to Justice and Law Enforcement (Caroline Gans Combe)
    Chapter 6. Data Protection in Croatia: An Indicator of Ethics Processes in Research Institutions (Zvonimir Koporc)
    Chapter 7. Intellectual Corruption and the American Psychological Association (James F. Welles)
    Chapter 8. PRO-RES Guidance Framework for Scientific Research: A Novel Response to Long-standing Issues (P. Kavouras)
    Chapter 9. RRI and Research Ethics (Maria Teresa Berliri)
    Chapter 10. The Wave Power Project (Ron Iphofen)
    Chapter 11. Formulating a Guidance Code for Research Managers (the UK ARMA case) (John Oates)
    Chapter 12. Ethics Versus The Law: The Case Of the Belfast Project (Helen Kara)
    Chapter 13. Regulating Zoonotic Disease Research: Implications for Pandemic Preparedness (Dónal O’Mathúna)
    Chapter 14. Responsible Research and Innovation and India: Towards a Dialectical Approach in Theory and Practice (Krishna Ravi Srinivas).
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Deborah Mascalzoni, editor.
    Summary: Biobank research and genomic information are changing the way we look at health and medicine. Genomics challenges our values and has always been controversial and difficult to regulate. In the future lies the promise of tailored medical treatments and pharmacogenomics but the borders between medical research and clinical practice are becoming blurred. We see sequencing platforms for research that can have diagnostic value for patients. Clinical applications and research have been kept separate, but the blurring lines challenges existing regulations and ethical frameworks.Then how do we regulate it? This book contains an overview of the existing regulatory landscape for biobank research in the Western world and some critical chapters to show how regulations and ethical frameworks are developed and work. How should international sharing work? How design an ethical informed consent? An underlying critique: the regulatory systems are becoming increasingly complex and opaque. The international community is building systems that should respond to that. According to the authors in fact, it is time to turn the ship around. Biobank researchers have a moral responsibility to look at and assess their work in relation to the bigger picture: the shared norms and values of current society. Research ethics shouldn?t only be a matter of bioethicists writing guidelines that professionals have to follow. Ethics should be practiced through discourse and regulatory frameworks need to be part of that public discourse. Ethics review should be then not merely application of bureaucracy and a burden for researchers but an arena where researchers discuss their projects, receive advice and practice their ethics skills.

    Contents:
    Introduction / Deborah Mascalzoni
    Biobanks: a definition / Barbara Parodi
    A participatory space beyond the "autonomy versus property" dichotomy / Mariachiara Tallacchini
    Intellectual Property and Biobanks / Naomi Hawkins
    Consent, Privacy and Property in the Italian Biobanks Regulation: A Hybrid Model within EU / Matteo Macilotti, Simone Penasa, Marta Tomasi
    Data Protection Principles and Research in the Biobanks Age / Roberto Lattanzi
    The New General Data Protection Regulation: where are we are and where might we be heading? / Jane Reichel and Anna-Sara Lind
    The Tension between Data Sharing and the Protection of Privacy in Genomics Research / Jane Kaye
    Incidental findings: the time is not yet ripe for a policy for biobanks / Jennifer Viberg, Mats G. Hansson, Sophie Langenskiöld, Pär Segerdahl
    Biobanking across borders: the challenges of harmonization / Ruth Chadwick, Heather Strange
    Governing Biobanks Through A European Infrastructure / Emmanuelle Rial-Sebbag, Anne Cambon-Thomsen
    EU governance for research and ethics in biobanks / Jane Reichel
    A Bold Experiment: Iceland's Genomic Venture / David Winickoff
    The Estonian Genome Center, University of Tartu / Aime Keis
    The management of the ethical aspects of a local mental diseases biobank for research purposes. An Italian experience / Corinna Porteri
    Biobank governance in Spain: From the autonomy of research ethics committees to the autonomy of lay people / Antonio Casado da Rocha
    Public deliberation and the role of stakeholders as a new frontier in the governance of science: the British Columbia Biobank Deliberation and the DePGx Project / Claudio Corradetti, Gillian Bartlett
    Making researchers moral / Linus Johnsson, Stefan Eriksson, Gert Helgesson, Mats G. Hansson.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    by Shabih H. Zaidi.
    Summary: Medical ethics and the medical profession are inseparable, yet the formal teaching of medical ethics is a relatively new phenomenon. Furthermore, since the introduction of managed health care, with the physician becoming a 'health provider' and the patient a 'client', the whole concept of medical ethics has undergone a sea change. The contractual relationship between the provider and the client engenders caution and precaution, resulting in defensive medicine. This book both presents a succinct history of medical ethics and discusses a wide range of important ethical dilemmas in the provision of modern health care. A synopsis is provided of ethics through the ages and the role of ethics in the evolution of medicine. Principles and sources of medical ethics, as well as different religious and secular perspectives, are explained. Ethical concerns in relation to a variety of specific issues are then examined. These issues include, for example, human experimentation, stem cell research, assisted reproductive technologies, termination of pregnancy, rationing of health care, euthanasia, and quality of life issues. The author's many years of practicing medicine in different cultures and countries and his passion for religious works, philosophy, literature, poetry, history, and anthropology have informed and enriched the contents of this stimulating book.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Ethics through the ages: 1 . Early period
    2. Greek period
    Sophists and Socrates et al
    3. Arab period
    4. Bacon
    Bertrand Russell
    5. Voltaire
    Dawkins- McIntyre
    Part 2. Metaphysics, religious- secular perspectives: 6. Analysis of secular and religious thought
    Part 3. Cultural anthropology and medical ethics: 7. Normative principles, autonomy, beneficence, non maleficence and justice
    8. Universalism or Relativism
    9. Medical ethics in a pluralistic society
    Part 4. Nomenclature and description: 10. Principles and sources of medical ethics
    11. Justice: a pillar of ethics. Distributive justice and international clinical trials
    Part 5. The role of ethics in evolution of medicine: 12.Research ethics
    13. Human experimentation
    14. The scourge of drug trials
    15. Human embryonic stem cell research
    16. Stem cell in cultivation of sensory organs, curing deafness
    17. Cybrid. Is science going mad?
    18. Teaching medical ethics
    Part 6. Reproductive health, ART, IVF, Abortion, Pregenetic diagnosis (PGD): 19. Assisted Reproductive Technologies
    20. IVF, Pre genetic diagnosis, termination of pregnancy
    21. Surrogacy
    Part 7. Managed health care: 22. Rationing. Services within limited resources
    23. Futility of treatment. Euthanasia
    24. Therapeutic nihilism
    Part 8. Quality of life issues: 25. Care of the elderly, and QALYS
    26. Hospices and palliative care
    27. Controversial pathways , passive euthanasia. Assisted life termination
    28. Assisted life prolongation and end of life issues
    Part 9. Physicians' oaths: 29. Lessons drawn from Duae Makaram Al Akhlaq
    30. Hippocratic oath and contemporary faith based oaths.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Nancy Kirsch.
    Summary: "A collection of case studies exploring ethical decision making for physical therapy students and practicing physical therapists"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Part One: Ethics for the Physical Therapist
    Chapter 1: Healthcare Ethics
    Chapter 2: Professionalism
    Chapter 3: Ethical Guidance: The Code of Ethics for Physical Therapists and Standards of Ethical Conduct for the Physical Therapist Assistant
    Chapter 4: Ethical Risk Factors
    Chapter 5: Applying Ethical Decision-Making Models in Clinical Practice
    Chapter 6: The Ethical Challenges of the Future
    Part Two: Types of Ethical Decisions: Case Analysis
    Chapter 7: Introduction to Case Analysis
    Chapter 8: Accountability
    Chapter 9: Boundary Issues
    Chapter 10: Practice Issues
    Chapter 11: Professional Relationships
    Chapter 12: Professional Responsibility
    Chapter 13: Professional Self-Regulation
    Chapter 14: Supervision
    Chapter 15: The Student Physical Therapist
    Appendix A: The Code of Ethics for Physical Therapists
    Appendix B: Standards of Ethical Conduct for the Physical Therapist Assistant
    Appendix C: Ideas to Consider Answers
    Appendix D: References.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
  • Digital
    Marike L. D. Broekman, editor.
    Summary: This book covers all ethical aspects of introducing novel implants and procedures in neurosurgery in a structured way, addressing the current knowledge gap concerning ethical innovations in neurosurgery. Initially it explores the difficulties involved in defining when a procedure should be considered innovation, research, or care. To this end, it presents not only an overview of current literature, but also data from a recent survey among neurosurgeons in Europe. The book subsequently discusses the ethical issues related to innovation. These include: informed consent (what should a surgeon tell the patient and how should he/she do so), oversight (can any surgeon simply implant a novel spinal device?), the learning curve (when should a surgeon be allowed to perform a novel procedure?), vulnerable patients (how to innovate in the pediatric population or in an emergency setting), and conflicts of interest, as well as the ethics of paying for innovative treatments. In turn, the closing chapters focus on the evaluation of neurosurgical research and innovation. Are cultural changes necessary and how could innovation benefit from (international) collaborations? Given the range of topics addressed, the book offers neurosurgeons, residents, scientists, companies and hospital administrations a valuable guide to introducing novel implants and techniques in neurosurgery.

    Contents:
    Innovation in neurosurgery: key ethical challenges
    Payment for and right to innovation in neurosurgery
    Evaluation of innovations in neurosurgery
    Innovation in neurosurgery: required culture and team collaboration.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jenny Krutzinna, Luciano Floridi, editors.
    Summary: This open access book presents an ethical approach to utilizing personal medical data. It features essays that combine academic argument with practical application of ethical principles. The contributors are experts in ethics and law. They address the challenges in the re-use of medical data of the deceased on a voluntary basis. This pioneering study looks at the many factors involved when individuals and organizations wish to share information for research, policy-making, and humanitarian purposes. Today, it is easy to donate blood or even organs, but it is virtually impossible to donate one's own medical data. This is seen as ethically unacceptable. Yet, data donation can greatly benefit the welfare of our societies. This collection provides timely interdisciplinary research on biomedical big data. Topics include the ethics of data donation, the legal and regulatory challenges, and the current and future collaborations. Readers will learn about the ethical and regulatory challenges associated with medical data donations. They will also better understand the special nature of using deceased data for research purposes with regard to ethical principles of autonomy, beneficence, and justice. In addition, the contributors identify the key governance issues of such a scheme. The essays also look at what we can learn in terms of best practice from existing medical data schemes.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction (Jenny Krutzinna and Luciano Floridi).- Part I: Conceptualising the Ethics of Medical Data Donation.- Chapter 2. Data Donation: How to Resist the iLeviathan (Barbara Prainsack).- Chapter 3. Data Donations as Exercises of Sovereignty (Patrik Hummel, Matthias Braun and Peter Dabrock).- Chapter 4. The Ethics of Uncertainty for Data Subjects (Philip J. Nickel).- Chapter 5. Incongruities and Dilemmas in Data Donation: Juggling our 1s and 0s (Kerina H. Jones).- Part II: Governance and Regulation of Medical Data Donation.- Chapter 6. Posthumous Medical Data Donation: The Case for a Regulatory Framework (Edina Harbinja).- Chapter 7. Medical Data Donation, Consent and the Public Interest after Death: A Gateway to Posthumous Data Use (Annie Sorbie).- Part III: Implementing Ethical Medical Data Donation.- Chapter 8. The Personal Data is Political (Bastian Greshake Tzovaras and Athina Tzovara).- Chapter 9. Personal Data Cooperatives
    A New Data Governance Framework for Data Donations and Precision Health (Ernst Hafen).- Chapter 10. Defining Data Donation After Death: Metadata, Families, Directives, Guardians and the Road to Big Consent (David M. Shaw).- Part IV: An Ethical Code for Posthumous Medical Data Donation.- Chapter 11. Enabling Posthumous Medical Data Donation: A Plea for the Ethical Utilisation of Personal Health Data (Jenny Krutzinna, Mariarosaria Taddeo and Luciano Floridi).- Chapter 12. An Ethical Code for Posthumous Medical Data Donation (Jenny Krutzinna, Mariarosaria Taddeo and Luciano Floridi).
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Roxana Cobo.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
  • Digital
    Pietro Amedeo Modesti, Francesco P. Cappuccio, Gianfranco Parati, editors.
    Summary: In the context of the most significant influx of migrants in European history, the objective of this book is to provide healthcare professionals with essential knowledge and skills to effectively treat and prevent cardiovascular diseases in ethnic minorities. Acknowledging that the scientific and cultural training of health professionals on the specific health needs of minority groups is still limited and likely biased, the book sheds light on the different health policies in European countries as well as epidemiologic data on cardiovascular events among migrants. In addition, it presents an in-depth analysis of potential ethnic-group-specific drivers of global cardiovascular risk within this new and challenging framework - as well as issues related to its prevention and treatment. The prevalence of hypertension, diabetes, chronic kidney disease, obesity, and metabolic syndrome is found to be higher among most minority groups than in the native population, yet their access to treatment and health services may be limited by cultural and language barriers. As health professionals are confronted with such intercultural challenges on a daily basis, specific training and dedicated publications are thus essential to accompany and foster a constructive development towards a pluralist and healthier society. This book addresses that need, offering a unique and revealing resource.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Becky S. Li, Howard I. Maibach, editors.
    Summary: This book is written to help educate dermatologists and general physicians of the challenges involved in treating those with darker skin tones in culturally appropriate ways. Distinctly broken up into three sections for ease of use, the reader enters the text through a series of chapters meant to introduce the physician to the anatomical structure and makeup of patient with skin of color as well as the evolution basic concepts for understanding and treatment. The second and longest section looks at diseases and cosmetic concerns covering some of the most common issues for patients with skin of color. The last section offers cultural considerations to treatment and care. Socially conscious and comprehensive, Ethnic Skin and Hair is written by some of the leading names in dermatological treatment of skin of color, and functions as a concise and thorough tool for dermatologists at every stage in their career.

    Contents:
    Part I. Introduction/Overview
    Chapter 1. Defining Skin of Color
    Chapter 2. Skin of Color: Biology, Physiology, Structure, and Function
    Chapter 3. Biology of Hair
    Chapter 4. Physiology of Skin Pigmentation
    Part II. Skin Diseases and Concerns in Ethnic Skin.-Chapter 5. Skin Cancer Knowledge, Awareness, and Perception
    Chapter 6. Other Effects of Ultraviolet Light: Photosensitivity, Photoreactivity, and Photoaging
    Chapter 7. Inflammatory Disorders: Acne Vulgaris, Atopic Dermatitis, Seborrheic Dermatitis, Lupus Erythematosus, Dermatomyositis, and Scleroderma
    Chapter 8. Inflammatory Disorders: Psoriasis, Lichen Planus, Pityriasis Rosea, Sarcoidosis
    Chapter 9. Pigmentary Disorders
    Chapter 10. Management of Pigmentary Disorders
    Chapter 11. Hair Loss in Women of Color
    Chapter 12. Ethnic Skin Disorders
    Part III: Other Considerations.-Chapter 13. Multicultural Competence and Other Considerations
    Chapter 14. The Impact of Skin and Hair Disease in Ethnic Skin.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Gwen Yeo, Linda A. Gerdner and Dolores Gallagher-Thompson.
    Summary: In recent years, the literature on the topic of ethnic and racial issues in Alzheimer's disease and other dementias has increased dramatically. At the same time, the need for cultural competence in all of geriatric care, including dementia care, is increasingly being acknowledged. Dementia is a large societal problem affecting all communities, regardless of race or ethnicity, and understanding dementia for specific groups is tremendously important for both clinical knowledge and for health planning as a nation. This third edition of Ethnicity and the Dementias offers invaluable background information in this area, while also examining how those suffering from dementia and their family members respond or adapt to the challenges that follow. Thoroughly updated and revised throughout, the book features contributions from leading clinicians and researchers in the field, with particular attention given to genetic and cultural factors related to dementia, effective prevention and treatment strategies, and issues in caregiving and family support.

    Contents:
    Incidence and prevalence of dementia in U. S. race and ethnic populations
    Risk factors for dementia among race and ethnic populations in the United States
    Assessment of cognitive Impairment, alzheimer's disease, and other forms of dementia
    Dementia assessment in African Americans
    Dementia assessment in American Indians
    Dementia assessment in Asian Americans
    Dementia assessment in Latino Americans
    Treatment and management of dementia in the context of family care
    Working with lesbian, gay, bisexual, and transgender families
    Working with African American families
    Working with American Indian and Alaska native families
    Working with Asian Indian and South Asian American families
    Working with Chinese American families
    Working with Filipino American families
    Working with Hmong American families
    Working with Japanese American families
    Working with Korean American families
    Working with Vietnamese American families
    Working with Cuban American families
    Working with Mexican American families
    Future directions and recommendations.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2019
  • Digital
    Arshad Mehmood Abbasi, Rainer W. Bussmann, editors.
    Summary: Natural resources and associated biological diversity provide the basis of livelihood for human population, particularly in the rural areas and mountain regions across the globe. Asia is home to the world's highest mountain regions including the Himalayas, Karakorum and Hindukush. These regions are renowned around the globe because of their unique beauty, climate, and biocultural diversity. Because of geoclimatic conditions, the mountains of Asia are medicinal and food plant diversity hot spots. The indigenous communities residing in the valleys of these mountains have their own culture and traditions, and have a long history of interaction with the surrounding plant diversity. Local inhabitants of these mountains areas possess significant traditional knowledge of plant species used as food, medicine, and for cultural purposes. So far, many workers have reported traditional uses of plant species from different regions of Asia including some mountain areas; however, there is not one inclusive document on the ethnobotany of mountains in Asia. This book provides a comprehensive overview on ethno-ecological knowledge and cross cultural variation in the application of plant species among various communities residing in the mountains of Asia; cross cultural variation in traditional uses of plant species by the mountain communities; high value medicinal and food plant species; and threats and conservation status of plant species and traditional knowledge. This book should be useful to researchers of biodiversity and conservation, ethnobiologists, ethnoecologists, naturalists, phytochemists, pharmacists, policy makers, and all who have a devotion to nature.

    Contents:
    Medicinal, Nutritional, and Spiritual Significance of Plants in Bhutan: Their Biodiscovery Potential and Conservation Status
    Ethnobotany of the Himalayas--Kashmir, India
    Food from Forest: Diversity of Wild Vegetables Used by Pwo People Thailand
    Study of Medicinal Plants of the Chitral Gol National Park (CGNP) with Special Emphasis on Future Conservation and Sustainability
    Ethnobotany of Western Himalayan Region, Azad Jammu and Kashmir, Pakistan
    Floral Composition, Sustainable Utilization, and Conservation of Important Medicinal Plants in the Ayubia National Park, Abbottabad, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan
    Ethnomedicinal Uses of Plant Species from the Himalayas
    Plant Resources and Their Uses in Salt Range, Pakistan
    Ethno-Medicinal Uses of Wildlife in Azad Jammu and Kashmir, Pakistan
    Ethnobotanical Study of Traditional Medicinal Plants of Tharu Community in Swathi Village, Nawalparasi District Nepal
    Ethnomedicinal Uses of Animals in Vicinity of Ayubia National Park, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa-Pakistan
    Ethnobotany of Karakorum, Pakistan
    Ethnobotany of Mountain Region of Himalaya, District Poonch, Azad Kashmir
    Diversity and Uses of Wild Animals in Bagh, AJ&K, Pakistan
    Ethnobotanical Appraisal of Medicinal Plants from Bajaur; A Remote Area of the Khyber Pakhtunkhwa Province of Pakistan
    Folk Formulations of Asteraceae Species as Remedy for Different Ailments in Lesser Himalayas, Pakistan
    Medicinal Flora and Cultural Values of Arkot-Biakand Valley Hindu Kush Region Swat, Pakistan
    Healthcare Choices and Use of Medicinal Plants: An Ethnobotanical Study in Kanda Area of Bajhang District, Kailash Sacred Landscape, Nepal
    Exploration, Conservation, and Utilization of Ethnobotanical Knowledge: Sri Lankan Perspective.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors: T. Pullaiah, K.V. Krishnamurthy, Bir Bahadur.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Ketevan Batsatsashvili, Zaal Kikvidze, Rainer W. Bussmann.
    Summary: Research in recent years has increasingly shifted away from purely academic research, and into applied aspects of the discipline, including climate change research, conservation, and sustainable development. It has by now widely been recognized that "traditional" knowledge is always in flux and adapting to a quickly changing environment. Trends of globalization, especially the globalization of plant markets, have greatly influenced how plant resources are managed nowadays. While ethnobotanical studies are now available from many regions of the world, no comprehensive encyclopedic series focusing on the worlds mountain regions is available in the market. Scholars in plant sciences worldwide will be interested in this dynamic content. The field (and thus the market) of ethnobotany and ethnopharmacology has grown considerably in recent years. Student interest is on the rise, attendance at professional conferences has grown steadily, and the number of professionals calling themselves ethnobotanists has increased significantly. Various societies of such professionals include the Society for Economic Botany, the International Society of Ethnopharmacology, the Society of Ethnobiology, the International Society for Ethnobiology, and many regional and national societies in the field that currently have thousands of members. Growth has been most robust in BRIC countries. The objective of this new MRW on Ethnobotany of Mountain Regions is to take advantage of the increasing international interest and scholarship in the field of mountain research. We anticipate including the best and latest research on a full range of descriptive, methodological, theoretical, and applied research on the most important plants for each region. Each contribution will be scientifically rigorous and contribute to the overall field of study.

    Contents:
    Central Asia and Altai
    Introduction to the Region
    Kazakhstan
    Kyrgystan and Tadjikistan
    Mongolia
    Siberian Russia
    Plant profiles.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Lenise Cummings-Vaughn, Dulce M. Cruz-Oliver, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: Ethnogeriatric Foundations
    Why Ethnogeriatrics is Important.- Theoretical Foundations
    Demographic Trends in Aging for Ethnogeriatrics
    Impact of Immigration: Disease Exposure and Health Maintenance
    Part II: Research Issues on Ethnogeriatrics
    Clinical and Translational Research
    Trial Participation and inclusion
    Measurement and Instrumentation
    Part III: Clinical Care in Ethnogeriatrics
    Health Disparities: Access and Utilization
    Epidemiology of Aging: Racial/Ethnic Specific Disease Prevalence
    Caregivers: Roles in Health Management
    Hospice/Palliative Care: Concepts of Disease and Dying
    Geriatric Psychiatry: Perceptions, Presentations and Treatments
    Part IV: Education in Ethnogeriatrics
    Incorporating Ethnogeriatrics into Training Competencies
    Assessments for the Practicing Clinicians: Practical Tools
    Part V: Policy and Economics
    Policy: Impact on Delivery and Access
    The Future of Ethnogeriatrics.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Lyndy J. McGaw, Muna Ali Abdalla, editors.
    Summary: The importance of a complementary approach to animal health is highlighted in this book, with core themes encompassing reviews of traditional veterinary medicine for common diseases afflicting livestock, as well as local practices in different areas of the world. The book includes chapters on ethnoveterinary medicine used to prevent and treat ticks and tick-borne diseases, infectious diseases and parasites. Ethnoveterinary practices in parts of the world which have not been comprehensively reviewed before are highlighted, including Estonia, Belarus and the Maghreb-- the north-western tip of Africa. A fascinating account of African ethnoveterinary medicine and traditional husbandry practices is provided by a veteran in the field with a wealth of practical experience in the area. Neglected areas of research involve the relationship of ethnoveterinary medicine with environmental, ethical, cultural and gender aspects, and leading experts explore these issues. The book is intended to provide an informative compilation of current research and future prospects in ethnoveterinary medicine, which hopes to inform and encourage investigations in new directions. Sustainable development requires a concerted effort to combine indigenous knowledge systems with scientific research to improve animal health. This is the case not only in rural areas where access to orthodox veterinary health care may be limited, but also against the backdrop of antibiotic resistance and increased demand for alternative and complementary therapies to enhance the health of both production and companion animals. Students, academics and veterinary professionals will find this book a useful addition to knowledge on present and future aspects of ethnoveterinary research.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Conclusion
    Part I: The Role of Natural Products and Remedies in Treating Animal Diseases
    Chapter 2: The Pharmacological and Nutritional Significance of Plant-Derived Natural Products: An Alternative for Animal Health
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 The Effect of Dietary Plant Natural Products on Animal Performance
    2.3 Reported Plant Natural Products with Pharmacological Significance Against Animal Diseases
    2.3.1 Animal Infectious Diseases
    2.3.1.1 Parasitic Diseases
    2.3.1.2 Bacterial and Fungal Infections 2.3.1.3 Viral Diseases
    2.3.1.4 Inflammatory Diseases
    2.4 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References
    Chapter 3: Alternative Antimicrobials: Medicinal Plants and Their Influences on Animal Infectious Diseases
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Novel Antimicrobials and the Need for Ethnoveterinary Studies
    3.3 In Vitro Studies
    3.4 Discussion
    3.5 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 4: Ethnoremedies Used for Horses in British Columbia and Trinidad and Tobago
    4.1 Background
    4.2 Methods
    4.3 Results
    4.3.1 Commercial Products
    4.3.2 Ocular Remedies
    4.3.3 Injuries 4.3.4 Nutrition
    4.3.5 Stress
    4.3.6 Cultural Practices
    4.3.7 Broodmares
    4.3.8 Insect Repellents
    4.3.9 Poultices
    4.3.10 Illegal Practices
    4.3.11 Canada
    4.4 Discussion
    4.4.1 Trinidad and Tobago
    4.4.2 Canada
    4.5 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 5: Plants for Controlling Parasites in Goats
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Gastrointestinal Parasitism in Goats
    5.3 External Parasitism in Goats
    5.4 Conventional Methods of Controlling Parasites
    5.5 Plant-Derived Ethnoveterinary Medicaments for Controlling Parasites 5.6 Preparation of Plant-Derived Ethnoveterinary Medicines and Administration
    5.7 Anthelmintic and Acaricidal Efficacy of Plants Indigenous to South Africa
    5.8 Phytochemical Composition and Their Health Beneficial Activities
    5.9 Toxicity Effects of Medicinal Plants
    5.10 Mechanism of Action of Plants Used to Control Parasites in Goats
    5.11 Challenges in the Use of Plant-Derived Ethnomedicines
    5.12 Future Potential of Plant-Derived Ethnomedicines
    5.13 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 6: Ethnoveterinary Practices for Control of Ticks in Africa
    6.1 Introduction 6.2 Source of Information
    6.3 Southern Africa
    6.4 East and North Africa
    6.5 West and Central Africa
    6.6 Evaluation and Validation of Medicinal Plants
    6.7 Cultivation and Commercialization of Ethnoveterinary Plants
    References
    Part II: Sociological Aspects and Considerations Relating to Documentation of Ethnoveterinary Medicine
    Chapter 7: Gender Aspects and Multiple Contexts in Ethnoveterinary Practice and Science
    7.1 Introduction
    7.2 Rise and Embedding of Ethnoveterinary Medicine as a Science 7.3 Cultural and Ethical Context of Ethnoveterinary Scientists and Practices.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Bernd Würsig, editor.
    Summary: This book concentrates on the marine mammalian group of Odontocetes the toothed whales, dolphins, and porpoises. In 23 chapters, a total of 40 authors describe general patterns of ethological concepts of odontocetes in their natural environments, with a strong bent towards behavioral ecology. Examples are given of particularly well-studied species and species groups for which enough data exist, especially from the past 15 years. The aim is to give a modern flavor of present knowledge of ethology and behavior of generally large-brained behaviorally flexible mammals that have evolved quite separately from social mammals on land. As well, the plight of populations and species due to humans is described in multiple chapters, with the goal that an understanding of behavior can help to solve or alleviate at least some human-made problems.

    Contents:
    Part I. Patterns of odontocete ethology and behavioral ecology. 1. Grouping behaviors of dolphins and other toothed whales / Shannon Gowans ; 2. Communication by sound and by visual, tactile, and chemical sensing / Peter Tyack ; 3. Social ecology of feeding in an open ocean / Robin Vaughn-Hirshorn ; 4. Sexual strategies : male and female mating tactics / Dara N. Orbach ; 5. Maternal care and offspring development in odontocetes / Janet Mann ; 6. Movement patterns of odontocetes through space and time / Stefan Bräger and Zsuzsanna Bräger ; 7. Predator/prey decisions and the ecology of fear / Mridula Srinivasan ; 8. Odontocete social strategies and tactics along and inshore / Katherine McHugh ; 9. Oceanic dolphin societies : diversity, complexity, and conservation / Sarah L. Mesnick, Lisa T. Ballance, Paul R. Wade, Karen Pryor, and Randall R. Reeves ; 10. Odontocete adaptations to human impact and vice versa / Giovanni Bearzi, Sarah Piwetz, and Randall R. Reeves
    Part II. Examples of odontocete ethology and behavioral ecology : present knowledge and ways forward. 11. Killer whales : behavior, social organization, and ecology of the oceans' apex predators / John K.B. Ford ; 12. Sperm whale : the largest toothed creature on earth / Mauricio Cantor, Shane Gero, Hal Whitehead, and Luke Rendell ; 13. Pilot whales : delphinid matriarchies in deep seas / Jim Boran and Sara Heimlich ; 14. Behavior and ecology of not-so-social odontocetes : Cuvier's and Blainville's beaked whales / Robin W. Baird ; 15. Common bottlenose dolphin foraging : behavioral solutions that incorporate habitat features and social associates / Randall S. Wells ; 16. The Indo-Pacific bottlenose dolphin (Tursiops aduncus) / Richard C. Connor, Mai Sakai, Tadamichi Morisaka, and Simon J. Allen ; 17. Spinner dolphins of islands and atolls / Marc O. Lammers ; 18. Dusky dolphins of continental shelves and deep canyons / Heidi C. Pearson ; 19. Cetacean sociality in rivers, lagoons, and estuaries / Dipani Sutaria, Nachiket Kelkar, Claryana Araújo-Wang, and Marcos Santos ; 20. Hector's and Māui dolphins : small shore-living delphinids with disparate social structures / Rochelle Constantine ; 21. Porpoises the world over : diversity in behavior and ecology / Jonas Teilmann and Signe Sveegaard ; 22. Endangered odontocetes and the social connection : selected examples of species at risk / Thomas A. Jefferson ; 23. Ethology and behavioral ecology of odontocetes : concluding remarks / Bernd Würsig.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Kimberly C. Harper.
    Summary: This book discusses existing problems with Black maternal health and the rhetorical implications of ethos in American society. The Ethos of Black Motherhood in America: Only White Women Get Pregnant examines the ethos of Black and white mothers in America's racialized society. Kimberly C. Harper argues that the current Black maternal health crisis is not a new one, but an existing one rooted in the disregard for Black wombs dating back to America's history with chattel slavery. Examining the reproductive laws that controlled the reproductive experiences of black women, Harper provides a fresh insight into the “bad black mother” trope that Black feminist scholars have theorized and argues that the controlling images of black motherhood are a creation of the American nation-state. In addition to a discussion of black motherhood, Harper also explores the image of white motherhood as the center of the landscape of motherhood. Scholars of communication, gender studies, women's studies, history, and race studies will find this book particularly useful.

    Contents:
    Historical representations of Black motherhood
    Setting the tone
    The legislative decisions governing Black wombs
    Ideology, ethos, and silence
    Where are all the Black mothers in pregnancy books?
    Reproductive justice and Black women's lives
    Black midwives and reclaiming choice
    The will to resist is a form of love
    Conclusions.
  • Digital
    edited by Toshio Nakanishi, Roger R. Markwald, H.Scott Baldwin, Bradley B. Keller, Deepack Srivastava, Hiroyuki Yamagishi.
    Contents:
    Part I. From Molecular Mechanism to Intervention for Congenital Heart Diseases, Now and Future
    Reprogramming Approaches to Cardiovascular Disease: From Developmental Biology to Regenerative Medicine
    The arterial epicardium, a developmental approach to cardiac disease and repair
    Cell sheet tissue engineering for heart failure
    Future treatment of heart failure and pathophysiological analysis of various heart diseases using human iPS cell-derived cardiomyocytes
    Congenital heart disease: in search of remedial etiologies
    Part II. Left-Right Axis and Heterotaxy Syndrome
    Left-right Asymmetry and Human Heterotaxy Syndrome
    Roles of motile and immotile cilia in left-right symmetry breaking
    Role of cilia and left-right patterning in congenital heart disease
    Pulmonary arterial hypertension in patients with heterotaxy /polysplenia syndrome
    Part III. Cardiomyocyte and Myocardial Development
    Single Cell Expression Analyses of Embryonic Cardiac Progenitor Cells
    Meis1 Regulates Post-Natal Cardiomyocyte Cell Cycle Arrest
    Intercellular signalling in cardiac development and disease: NOTCH
    The epicardium in ventricular septation during evolution and development
    S1P-S1p2 signaling in cardiac precursor cells migration
    Myogenic progenitor cell differentiation is dependent on modulation of mitochondrial biogenesis through autophagy
    The role of the thyroid in the developing heart
    Part IV. Valve Development and Diseases
    Atrioventricular valve abnormalities: From molecular mechanisms underlying morphogenesis to clinical perspective
    Molecular Mechanisms of Heart Valve Development and Disease
    A novel role for endocardium in perinatal valve development: Lessons learned from tissue specific gene deletion of the Tie1 receptor tyrosine kinase
    The Role of the Epicardium in the Formation of the Cardiac Valves in the Mouse
    TMEM100, a novel intracellular transmembrane protein essential for vascular development and cardiac morphogenesis
    Cell autonomous regulation of BMP-2 in endocardial cushion cells during AV valvuloseptal morphogenesis
    Part V. The Second Heart Field and Outflow Tract
    Properties of cardiac progenitor cells in the second heart field
    Nodal signaling and congenital heart defects
    Utilizing Zebrafish to Understand Second Heart Field Development
    A history and interaction of outflow progenitor cells implicated in "Takao syndrome"
    The loss of Foxc2 expression in the outflow tract links the interrupted arch in the conditional Foxc2 knockout mouse
    Environmental modification for phenotype of truncus arteriosus in Tbx1 hypomorphic mice
    Part VI. Vascular Development and Diseases
    Extracellular matrix remodeling in vascular development and disease
    The "cardiac neural crest" concept revisited
    Roles of endothelial Hrt genes for vascular development
    Placental Expression of Type 1 and 3 Inositol Trisphosphate Receptors is Required for the Extra-embryonic Vascular Development
    Tissue Remodeling in Vascular Wall in Kawasaki Disease-related Vasculitis Model Mice
    Part VII. Ductus Arteriosus
    Progerin expression during normal closure of the human ductus arteriosus: A case of premature ageing?
    The multiple roles of prostaglandin E2 in the regulation of the ductus arteriosus
    Developmental Differences in the Maturation of Sarcoplasmic Reticulum and Contractile Proteins in Large Blood Vessels Influences Their Contractility
    Fetal and Neonatal Ductus Arteriosus is Regulated with ATP-sensitive Potassium Channel
    Part VIII. Conduction System and Arrhythmia
    Regulation of vertebrate conduction system development
    Cardiac Pacemaker Development from a Tertiary Heart Field
    Endothelin receptor type A expressing cell population in the inflow tract contributes to chamber formation
    Specific isolation of HCN4 positive cardiac pace-making cells derived from embryonic stem cell
    Part IX. Current Molecular Mechanism in Cardiovascular Development
    Combinatorial functions of transcription factors and epigenetic factors in heart development and disease
    Pcgf5 contributes to PRC1 (Polycomb repressive complex 1) in developing cardiac cells
    non-coding RNAs in cardiovascular disease
    Part X. iPS Cells and Regeneration in Congenital Heart Diseases
    Human pluripotent stem cells to model congenital heart disease
    Engineered cardiac tissues generated from immature cardiac and stem-cell derived cells: Multiple approaches and outcomes
    Dissecting the left heart hypoplasia by pluripotent stem cells
    Lentiviral gene transfer to iPS cells; toward the cardiomyocyte differentiation of Pompe disease-specific iPS cells
    Molecular analysis of long-term cultured cardiac stem cells for cardiac regeneration
    Epicardial contribution in neonatal heart regeneration
    Part XI. Current Genetics in Congenital Heart Diseases
    Genetic discovery for congenital heart defects
    Evidence that deletion of ETS-1, a gene in the Jacobsen syndrome (11q-) cardiac critical region, causes congenital heart defects through impaired cardiac neural crest cell function
    Notch signaling in aortic valve development and disease
    To detect and explore mechanism of CITED2 mutation and methylation in children with congenital heart disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Juan Manuel Mejía-Aranguré, editor.
    Summary: Childhood acute leukemias are one of the main causes of death in children aged 1 to 14 years in some countries; and unfortunately, we have been unable to prevent it. Certainly, a good parcel of it is due to the poor understanding about its etiology. This book aims to describe the most important theories and hypothesis regarding childhood acute leukemia. Written by the most outstanding researchers in the field, this book intends to contribute to a greater understanding of the etiology of this disease. It goes beyond the simple and common analysis of risk factors, which hardly allows us to draw definite conclusions. By addressing the etiology of the disease, discussing from molecular biology until epidemiology and clinical manifestations, this book will guide present and future approaches, contributing for a better clinical management of leukemia in children. The knowledge regarding etiology is a crucial step for a better evaluation, prevention and treatment of a disease. Thus, this book finally intends to provide such knowledge, allowing physicians and practitioners to a better manage of childhood acute leukemias.

    Contents:
    1. Acute leukemias
    An introduction
    2. Etiology and prevention of acute leukemias in children
    3. Direct viral leukemogenesis hypothesis
    4. Etiology of leukemia in children with Down syndrome
    5. Origin of leukemia in children with Down syndrome
    6. Model: Susceptibility, exposure and vulnerability period
    7. Molecular origin of acute leukemias
    8. When as environmental factor would be considered cause of acute leukemia in children
    9. Early bone marrow hematopoietic differentiation in acute lymphoblastic leukemia.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Herbert B. Allen.
    Summary: Atopic dermatitis has been called "the itch that rashes", and this book reveals what causes the "itch". It presents completely new and unique findings in eczema: sweat ducts that become occluded with staphylococcal biofilms trigger the innate immune system with TLR2 receptor activity and this leads to production of the "itching" and inflammation in this disease. The Etiology of Atopic Dermatitis details new concepts that bacterial biofilms occlude sweat ducts, trigger the innate immune system, and produce the lesions in atopic dermatitis. The author discusses the findings in terms of microbiology, pathology, immunology, genetics, physiology, treatment, diseases where eczema is considered a secondary component, and diseases not previously thought to be eczema, and followed by an epilogue where eczema and psoriasis are compared. Both these diseases are caused by bacteria, but neither one can be considered an infection. As such, this book is for all who take care of patients with atopic dermatitis, including dermatologists, pediatricians, family practice doctors, allergists and pathologists. It will also be interesting for those involved in research in microbiology, physiology, immunology, and genetics.

    Contents:
    Clinical presentations
    Microbiology
    Pathology
    Immunology
    Genetics
    Physiology
    Treatment
    Diseases in which eczema is a secondary component (Meyerson?s nevus and Doucas Kapetanakis pigmented purpuric dermatosis)
    Diseases with occluded sweat ducts other than eczema (tinea pedis, axillary granular parakeratosis, seborrheic dermatitis)
    The Story of Eczema in Pictures
    Epilogue: A comparison of psoriasis and eczema: both caused by bacteria, but neither an infection.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Guillain, Georges; Alajouanine, Théophile; Mollaret, Pierre.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L346 .G95
    1
  • Digital
    Alexandra Minna Stern.
    Summary: "With an emphasis on the American West, Eugenic Nation explores the long and unsettled history of eugenics in the United States. This expanded second edition includes shocking details that demonstrate that the story is far from over. Alexandra Minna Stern explores the unauthorized sterilization of female inmates in California state prisons and ongoing reparations for North Carolina victims of sterilization, as well as the topics of race-based intelligence tests, school segregation, the U.S. Border Patrol, tropical medicine, the environmental movement, and opposition to better breeding. Radically new and relevant, this edition draws from recently uncovered historical records to demonstrate patterns of racial bias in California's sterilization program and to recover personal experiences of reproductive injustice. Stern connects the eugenic past to the genomic present with attention to the ethical and social implications of emerging genetic technologies"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Race betterment and tropical medicine in imperial San Francisco
    Quarantine and eugenic gatekeeping on the U.S.-Mexican border
    Instituting eugenics in California
    "I like to keep my body whole" : reconsidering eugenic sterilization in California
    California's eugenic landscapes
    Centering eugenics on the family
    Contesting hereditarianism : reassessing the 1960s.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Steven D. Schwartzbach, Shigeru Shigeoka, editors.
    Summary: "This much-needed book is the first definitive volume on Euglena in twenty-fire years, offering information on its atypical biochemistry, cell and molecular biology, and potential biotechnology applications. This volume gathers together contributions from well-known experts, who in many cases played major roles in elucidating the phenomenon discussed. Presented in three parts, the first section of this comprehensive book describes novel biochemical pathways which in some instances have an atypical subcellular localization. The second section details atypical cellular mechanisms of organelle protein import, organelle nuclear genome interdependence, gene regulation and expression that provides insights into the evolutionary origins of eukaryotic cells. The final section discusses how biotechnologists have capitalized on the novel cellular and biochemical features of Euglena to produce value added products. Euglena: Biochemistry, Cell and Molecular Biology will provide essential reading for cell and molecular biologists with interests in evolution, novel biochemical pathways, organelle biogenesis and algal biotechnology. Readers will come away from this volume with a full understanding of the complexities of the Euglena as well as new realizations regarding the diversity of cellular processes yet to be discovered"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Evolutionary origin of Euglena / Bożena Zakryś, Rafał Milanowski, Anna Karnkowska
    The mitochondrion of Euglena gracilis / Verena Zimorski, Cessa Rauch, Jaap J. van Hellemond, Aloysius G.M. Tielens [and others]
    C2 metabolism in Euglena / Masami Nakazawa
    Biochemistry and physiology of reactive oxygen species in Euglena / Takahiro Ishikawa, Shun Tamaki, Takanori Maruta, Shigeru Shigeoka
    Biochemistry and physiology of vitamins in Euglena / Fumio Watanabe, Kazuya Yoshimura, Shigeru Shigeoka
    Biochemistry and physiology of heavy metal resistance and accumulation in Euglena / Rafael Moreno-Sánchez, Sara Rodríguez-Enríquez, Ricardo Jasso-Chávez [and others]
    Cell and molecular biology. Euglena gracilis genome and transcriptome: organelles, nuclear genome assembly strategies and initial features / ThankGod Echezona Ebenezer, Mark Carrington, Michael Lebert [and others]
    Euglena transcript processing / David C. McWatters, Anthony G. Russell
    Photo and nutritional regulation of Euglena organelle development / Steven D. Schwartzbach
    Protein targeting to the plastid of Euglena / Dion G. Durnford, Steven D. Schwartzbach
    Photomovement in Euglena / Donat-P. Häder, Mineo Iseki
    Gravitaxis in Euglena / Donat-P. Häder, Ruth Hemmersbach
    Biotechnology. Wax ester fermentation and its application for biofuel production / Hiroshi Inui, Takahiro Ishikawa, Masahiro Tamoi
    Large-scale cultivation of Euglena / Kengo Suzuki.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Nancy Guillen, editor.
    Summary: The intestine is home to diverse bacterial communities forming the microbiome that influences host nutrition, immune functions and health. DNA-based methods have been instrumental to gain insight into the microbial eukaryotic diversity of the human gut. For instance, the microbiome share the intestinal ecosystem with a population of uni- and multi-cellular eukaryotic organisms. These eukaryotic organisms are very common and often very abundant in individuals with intestinal healthy conditions as well as those with intestinal diseases. The impact of the relationship between bacterial and eukaryotic organisms within the intestinal ecosystem on homeostasis and intestinal diseases is limited and can be considered an important emerging field of research. In addition, the factors that differentiate pathogenic eukaryotes from commensals are still unknown. Our interest focuses on the families of eukaryotic microbes inhabiting the intestine, called "intestinal eukaryome", that include fungi, protists and helminths. All these organisms and their interplay with bacteria and the human immune system are a challenge to assess the impact (present and future) of intestinal infectious diseases on public health. This book presents an overview of the science presented and discussed in the First Eukaryome Congress, held from October 16th to 18th, 2019 at Pasteur Institute in Paris, France. This contributed volume is of special interest for PhD students, postdoctoral fellows, researchers and clinicians interested in the effect of the eukaryotic microbiome on human health.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Eukaryome Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    1 Eukaryome: Emerging Field with Profound Translational Potential
    Introduction
    The Diversity of Species Within the Human Intestinal Eukaryome
    Evolution of Microbial Eukaryotes in the Human Intestine
    Impact of Eukaryome Species in Human Populations
    Protozoan Feed on Bacteria from the Microbiome
    The Eukaryome, Public Health and Zoonosis
    Tissue Homeostasis and Immune-Modulatory Roles of the Eukaryome
    Cytokines as Major Players of Intestinal Immunity During Parasite Infection E. coli Confers Resistance to OS to E. histolytica and Has an Effect on the Redox Proteome of the Parasite
    E. coli Has an Effect on the Transcriptome of E. histolytica Exposed to OS
    Integration of Redox Omics and Transcriptomics Data on the Response of E. histolytica to OS in Presence of E. coli
    Perspectives
    References
    4 Histomonas meleagridis Molecular Traits-From Past to Future
    Introduction-Histomonas meleagridis and Histomonosis
    Defined in Vitro Cultures-An Essential Fundament for Molecular Research
    Histomonas meleagridis-Phylogenetic Positioning Genetic Diversity and Geographical Distribution of Blastocystis Subtypes
    Clinical Association or Commensal Behavior of Blastocystis spp.
    Interaction of Blastocystis spp. and the Gut Microbiota of Asymptomatic Individuals
    Blastocystis spp. and Their Effect on the Immune Response
    References
    7 Cryptosporidium Infection in Bangladesh Children
    Introduction
    Genomic Diversity in Bangladesh Cryptosporidium hominis
    Polymorphic DNA
    Recombination
    Conclusions
    References Histomonas meleagridis-Omics Studies
    Conclusions and Future Aspects
    References
    5 Exploring the Biology and Evolution of Blastocystis and Its Role in the Microbiome
    General Introduction
    Prevalence, Diversity and Biogeography
    Blastocystis and Microbiome
    Blastocystis Biology
    Blastocystis MROs
    Conclusion
    References
    6 Advances in the Study of Blastocystis spp. in Mexico: Prevalence, Genetic Diversity, Clinical Association and Their Possible Role in the Human Intestine
    Background
    Advances in the Study of Blastocystis spp. in Mexico Tissue Protection Against Microbial Eukaryotes
    Intestinal Models to Study Eukaryome-Microbiome-Host Interplay
    References
    2 Resolving Amoebozoan Encystation from Dictyostelium Evo-Devo and Amoebozoan Comparative Genomics
    Encystation as a Universal Protist Survival Strategy
    Insights into Encystation from Dictyostelium Sporulation
    References
    3 Integrative Omics Analysis of the Effect of Bacteria on the Resistance of Entamoeba histolytica to Oxidative Stress
    Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    A.D. Katsambas, Torello M. Lotti, Clio Dessinioti, Angelo Massimiliano D'Erme editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Wiley v. 47-, 1987-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    3
  • Digital
    Sven Sebastian Uhlmann, Clara Ulrich, Steven J. Kennelly, editors.
    Summary: This open access book provides a comprehensive examination of the European Landing Obligation policy from many relevant perspectives. It includes evaluations of its impacts at economical, socio-cultural, ecological and institutional levels. It also discusses the feasibility and benefits of several potential mitigation strategies. The book was timely published, exactly at the time where the Landing Obligation was planned to be fully implemented. This book is of significant interest to all stakeholders involved, but also to the general public of Europe and to other jurisdictions throughout the world that are also searching for ways to deal with by-catch and discard issues.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Global and European perspectives on discard policies.- 1. Strategies used throughout the world to manage fisheries discards
    lessons for implementation of the EU Landing Obligation.- 2. Discards in the Common Fisheries Policy: The evolution of the policy.- 3. Requirements for documentation, data collection and scientific evaluations.- Part II. Potential social, economic and ecological impacts of the Landing Obligation.- 4. Fishing Industry perspectives on the EU Landing Obligation.- 5. The implementation of the Landing Obligation in small-scale fisheries of southern European Union countries.- 6. Potential economic consequences of the Landing Obligation.- 7. The impact of fisheries discards on scavengers in the sea.- Part III. Cultural, institutional and multi-jurisdictional challenges.- 8. How the implementation of the Landing Obligation was weakened.- 9. Muddying the waters of the Landing Obligation: how multi-level governance structures can obscure policy implementation.- 10. The Baltic cod trawl fishery: the perfect fishery for a successful implementation of the Landing Obligation?.- 11. Creating a breeding ground for compliance and honest reporting under the Landing Obligation: insights from behavioural science.- Part IV. Tactical and technological options for reducing unwanted catches.- 12. A Marine Spatial Planning approach to minimize discards: challenges and opportunities of the Landing Obligation in European waters.- 13. The best way to reduce discards is by not catching them!.- 14. Discard avoidance by improving fishing gear selectivity: helping the fishing industry help itself.- 15. Mitigating slipping-related mortality from purse seine fisheries for small pelagic fish: Case studies from European Atlantic waters.- 16. Onboard and vessel layout modifications.- 17. What to do with unwanted catches: valorisation options and selection strategies.- Part V. Control, monitoring and surveillance.- 18. Tools and technologies for the monitoring, control and surveillance of unwanted catches.- 19. Monitoring the implementation of the Landing Obligation: The Last Haul programme.- 20. Possible uses of genetic methods in fisheries under the EU Landing Obligation.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Teresa Pinto-Correia (University of Évora, Portugal), Jørgen Primdahl (University of Copenhagen), Bas Pedroli (Wageningen University & Research).
    Summary: European rural landscapes as we experience them today are the result of ongoing processes and interactions between nature and society. These are changing fast: the future landscapes will be different from those we know currently. Written for academics, policy-makers and practitioners, this book is the first to explore the complex histories of rural landscapes in Europe as a basis for their sound governance in future. Tensions between the needs of agricultural spaces driven by economic incentives and a variety of non-agricultural functions are explored to demonstrate current challenges and the shortfalls in the policies that address them. Using inspiring case studies that highlight the roles of regional agents and communities, the authors go further than the usual analyses to illustrate the importance of local context. Written by experts currently working to revitalise the rural landscapes of Europe, the text concludes with suggestions for improving landscape policy and planning practice.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    José Carlos Santos, John R. Cutcliffe, editors.
    Summary: This groundbreaking book has a number of features that set it apart from other textbooks on this subject: Firstly, it focuses on interpersonal, humanistic and ecological views and approaches to P/MH nursing. Secondly, it highlights patient/client-centered approaches and mental-health-service user involvement. Lastly, it is a genuinely European P/MH nursing textbook - the first of its kind - largely written by mental health scholars from Europe, although it also includes contributions from North America and Australia/New Zealand. Focusing on clinical/practical issues, theory and empirical findings, it adopts an evidence-based or evidence-informed approach. Each contribution presents the state-of-the-art of P/MH nursing in Europe so that it can be transferred to and implemented by P/MH nurses and the broader mental health care community around the globe. As such, it will be the first genuinely 21st century European Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing book.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Section 1. Principles and Theories
    Chapter 2. Taxonomies: Towards a shared nomenclature and language
    Chapter 3. Interpersonal
    Chapter 4. Humanistic
    Chapter 5. Cognitive Behavioural
    Chapter 6. Psychodynamic
    Chapter 7. Biopsychosocial
    Chapter 8. Two types of P/MH nurse
    Section 2. Epidemiology
    Chapter 9. European Mental Health Epidemiology and trends
    Section 3. The person in mental distress
    Chapter 10. Service User involvement and views
    Chapter 11. Psychological adaptation
    Chapter 12. Mental Health nurses and responding to suffering in the 21st century occidental world: Accompanying people on their search for meaning. Archives of Psychiatric Nursing, 29, 19-25
    Chapter 13. Types of personality and how this effects responses to mental health challenges
    Chapter 14. Trauma informed care
    Section 4. Human experie nces of and P/MH nursing responses
    Chapter 15 Problems effecting a person's mood
    Chapter 16 Problems related to anxiety
    Chapter 17 Problems related to schizophrenia
    Chapter 18 Problems related to dementias and cognitive impairment
    Chapter 19 Problems related to substance and alcohol misuse
    Chapter 20 Problems related to eating disorders
    Chapter 21 Problems related to PTSD
    Section 5. P/MH Nursing competencies and ways of working
    Chapter 22. Forming and maintaining Interpersonal Relationships
    Chapter 23. Communication skills
    Chapter 24. Working in groups
    Chapter 25. Working with families
    Chapter 26. Mental Health promotion
    Chapter 27. Therapeutic Milieu
    Chapter 28. Descalation and defusion
    Section 6. Special Populations
    Chapter 29. P/MH Nursing care of children and adolescents
    Chapter 30. P/MH Nursing care of older adults
    Chapter 31. P/MH Nursing care of clients with Dual diagnosis/concurrent disorder
    Chapter 32. P/MH Nursing care of migrants and refugees
    Chapter 33. P/MH Nursing care of the indigent and homeless
    Section 7. Specific Challenges
    Chapter 34. Suicide/Self harm
    Chapter 35. Violence/aggression
    Chapter 36. The withdrawn or recalcitrant client
    Chapter 37. Combating stigma
    Chapter 38. Navigating the legal minefield of mental health care- f) P/MH nursing: cultural and spiritual contexts and challenges
    Section 8. Settings and Contexts
    Chapter 39. Inpatient
    Chapter 40. Day patient (out patient) and Community
    Chapter 41. Green Care and Therapeutic Communities
    Chapter 42. Prisons, Forensics and Correctional facilities
    Chapter 43. "E" Health, telehealth and telematics
    Chapter 44. Public Health or ecological approach.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    George Bentley, editor.
    Summary: "This important reference textbook covers the surgical management of all major orthopaedic and traumatological conditions. The book will act as the major source of education and guidance in surgical practice for surgeons and trainees, especially those preparing for higher surgical examinations and the Board of Orthopaedics and Traumatology examinations within and beyond Europe. The emphasis throughout is on the application of current knowledge and research to technical problems, how to avoid operative problems, and how to salvage complications if they occur. The didactic text is complemented by abundant illustrations that highlight the essentials of each clinical scenario. The authors are all recognized international authorities active at congresses and workshops as well as in universities and hospitals across the world."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Cathy Willermet, Sang-Hee Lee.
    Summary: "Biological anthropology is a diverse field, with countless research methods and techniques in different subdisciplines. This book takes a critical perspective to the current state of the field, exploring theory and practice in paleoanthropology, bioarchaeology, and ecology. Contributors challenge how evidence is discovered, collected, and interpreted, and explain that researchers gain insights by defamiliarizing themselves from well-known methods and taking a different perspective - "making the familiar strange." The book covers how researchers' biases and assumptions affect the interpretation of topics such as human evolution and population movements; race, health, and disability; bodies and embodiment; and landscapes and ecology. A final chapter includes a critical assessment of new thinking about technology, in addition to the multilayered and complex nature of both research questions and evidence. This is an insightful text for researchers and graduate students in anthropology, biology, ecology, history, and philosophy of science"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Mbuso Precious Mabuza.
    Summary: This book makes an original contribution in addressing contemporary critical discussions and reflections on international health policies, strategies, programmes, systems, diseases, disasters, and public health issues. It includes reflections on how levels of governance, development and technical assistance affect countries disaster readiness and health systems. In addressing inequalities between the rich and the poor, and unpacking how this affects public health services, policies, strategies and their collective implementation, the book aspires to improve standards of public health and quality of life for sustainable development globally. It provides a comprehensive overview of international health policies and aid structures, and pays particularly close attention to policies on HIV/AIDS in the workplace, discussing how HIV/AIDS has overshadowed non-communicable diseases (NCDs) such as hypertension and stroke, which are on the rise. This book will be of great benefit to students and researchers, as well as policymakers in governmental and non-governmental organisations, who have an interest in achieving greater sustainability and improved health for populations in low-, middle- and high-income countries. It will be an indispensable book for students in Public Health programmes, and related courses.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 International Public Health and the Burden of Diseases
    Chapter 2 Inequity in Low- and Middle-Income Countries and the Colonial History of Public Health
    Chapter 3 Health Systems
    Chapter 4 The UN Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) and Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs)
    Chapter 5 Diseases Control and the Promotion of Public Health Equity
    Chapter 6 Adolescents, Sexual Reproductive Health (SRH) and Equity
    Chapter 7 Globalisation, Climate Change, and Disasters
    Chapter 8 Conclusions and Notes to the Reader.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    by Jeffrey W. Alstete, Iona College, USa, Nicholas J. Beutell, Iona College, USA, John P. Meyer, Iona College, USA.
    Summary: Faculty members, scholars, and researchers often ask where they should publish their work; which outlets are most suitable to showcase their research? Which journals should they publish in to ensure their work is read and cited? How can the impact of their scholarly output be maximized? The answers to these and related questions affect not only individual scholars, but also academic and research institution stakeholders who are under constant pressure to create and implement organizational policies, evaluation measures and reward systems that encourage quality, high impact research from their members. The explosion of academic research in recent years, along with advances in information technology, has given rise to omnipresent and increasingly important scholarly metrics. These measures need to be assessed and used carefully, however, as their widespread availability often tempts users to jump to improper conclusions without considering several caveats. While various quantitative tools enable the ranking, evaluating, categorizing, and comparing of journals and articles, metrics such as author or article citation counts, journal impact factors, and related measures of institutional research output are somewhat inconsistent with traditional goals and objectives of higher education research and scholarly academic endeavors.
  • Print
    edited by Nick Heather, Matt Field, Antony C. Moss, and Sally Satel.
    Summary: "This ground-breaking book advances the fundamental debate about the nature of addiction. As well as presenting the case for seeing addiction as a brain disease, it brings together all the most cogent and penetrating critiques of the brain disease model of addiction (BDMA) and the main grounds for being skeptical of BDMA claims. The idea that addiction is a brain disease dominates thinking and practice worldwide. However, the editors of this book argue that our understanding of addiction is undergoing a revolutionary change, from being considered a brain disease to a disorder of voluntary behavior. The resolution of this controversy will determine the future of scientific progress in understanding addiction, together with necessary advances in treatment, prevention, and societal responses to addictive disorders. This volume brings together the various strands of the contemporary debate about whether or not addiction is best regarded as a brain disease. Contributors offer arguments for and against, and reasons for uncertainty; they also propose novel alternatives to both brain disease and moral models of addiction. In addition to reprints of classic articles from the addiction research literature, each section contains original chapters written by authorities on their chosen topic. The editors have assembled a stellar cast of chapter authors from a wide range of disciplines - neuroscience, philosophy, psychiatry, psychology, cognitive science, sociology, and law - including some of the most brilliant and influential voices in the field of addiction studies today. The result is a landmark volume in the study of addiction which will be essential reading for advanced students and researchers in addiction as well as professionals such as medical practitioners, psychiatrists, psychologists of all varieties, and social workers"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Section I For the Brain Disease Model of Addiction
    1. Introduction to Section I
    2. Addiction is a brain disease, and it matters
    3. Neurobiologic advances from the brain disease model of addiction
    4. Time to connect: bringing social context into addiction neuroscience
    5. Drug addiction: updating actions to habits to compulsions ten years on
    6. Is addiction a brain disease? The incentive-sensitization view
    7. Addiction is a brain disease (but does it matter?)
    Section II Against the Brain Disease Model of Addiction
    8. Introduction to Section II
    9. Giving the neurobiology of addiction no more than its due
    10. The brain disease model of addiction: is it supported by the evidence and has it delivered on its promises?
    11. Brain disease model of addiction: why is it so controversial?
    12. Brain disease model of addiction: misplaced priorities?
    13. Addiction and the brain-disease fallacy
    14. Recovery is possible: overcoming 'addiction' and its rescue hypotheses
    15. Superpower rivalry, the American Grand Narrative, and the BDMA
    16. My brain disease made me do it: bioethical implications of the Brain Disease Model of Addiction
    17. Addiction is a human problem, but brain disease models divert attention and resources away from human-level solutions
    18. Before 'rock bottom'? Problem framing effects on stigma and change among harmful drinkers
    19. Brain change in addiction: disease or learning? Implications for science, policy, and care
    20. Brains or persons? Is it coherent to ascribe psychological powers to brains?
    21. The persistence of addiction is better explained by socioeconomic deprivation-related factors powerfully motivating goal-directed drug choice than by automaticity, habit or compulsion theories favored by the brain disease model
    22. Addiction and criminal responsibility: the law's rejection of the disease model
    23. One cheer for the brain-disease interpretation of addiction
    Section III Unsure about the Brain Disease Model of Addiction
    24. Introduction to Section III
    25. In search of addiction in the brains of laboratory animals
    26. Addiction treatment providers' engagements with the Brain Disease Model of Addiction
    27. Balancing the ethical and methodological pros and cons of the BDMA
    28. The making of the epistemic project of addiction in the brain
    29. Addiction and the meaning of disease
    30. The pitfalls of recycling substance-use disorder criteria to diagnose behavioral addictions
    Section IV Alternatives to the Brain Disease Model of Addiction
    31. Introduction to Section IV
    32. Addiction is socially engineered exploitation of natural biological vulnerability
    33. Toward an ecological understanding of addiction
    34. Addiction biases choice in the mind, brain, and behavior systems: beyond the brain disease model
    35. Multiple enactments of the brain disease model: which model, when, for whom, and at what cost?
    36. The social perspective and the BDMA's entry into the non-medical stronghold in Sweden and other Nordic countries
    37. Beyond the medical model: addiction as a response to trauma and stress
    38. Psychotherapeutic strategies to enhance motivation and cognitive control
    39. Addiction is not (only) in the brain: molar behavioral economic models of etiology and cessation of harmful substance use
    40. Understanding substance use disorders among veterans: virtues of the Multitudinous Self Model
    41. How an addiction ontology can unify competing conceptualizations of addiction
    42. Looping processes in the development of and desistance from addictive behaviors
    43. Recovery and identity: a socially focused challenge to brain disease models
    44. Replacing the BDMA: a paradigm shift in the field of addiction.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2022
  • Digital
    editors, Leonard G. Feld, John D. Mahan ; associate editor, Mary Anne Jackson.
    Contents:
    Introduction: core knowledge for medical decision-making
    Part I: Infectious diseases: Section 1: Common infectious conditions. Acute otitis media and acute bacterial rhinosinusitis
    Central venous catheter-associated bloodstream infections
    Gastroenteritis
    Meningitis
    Osteomyelitis and septic arthritis
    Pneumonia and empyema
    Skin and soft-tissue infections
    Section 2: Bacterial infections. Anaerobic infections
    Brucella
    Cat-scratch disease
    Cholera
    Diphtheria
    Group A streptococcal infections
    Group B streptococcal infections
    Helicobacter pylori infections
    Listeria monocytogenes infections
    Lyme disease
    Meningococcal disease
    Pertussis
    Rat-bite fever
    Staphylococcus aureus infections
    Tetanus
    Tick-borne rickettsial diseases
    Tuberculosis and nontuberculous mycobacterial infections
    Tularemia
    Section 3: Viral infections. Cytomegalovirus
    Encephalitis
    Enteroviruses and Parechoviruses
    Epstein-Barr virus
    HIV
    Influenza
    Measles, mumps, rubella
    Parvovirus
    Rabies
    Respiratory viruses
    Rotavirus
    Varicella-zoster virus
    Section 4: Fungal infections. Aspergillosis
    Candidiasis
    Endemic mycoses
    Mucormycosis
    Section parasitic infections
    Intestinal helminthic infections
    Malaria
    Pneumocystis jiroveci infection
    Schistosomiasis
    Toxoplasmosis
    Part II: Dermatology. Acne
    Alopecia
    Atopic dermatitis and eczematous disorders
    Diaper dermatitis
    Erythema nodosum
    Pigmented lesions
    Pruritus
    Psoriasis and papulosquamous disorders
    Rashes
    Scabies
    Stevens-Johnson syndrome and toxic epidermal necrolysis
    Warts and Molluscum contagiosum.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Leonard G. Feld, John D. Mahan ; associate editors, John M. Lorenz, Warren M. Siegel.
    Summary: Obtain evidence-based information to make timely and accurate diagnoses and treatment decisions. Continuing with this volume, Succinct Pediatrics is an ongoing series covering the entire scope of pediatric medicine. Each volume includes concise chapters with key features and invaluable tables and algorithms--resources health care professionals can use to deliver the highest quality of care. This third volume features 41 topics with key points and detailed therapies in neonatology, genetics, neurology, and developmental and behavioral disorders. Evidence-based levels of decision support are also provided throughout the book to provide insight into diagnostic tests and treatment modalities"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Pt. 1 Neonatology
    1.Anemia / Sujit Sheth
    2.Apnea of Prematurity / David G. Fisher
    3.Birth Injuries / Catherine Hansen
    4.Congenital Heart Disease / John M. Lorenz
    5.Congenital Hypothyroidism / Thomas A. Wilson
    6.Herpes Simplex Virus Infection / Samir S. Shah
    7.Intestinal Obstruction in the Newborn / Robert A. Cowles
    8.Neonatal Hypoglycemia / Richard A. Polin
    9.Neonatal Neutropenia / Said Omar
    10.Neonatal Polycythemia / Virginia Delaney-Black
    11.Neonatal Sepsis / Richard A. Polin
    12.Neonatal Thrombocytopenia / David A. Paul
    13.Patent Ductus Arteriosus / Jeff Reese
    14.Perinatal HIV Infection / Marc Foca
    15.Prenatal Exposure to Substances of Abuse / Tove Rosen
    16.Respiratory Distress Syndrome / Andrew C. Herman
    17.Sudden Unexpected Infant Death / Rachel Y. Moon
    pt. 2 Genetics
    18.Down Syndrome and Turner Syndrome / J. Edward Spence
    19.Chromosomal Abnormalities / Robert Marion Note continued: 20.Inborn Errors of Metabolism / Susan E. Sparks
    21.Neurofibromatosis 1 / Laurie Demmer
    22.Teratogens / Robert Marion
    23.Tuberous Sclerosis Complex / John J. Bissler
    pt. 3 Neurology
    24.Altered Levels of Consciousness / Joshua Cappell
    25.Ataxia and Movement Disorders / Phillip L. Pearl
    26.Cerebral Palsy / Joelle Mast
    27.Dizziness and Vertigo / Klaus Jahn
    28.Epidural and Subdural Hematomas / Richard C. E. Anderson
    29.Febrile Seizures / Russell C. Bailey
    30.Headaches and Migraines / Marco A. Arruda
    31.Hydrocephalus / George I. Jallo
    32.Hypotonia / Lamar Davis
    33.Idiopathic Intracranial Hypertension / Shannon Standridge
    34.Seizure Management / Lorraine M. Lazar
    35.Weakness / Amy Harper
    pt. 4 Development and Behavior
    36.Autism Spectrum Disorder / Joseph Stegman
    37.Behavior Patterns in Infancy and Preschool / Yasmin Suzanne N. Senturias
    38.Depressive and Bipolar Disorders / David F. Lelio Note continued: 39.Fears, Phobias, and Panic Attacks / Mary K. Rogers
    40.Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder / Anna Kerlek
    41.Tourette Syndrome / David H. Dennison.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2018
  • Digital
    Juan Idiaquez, Eduardo Benarroch, Martin Nogues, editors.
    Summary: This book approaches the basic features of autonomic dysfunction in a practical way, complemented by an examination of unique and didactic case reports. Unlike other books on autonomic disorders, its goal is to provide a brief, practical and ready to use resource for physicians faced with patients' autonomic complaints. Autonomic dysfunctions are specific disorders that affect or are related to the autonomic nervous system. Despite being primarily a field of neurology, it also has important ties to cardiology, endocrinology, gastroenterology and many other medical specialties. Moreover, as the action of the autonomous system tends to be diffuse, affecting different systems and organs throughout the body, its disorders may present a complex and multifaceted background, complicating its diagnosis, clinical evaluation and management. Thus, it is important to gather all the relevant information about autonomic dysfunction in a handy and practical way, providing an accessible guide for professionals and practitioners across a wide range of specialties. The content presented in this book is divided into two main parts: In the first part, the general principles of autonomic dysfunction are discussed. Here the reader will find information on the anatomy, physiology and pharmacology of the nervous system, the classification of autonomic disorders, general evaluation of these disorders and the principles of their management. In the second part, clinical cases for the most important autonomic disorders are presented and discussed in detail, particularly in light of their special importance for differential diagnosis. Using a clinical case-based approach, Evaluation and Management of Autonomic Disorders offers readers - primarily but not exclusively general practitioners in the fields of neurology, internal medicine, family medicine and cardiology - rapid access to the information required for the evaluation and management of these complex patients.

    Contents:
    PART A. GENERAL PRINCIPLES
    1. Anatomy, physiology and pharmacology of the Autonomic nervous system
    2. Classification of Autonomic disorders
    3. General evaluation of autonomic disorders
    4. Principles of managements of autonomic disorders.- PART B. CLINICAL CASES
    1. Acute or subacute Pure autonomic failure
    2. Chronic and progressive Pure autonomic failure
    3. Chronic autonomic failure associated with Parkinsonism, ataxia or dementia
    4. Autonomic failure in chronic peripheral neuropathy
    5. Autonomic failure in subacute sensory ganglioneuronopathies
    6. Autonomic failure and acute motor weakness
    7. Distal painful autonomic neuropathy
    8. Orthostatic intolerance
    9. Autonomic hyperactivity.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Bonnie Huang Hall, editor.
    Summary: Primary care physicians are often the first caretakers to whom patients present for chronic pain. The current literature targeted at these providers is sparse, and the existing literature is very broad and large in scope and size. There are no quick pocket guides on this topic that the general practitioner may use as a point of care reference. This first of its kind text provides a practical, hands-on approach to the evaluation and treatment of chronic pain in the family medicine setting. Divided into four main sections, the first part focuses on the general approach to any patient suffering from chronic pain. Chapters in this section include the physical exam, formulating a diagnosis, formulating a variety of treatment plans including medication, physical therapy and psychiatric therapy, and specialist referral, among others. The second section focuses on evaluation and management of the chronic pain patient who requires opioid therapy. This section includes useful guidance on how to convert into morphine equivalents, interpretation of urine drug tests, and helpful office procedures for managing refills. It gives practical guidance on how to prescribe opioid reversal agents and opioid tapering regimens. A systems based approach to managing the patient is also discussed. The third section informs the reader of viable alternative and complementary treatment options. Five main treatment types are discussed each with their own separate chapter. These include musculoskeletal-based therapy, medicinal therapies, sense-based therapy, relaxation-based therapy and physical/exercise-based therapy. Given the controversy and limited training primary care physicians have on marijuana and cannabis, one chapter is dedicated specifically to inform the primary care physician on marijuana as a medicinal therapy for chronic pain. The fourth section focuses entirely on myofascial pain and trigger point therapy. The chapters in this section teach the reader how to examine and diagnose m yofascial pain and distinguish between fibromyalgia. They also provide general principles of myofascial trigger point therapy and how to practically perform these in sthe clinical setting. Topics discussed include: trigger point massage, cold and stretch, isometric contraction, trigger point injection, and ischemic compression. It also includes general instruction so that the practitioner can teach patients how to perform trigger point therapy easily in their own home. The last chapter details chronic myofascial back pain and how to examine and practically treat with trigger point therapies. Evaluation and Management of Chronic Pain is a first-of-its-kind pocket-guide text specifically designed for primary care providers. It also appeals to residents, medical students and any other professional interested in treating chronic pain.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part 1 GENERAL EVALUATION AND MANAGEMENT OF CHRONIC NONCANCER PAIN
    Chapter 1 History Taking for Chronic Pain
    Chapter 2 Physical Examination for Chronic Pain
    Chapter 3 Diagnostic Evaluation for Chronic Pain
    Chapter 4 Specialist Evaluation for Chronic Pain
    Chapter 5 Formulating a Diagnosis for Chronic Pain
    Chapter 6 Management of Chronic Pain: Medication
    Chapter 7 Management of Chronic Pain: Nonpharmacological and Multidisciplinary approach
    Pat 2 THE OPIOID REQUIRING PATIENT
    Chapter 8 The Opioid Requiring Patient: Evaluation and Management
    Chapter 9 The Opioid Requiring Patient: Office Level Management
    Chapter 10 The Opioid Requiring Patient: Systems Level Management
    Chapter 11 Implementing and following a safe and compassionate opioid-prescribing policy
    Part 3 COMPLEMENTARY AND ALTERNATIVE MEDICINE AND CHRONIC NONCANCER PAIN.-Introduction to Complementary and Alternative medicine
    Chapter 12 Manipulative Therapies for Chronic Pain
    Chapter 13 Energy based Therapies for Chronic Pain
    Chapter 14 Medical Marijuana for Chronic Pain
    Chapter 15 Medicinal Therapies for Chronic Pain
    Chapter 16 Exercise or Movement based Therapies for Chronic Pain
    Chapter 17 Mental based Therapies for Chronic Pain
    Part 4 CHRONIC MYOFASCIAL PAIN
    Chapter 18 Chronic Myofascial Pain, Fibromylagia, and Myofascial Trigger Points
    Chapter 19 Treatment principles of myofascial pain syndrome
    Chapter 20 Example Myofascial Pain Case: Quadratus lumborum trigger point and chronic low back pain.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Dhyanesh A. Patel, Robert T. Kavitt, Michael F. Vaezi, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a state-of-the-art overview of dysphagia. The text reviews current evidence behind the diagnosis, evaluation, and management of esophageal disorders that cause dysphagia, including GERD, eosinophilic esophagitis, achalasia, and spastic motor disorders. The book also focuses on the different variants of dysphagia, from oropharyngeal dysphagia to functional dysphagia, highlights advances in testing for dysphagia, and features evidence-based algorithms. Written by experts in the field, Evaluation and Management of Dysphagia: An Evidence-Based Approach is a valuable resource for gastroenterologists, otolaryngologists, and other clinicians and practitioners who treat patients afflicted with dysphagia.

    Contents:
    Dysphagia: How to Recognize and Narrow the Differential
    Advances in Testing for Dysphagia
    Oropharyngeal Dysphagia
    Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Non-Reflux Mediated Esophageal Strictures
    Eosinophilic Esophagitis
    Achalasia
    Spastic Motor Disorders
    Ineffective Motility Disorder
    Functional Dysphagia.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Lewis R. Roberts, Ju Dong Yang, Sudhakar K. Venkatesh, editors.
    Summary: This text provides a comprehensive and state-of-the-art overview of the evaluation and management of liver mass lesions. Major topics covered include epidemiology, the use of different imaging modalities in the differential diagnosis of liver lesions, the use of biomarkers and immunohistochemical stains for diagnosis, and treatment of the different types of liver masses. These include hepatocellular adenoma and hepatocellular carcinoma, fibrolamellar carcinoma, cholangiocarcinoma, hemangioma, focal nodular hyperplasia, liver masses in adult patients with congenital heart disease, and other infectious, inflammatory, and cystic lesions of the liver. The volume presents highly practical case presentations of typical patients seen in a clinical hepatobiliary practice. Written by experts from multiple disciplines, Evaluation and Management of Liver Masses is a valuable resource for clinicians and professionals who manage patients with these conditions.

    Contents:
    Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    Cholangiocarcinoma
    Biphenotypic Tumors
    Hepatacellular Adenoma
    Infectious and Inflammatory Lesions of the Liver
    Focal Nodular Hyperplasia
    Hemangiomas and Other Vascular Tumors
    Rare Liver Tumors
    Liver Lesions in Congestive Hepatopathy
    Fibrolamellar Carcinoma
    Gallbladder Carcinoma
    Cystic Lesions of the Liver.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    edited by Emma Ciafaloni, Patrick F. Chinnery, Robert C. Griggs.
    Contents:
    Structure and function of normal muscle / Robert C. Griggs
    Evaluation of the patient with myopathy / Robert C. Griggs, Emma Ciafaloni
    Genetic evaluation of the patient and family / Gerald Pfeffer, Patrick F. Chinnery
    The muscular dystrophies / Emma Ciafaloni, Robert C. Griggs
    Myofibrillar myopathies / Duygu Selcen
    Congenital myopathies / Francesco Muntoni, Caroline Sewry, Heinz Jungbluth
    Metabolic myopathies / Gráinne S. Gorman, Patrick F. Chinnery
    Mitochondrial myopathy / Gerald Pfeffer, Patrick F. Chinnery
    Muscle channelopathies / Araya Puwanant, Robert C. Griggs
    Inflammatory myopathies / Anthony A. Amato, Andrew Mammen
    Myopathies of systemic disease and toxic myopathies
    Muscle pain and fatigue / Michael R. Rose, Dr. Patrick Gordon
    Prevention and management of systemic complications of myopathies / Wendy M. King, Robert C. Griggs.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC925 .G75 2014
    1
  • Digital
    Charles P. Friedman, Jeremy C. Wyatt, Joan S. Ash.
    Summary: This 3rd edition of Evaluation Methods in Biomedical and Health Informatics has been extensively revised and expanded. It builds on a solid foundation of evaluation theory to explain methods and techniques within health informatics, using many examples, real-world case studies and numerous self-tests with answers. Expanded to 20 rather than 12 chapters, new chapters have been added on qualitative methods, ethics, mixed methods, evidence-based informatics and how to conduct evaluation studies using routine, real-world data. Designed as a practical guide for masters and PhD students, informatics researchers and seasoned professionals seeking a comprehensive resource, this book describes health and biomedical information resource evaluation in a practical stepwise manner. Critiques and discussion of actual evaluation studies help to build the readers knowledge of the judicious application of the techniques described. As information and communications technologies take on increasingly central roles in self-care, healthcare, biomedical research and education, understanding how to design and carry out successful rigorous evaluation studies becomes more imperative. Evaluation Methods in Biomedical and Health Informatics is an unparalleled reference for a broad range of health information professionals and is usable as both a textbook to support formal courses and a reference book for researchers and practitioners. From those training for careers in informatics to on-site biomedical information systems staff, this is an invaluable guide to the successful evaluation of digital healthcare, eHealth, telemedicine, electronic health records and other clinical and non-clinical information systems.

    Contents:
    Challenges of Evaluation in Biomedical Informatics
    Evaluation as a Field
    Determining What to Study
    The Structure of Objectivist Studies
    Measurement Fundamentals
    Developing and Improving Measurement Methods
    The Design of Demonstration Studies
    Analyzing the Results of Demonstration Studies
    Subjectivist Approaches to Evaluation
    Performing Subjectivist Studies in the Qualitative Traditions Responsive to Users
    Economic Aspects of Evaluation
    Proposing and Communicating the Results of Evaluation Studies: Ethical, Legal, and Regulatory Issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Uday C. Ghoshal, editor.
    Summary: This volume features chapters written by experts from global academia, including from India, Singapore, Japan, Taiwan, Europe and USA, integrating knowledge on evaluation methods with evidence of best practices for the management of motility disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Richard A. Windsor, MS, PHD, MPH.
    Contents:
    Introduction to evaluation
    Planning an evaluation
    Efficacy and effectiveness evaluation
    Measurement and analysis in evaluation
    Process and qualitative evaluation
    Cost analysis and economic evaluation.
    Digital Access Oxford 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Joanne V. Hickey, Eileen R. Giardino.
    Summary: "The preface for the third edition builds on the intent described in the preface for the second edition, which is, to provide a high-quality resource on evaluation for nurses. The intent of this book is to address the special needs of DNP nurses to understand the principles of conducting large scale evaluations, and translating those principles into developing smaller projects, such as unit-based projects or projects required in DNP degree programs. Five years after the preparation of the second edition of this book, some things (principles/concepts/content) have stayed the same while significant changes in other areas of content and knowledge are noteworthy. First, what has stayed the same is the expectation of competency in evaluation of patient outcomes of all professional nurses. However, the competency bar is raised for Doctor of Nursing Practice (DNP) nurses for evaluating health care and health care systems from a systematic and comprehensive science-based data driven perspective. Evaluation occurs in all areas of healthcare including populations, organizations, systems, programs/projects, health informatics, practice guidelines/protocols, health policy, and other health-related entities. Along with the higher expectations for DNP nurses come greater opportunities to lead evaluation teams and influence high-level decision making in all areas of health care"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Evaluation and Advanced Nursing Practice : The Mandate for Evaluation / Joanne V. Hickey
    The Nature of Evidence as a Basis for Evaluation / Joanne V. Hickey
    Models for Evaluation in Advanced Nursing Practice / Joanne V. Hickey
    Evaluation and Outcomes / Eileen G. Giardino
    Financial Evaluation / Eileen R. Giardino and Angelo P. Giardino
    Evaluation of Organizations and Systems / Nancy Manning Crider and Beth Ulrich
    Evaluation of Health Care Information Systems and Patient Care Technology / Juliana J. Brixey and V. Gail Roberson Turner
    Planning a Program or Project Evaluation / Joanne V. Hickey
    Evaluation in Quality Improvement / Eileen R. Giardino
    Evaluation of Patient Care Based on Standards, Guidelines, and Protocols / Ronda G. Hughes
    Evaluation of Interprofessional Health Care Teams / Joanne V. Hickey
    Evaluation of Simulation to Support Ongoing Competency of the Health
    Care Workforce / Kristen Starnes-Ott and M. Roseann Diehl
    Evaluation of Populations and Population Health / Joanne V. Hickey
    Evaluation of Health Policy: From Problem to Practice / Joyce Batcheller, Peggy L. Landrum, Nancy Manning Crider, and Patricia S. Yoder-Wise
    Drivers of Change, Impact, and Challenges for Evaluation of Health Care / Joanne V. Hickey and Eileen R. Giardino.
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
  • Print
    editors, Frederic J. Zucchero, Mark J. Hogan, Christine D. Schultz.
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Reference (Upstairs)
    RM302 .A512
    2
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    RM302 .A512
    2
  • Print
    Evaporated Milk Association.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I602.2 .E93 1929
    1
  • Print
    Darren Diess, BAS, and Michelle Gilmore, CFRE.
    Summary: Plain and simple, people donate to causes because they want to be part of something larger than themselves. They want to make a difference. In "Eventology", Darren Diess and Michelle Gilmore skillfully combine the art, science, and math of event fundraising to create a comprehensive resource guide to help you flawlessly execute a successful fundraising event and build long-term donor relationships that equate to sustainability for your cause. After reading "Eventology", you will come away with the skills to develop an iron-clad event plan, build an interdisciplinary winning team, leverage technoogy to measure effectiveness, implement innovative funding techniques, expertly engage sponsors, and create a tailored event experience to build deep and lasting commitments from your donors. -- back cover

    Contents:
    Acknowledgments
    Preface
    Chapter 1: The hidden cost of tradition
    Chapter 2: Mindset
    a new way of thinking
    Chapter 3: Collaborative fundraising: 2 + 2 = 10
    Chapter 4: The art & science of delivering your message
    Chapter 5: Different types of giving
    Chapter 6: People
    your most important asset
    Chapter 7: Going digital
    the importance of technology in fundraising. EVENTOLOGY 101 : Chapter 8: Guest focused event management
    Chapter 9: Fundraising math
    Chapter 10: Before the event
    Chapter 11: The event
    Chapter 12: Post-event
    Conclusion
    About the authors
    Glossary
    Bibliography.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BioSciences Career Center Collection (Duck Room)
    Media Gov & Nonprof 103
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Wes Ely, MD.
    Summary: "Over the next ten years, 40 to 60 million people in this country will be admitted to the ICU. Most of these hospitalizations will be sudden, unexpected, and harrowing, experiences that can alter patients and their families physically and emotionally, with effects that endure for years. Every Deep-Drawn Breath is a rich blend of science, medical history, profoundly humane patient stories, and personal reflection. Dr. Wes Ely's mission is to prevent patients from being inadvertently harmed by the technology that is keeping them alive. Readers will experience the world of critical care through the eyes of this physician who drastically changed his clinical practice, and through cutting-edge research convinced others to do the same. For decades, millions of ICU survivors left the hospital with disabling symptoms including newly acquired dementia, depression, PTSD, and nerve damage, all now recognized as Post Intensive Care Syndrome, or PICS (a severe subset of Long Covid symptoms). Dr. Ely's groundbreaking investigations advanced the understanding of PICS and introduced crucial changes that reshaped intensive care: minimizing sedation, maximizing mobility, attending to the family, and providing supportive aftercare. Dr. Ely shows that this new way-technology plus touch-is the future of healthcare, and is a proven path toward reclaiming life. Full of wisdom and heart, Every Deep-Drawn Breath is an essential resource for anyone who will be affected by critical illness, which is all of us"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Prologue
    Fractured Lives : Embracing a New Normal
    Early History of Critical Care : Bumpy Gravel Roads to ICU Interstates
    Culture of Critical Care : The Era of Deep Sedation and Immobilization
    The World of Transplant Medicine : Harvesting the Right Path Forward
    Delirium Disaster : An Invisible Calamity for Patients and Families
    The View from the Other Side of the Bed : Illness Revisited
    Deciding My Path : Combining Research with Clinical Care
    Unshackling the Brain : Finding Consciousness in the ICU
    Awakening Change : Patients Are Resurfacing
    Spreading the Word : Putting New Ideas into Practice
    Finding the Person in the Patient : Hope through Humanization
    End-of-Life Care in the ICU : Patient and Family Wishes Can Come True
    Epilogue.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    RA975.5.I56 E49 2021
    1
  • Print
    Howard J. Ross.
    Summary: If you are human, you are biased. From this fundamental truth, Howard Ross explores the biases we each carry within us. Most people do not see themselves as biased towards people of different races or different genders. And yet in virtually every area of modern life disparities remain. Even in corporate America, which has for the most part embraced the idea of diversity as a mainstream idea, patterns of disparity remain rampant. Why? Breakthroughs in the cognitive and neurosciences give some idea why our results seem inconsistent with our intentions. Bias is natural to the human mind, a survival mechanism that is fundamental to our identity. And overwhelmingly it is unconscious. Incorporating anecdotes from today's headlines alongside case studies from over 30 years as a nationally prominent diversity consultant, Ross help readers understand how unconscious bias impacts our day-to-day lives and particularly our daily work lives. And, he answers the question: Is there anything we can do about it? by providing examples of behaviors that the reader can engage in to disengage the impact of their own biases. With an added appendix that includes lessons for handling conflict and bias in the workplace, this book offers a resource for a broad audience, from individuals seeking to understand and confront their own biases to human resource professionals and business leaders determined to create more bias-conscious organizations in the belief that productivity, personal happiness, and social growth are possible if we first understand the widespread and powerful nature of the biases we don t realize we have.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Blinded by the light of our bias
    If you are human, you are biased
    Thinking about thinking
    The many faces of bias
    Life, death and unconscious bias on a rainy night
    Who has the power?
    Like water for the fish: Networks of bias in everyday life
    Shifting to neutral: How we can learn to disengage from bias
    Incubators of consciousness: Creating more conscious organization
    Conclusion: A brave new world, a grand new journey.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BF575.P9 R67 2014
    1
  • Print
    Edwidge Danticat.
    Summary: A romance unexpectedly sparks between two wounded friends. A marriage ends for what seem like noble reasons, but with irreparable consequences. A young woman holds on to an impossible dream even as she fights for her survival. Two lovers reunite after unimaginable tragedy, both for their country and in their lives. A baby's christening brings three generations of a family to a precarious dance between old and new. A man falls to his death in slow motion, reliving the defining moments of the life he is about to lose. Set in locales from Miami and Port-auPrince to a small unnamed country in the Caribbean and beyond, here are eight emotionally absorbing stories, rich with hard-won wisdom and humanity. At once wide in scope and intimate, Everything Inside explores with quiet power and elegance the forces that pull us together or drive us apart, sometimes in the same searing instant. -- back cover.

    Contents:
    Dosas
    In the old days
    The Port-au-Prince marriage special
    The gift
    Hot-air balloons
    Sunrise, sunset
    Seven stories
    Without inspection.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PS3554.A5815 A6 2020
    1
  • Print
    edited by James J. Ponzetti, Jr.
    Summary: "This is the first book to provide a multidisciplinary and global overview of evidence-based sexuality education (SE) programs and practices. Readers are introduced to the fundamentals of creating effective programs to prepare them to design new or implement existing programs that promote healthy sexual attitudes and relationships. Noted contributors from various disciplines critically evaluate evidence --based programs from around the globe and through the lifespan. Examples and discussion questions encourage application of the material. Guidance for those who wish to design, implement, and evaluate SE programs in various social contexts is provided." -- publisher.

    Contents:
    Sexuality education : yesterday, today, and tomorrow / James J. Ponzetti, Jr.
    Part I. Frameworks. International framework for sexuality education : UNESCO's international technical guidance / Ekua Yankah
    Framing sexuality education discourses for programs and practice / Tiffany Jones
    A practical guide to holistic sexuality education / Erika Frans
    Part II. Program development and implementation. Sexuality education program development and implementation / Karen S. Myers-Bowman
    Between worlds : releasing sexuality education from bondage / Mary Crewe
    Obstacles to teaching ethics in sexuality education / Sharon Lamb and Renee Randazzo
    Part III. Social contexts. Families and sexuality education / Suzanne Dyson
    Schools and sexuality education / Karin Coyle, Pamela Anderson, and B.A. Laris
    Community-based sexuality education / Nicole Cushman
    Religion and sexuality education / Katia Moles
    Part IV. Developmental contexts and special populations. Early childhood sexuality education / Larry Bobier and Karin A. Martin
    Sexuality education during adolescence / Eva S. Goldfarb and Lisa Lieberman
    Sexuality education in adulthood / Peggy Brick
    Sexuality education with LGBT young people / Eleanor Formby
    Sexuality education and persons with disabilities / Sigmund Hough, Anne Marie Warren, and Eileen T. Crehan
    Part V. Global perspectives on sexuality education. Sexuality education in Latin America / Silvana Darré, Elena Jerves, Jéssica Castillo, and Paul Enzlin
    Openness and opposition : sexuality education in Europe / Hans Olsson
    Sexuality education in Asia / Wenli Liu and Jingru Sun
    Sexuality education in Africa / Rosemary W. Eustace, Gladys B. Asiedu, and William N. Mkanta
    Advancing sexuality education in developing countries : evidence and implications / Heather D. Boonstra
    Conclusion. Future trends and directions in sexuality education / James J. Ponzetti, Jr.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Elizabeth S. Sburlati, Heidi J. Lyneham, Carolyn A. Schniering, and Ronald M. Rapee.
    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: 1. An Introduction to the Competencies-Based Approach
    2. Effective Training Methods / Carolyn A. Schniering / Heidi J. Lynehanti / Elizabeth S. Sburlati
    3. Self-Assessment of Our Competence as Therapists / Emily Jones / Katharina Manassis
    4. Professional Evidence-Based Practice with Children and Adolescents / James Bennett-Levy / Elizabeth S. Sburlati
    5. Child and Adolescent Characteristics that Impact on Therapy / Rinad S. Beidas / Julie Edmunds / Matthew Ditty / Margaret Mary Downey
    6. Building a Positive Therapeutic Relationship with the Child or Adolescent and Parent / Caroline L. Donovan / Sonja March
    7. Assessing Child and Adolescent Internalizing Disorders / Michael A. Southam-Gerow / Bryce D. McLeod / Ruth C. Brown / Kimberly M. Palter
    8. Theoretical Foundations of CBT for Anxious and Depressed Youth / Sophie C. Schneider / Carol Newall / Jennifer L. Hudson / Talia Morris
    9. Case Formulation and Treatment Planning for Anxiety and Depression in Children and Adolescents / Sarah J. Perini / Ronald M. Rapee
    10. Effectively Engaging and Collaborating with Children and Adolescents in Cognitive Behavioral Therapy Sessions / Heidi J. Lyneham
    11. Facilitating Homework and Generalization of Skills to the Real World / Philip C. Kendall / Cara A. Settipani / Jeremy S. Peterman
    12. Managing Negative Thoughts, Part 1: Cognitive Restructuring and Behavioral Experiments / Nikolaos Kazantzis / Philip C. Kendall / Colleen M. Cummings
    13. Managing Negative Thoughts, Part 2: Positive Imagery, Self-Talk, Thought Stopping, and Thought Acceptance / Shirley Reynolds / Gemma Bowers / Sarah Clark
    14. Changing Maladaptive Behaviors, Part 1: Exposure and Response Prevention / Sarah Clark / Shirley Reynolds / Maria Loades
    15. Changing Maladaptive Behaviors, Part 2: The Use of Behavioral Activation and Pleasant Events Scheduling with Depressed Children and Adolescents / Stephen P. Whiteside / Thomas H. Ollendick / Brennan J. Young
    16. Managing Maladaptive Mood and Arousal / Sandra L. Mendlowitz
    17. Problem-Solving Skills Training / Caroline E. Kerns / Christina Hardway / Jonathan S. Comer / Donna B. Pincus / Ryan J. Madigan
    18. Social Skills Training / Ana M. Ugueto / John R. Weisz / Lauren S. Krumholz / Lauren C. Santucci
    19. Modifying the Family Environment / Lauren C. Santucci / John R. Weisz / Ana M. Ugueto / Lauren S. Krumholz.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Derek Milne.
    Contents:
    Recognising supervision
    Understanding supervision
    Reframing supervision
    Relating in supervision
    Applying supervision
    Learning from supervision
    Supporting and guiding supervision
    Developing supervision
    Concluding supervision.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Charlie Changli Xue, RMIT University, Australia, Chuanjian Lu, Guangdong Provincial Hospital of Chinese Medicine, China.
    Summary: "In the third volume of the Evidence-based Clinical Chinese Medicine series, the authors focus on a challenging dermatological condition -- chronic urticaria. Chronic urticaria can have a significant impact on quality of life, and while medical management can be effective, many people experience frequent and unpredictable recurrence. This book unearths treatments used in classical Chinese medicine textbooks, many of which are inaccessible to non-Chinese speaking Chinese medicine practitioners. Oral and topical Chinese herbal medicines used in pre-modern China for urticaria are identified, some of which are still in use today. Evidence from clinical studies has been subject to rigorous evaluation, with analyses conducted using the internationally recognized Cochrane-GRADE approach. Chinese herbal medicine formulas and acupuncture therapies which offer the most potential for treatment of chronic urticaria are highlighted. This book provides an easy to use reference for clinicians who are interested in Chinese medicine management of chronic urticaria. The authors are internationally recognized, well-respected leaders in the field of Chinese medicine and evidence-based medicine with strong track records in research."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access World Scientific 2017
  • Digital
    Eric Swanson.
    Summary: Insisting on an evidence-based approach, Dr. Swanson brings the light of science to bear on the many controversies in cosmetic breast surgery today. Conventional wisdom is challenged with factual analysis, made possible by Dr. Swansonℓ́ℓs large body of published research. In his hallmark detailed style, the author lays the foundation with clinical studies, measurements, and patient-reported outcomes. The work is all here in one place for the first time, leading to some surprising conclusions. For plastic surgeons who prefer data to dogma, Evidence-Based Cosmetic Breast Surgery provides a unique and invaluable resource.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Robert C. Hyzy, Jakob McSparron, editors.
    Summary: This extensively updated textbook comprehensively reviews the latest developments in evidence-based critical care. Topics are covered in a case study format with an emphasis on the principles of diagnosis and therapy. Each topic is covered using a variety of case studies and features a case vignette, clinical question and an additional discussion section to clarify areas of particular importance. Topics including cytokine release syndrome, sympathomimetic overdose and palliative care in the intensive care unit have been extensively revised, while new sections focusing on neuromuscular disease and subarachnoid hemorrhages have been added. Evidence-Based Critical Care, 2nd edition is a critical resource for critical care practitioners, fellows, residents; allied health professionals and medical students who wish to expand their knowledge within critical care. The case study-based approach taken in the textbook makes this an ideal resource for those preparing for board examinations.

    Contents:
    Sympathomimetic overdose (designer drugs)
    Cardiac Arrest Management
    Beta blocker overdose
    Post- Cardiac Arrest Management
    Undifferentiated Shock
    Hypovolemic Shock and Massive Transfusion
    Acute Respiratory Failure
    Encephalitis
    Hyperkalemia NIV Implementation and Intubation
    Subarachnoid Hemorrhages
    Diagnosis and Management of Tricyclic Antidepressant Ingestion
    Hypernatremia
    Management of Calcium Channel Blocker Poisoning
    ICU Care Delivery and Medical Ethics
    Diagnosis and Management of Ethylene Glycol Ingestion
    Accidental Hypothermia
    Management of Cardiogenic Shock
    Management of Acute Heart Failure
    Management of Acute Coronary Syndrome
    Complications of Myocardial Infarction
    Management of Cardiac Tamponade
    Hypertensive Crises
    Atrial Fibrillation and Other Supraventricular Tachycardias
    Ventricular Arrhythmias
    Management of Acute Aortic Syndromes
    Management of Endocarditis
    Community Acquired Pneumonia
    ^Management of Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Acute Exacerbation of COPD: Non-Invasive Positive Pressure Ventilation
    Management of Status Asthmaticus
    Immunocompromised Pneumonia
    Venous Thromboembolism in the Intensive Care Unit
    Massive Hemoptysis
    Sedation and Delirium
    Prolonged Mechanical Ventilation
    Complications of trach
    Ventilator-Associated Pneumonia and Other Complications
    Respiratory Failure in a Patient with Idiopathic Pulmonary Fibrosis
    Weaning from Mechanical Ventilation
    The Post-Intensive Care Syndrome
    Management of Decompensated Right Ventricular Failure in the Intensive Care Unit
    Multi-disciplinary care/communication in the ICU
    Palliative care in ICU
    Family involvement in ICU
    Diffuse Alveolar Hemorrhage
    Acute Stroke Emergency Management
    Bacterial Meningitis in the ICU
    Management of Intracerebral Hemorrhage
    Status Epilepticus
    Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome
    Traumatic Brain Injury
    ^Management of Anoxic Brain Injury
    Traditional and Novel Tools for Diagnosis of Acute Kidney Injury
    Management of Acute Kidney Injury
    Rhabdomyolysis
    Hyponatremia
    Management of Severe Hyponatremia and SIADH
    Diabetic Ketoacidosis
    Thyroid Storm
    Adrenal Insufficiency
    Management of Hyperglycemic Hyperosmolar Syndrome
    Management of Myxedema Coma
    Urosepsis
    Management of Sepsis and Septic Shock
    Invasive Aspergillus
    Management of Strongyloides Hyperinfection Syndrome
    Treatment of Viral Hemorrhagic Fever in a Well-Resourced Environment
    Management of Severe Malaria
    Dengue
    Chikungunya
    Leptospirosis
    Management of Acute Upper Gastrointestinal Hemorrhage
    Variceal Hemorrhage
    Acute Pancreatitis
    Management of Acute Liver Failure
    Acute Lower Gastrointestinal Bleeding
    Diagnosis and Management of Clostridium Difficile Infection (CDI)
    Principles of Nutrition in the Critically Ill Patient
    Spontaneous Bacterial Peritonitis
    ^ICU Management of the Patient with Alcoholic Liver Disease
    Diagnosis and Management of Thrombotic
    Thrombocytopenic Purpura
    Acute Leukemia Presentation with DIC
    Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation
    Hemophagocytic Lymphohistiocytosis
    ICU Complications of Hematopoietic Stem Cell
    Transplantation Including Graft vs. Host Disease
    Tumor Lysis Syndrome
    Management of Hyperviscosity Syndromes
    Thoracic Trauma
    Blunt Abdominal Trauma
    Oncologic emergencies
    Abdominal Sepsis and Complicated Intraabdominal Infection
    Intestinal Obstruction: Small and Large Bowel
    Management of Acute Compartment Syndrome
    Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation (ECMO) and Extracorporeal CO2 Removal (ECCO2R)
    Coagulopathy Management of Acute Thermal Injury
    Acute Arterial Ischemia
    Management of Necrotizing Soft Tissue Infection
    Cytokine release syndrome
    Biliary Infections
    Peripartum Cardiomyopathy
    Obstetric haemorrhage
    ^Management of Amniotic Fluid Embolism
    Respiratory Diseases of Pregnancy
    Preeclampsia, Eclampsia and HELLP Syndrome
    Management of Severe Skin Eruptions
    Management of Alcohol Withdrawal Syndromes
    End of Life Care in the ICU
    Neuromuscular Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Hywel C. Williams ; associate editors, Michael Bigby, Andrew Herxheimer, Luigi Naldi, Berthold Rzany, Robert P. Dellavalle, Yuping Ran, Masutaka Furue.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Arianne Verhagen, Jeroen Alessie.
    Summary: Valid diagnostic strategies are the basis of good clinical care. This book provides an overview of the evidence that underpins history taking, physical examination, specific tests and diagnostic imaging in patients with musculoskeletal disorders that consult primary care. Alongside this book there is a website presenting videos showing the up-to-date performance of diagnostics that are regarded valid together with their psychometric properties. In the introduction, we present various ways of clinical reasoning followed by three chapters on 'validity', 'reproducibility' and the differences between a single test compared to a combination of tests. Next the chapters each deal with the diagnostic of patients with low back pain, hip, knee, foot/ankle, neck, shoulder, elbow and hand/wrist pain. Each chapter starts with a case study and ends with a conclusion that reflects on the case study presented. In addition, in each chapter attention is paid to red flags (alarm signals) that could be an indicator of serious pathology. Evidence based diagnostics of musculoskeletal disorders offers a wealth of information for physiotherapists, general practitioners, students and other people with professional interest in the actual evidence underpinning the diagnostic strategies in patients with musculoskeletal disorders. Arianne P Verhagen is a physiotherapist, manual therapist and clinical epidemiologist by background. She received her PhD in 1999 and from 1999 to January 2018 she worked at the Erasmus University Medical Centre Rotterdam at the department of General Practice. From 2009 - 2014 she was also a professor 'Diagnostics' at the School of Physiotherapy of Avans University of Applied Sciences in Breda, where this book was initiated. Since February 2018 Arianne is the Head of Discipline and professor Musculoskeletal Research at the School of Physiotherapy at UTS (University of Technology Sydney) in Australia. Jeroen Alessie is physiotherapist, educational science & technologist and senior teacher at the School of Physiotherapy of Avans University of Applied Sciences in Breda.

    Contents:
    Validity
    Reproducibility
    Test versus model
    Low back
    Hip
    Knee
    Ankle-foot
    Neck
    Shoulder
    Elbow
    Wrist.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Aine Kelly, Paul Cronin, Stefan Puig, Kimberly E. Applegate, editors.
    Summary: This book presents evidence-based criteria to systematically assess the appropriate use of medical imaging in the emergency department and other acute care settings. Over the last decade, there have been profound changes in the diagnostic testing and work-up of patients presenting to the emergency department with emergent symptoms. One of the most far-reaching changes has been the increased availability, speed, and accuracy of imaging due, in part, to technical improvements in imaging modalities such as CT, MR, and PET. Although the use of high-end imaging has plateaued in general, increased utilization continues in the ED. These patients are more acutely ill and there is additional pressure to make an accurate diagnosis as quickly as possible to facilitate prompt disposition or treatment. There is also strong evidence for the beneficial use of imaging in the emergency setting that results in improved patient outcomes. This book answers that need by providing protocols and guidelines for neuroradiological, cardiothoracic, abdominal and pelvic, musculoskeletal, and pediatric imaging are reviewed in terms of the available imaging modalities, diagnostic criteria, and treatment options. Distinguished by its unique focus on evidence-based emergency imaging in adults, children, and special populations, this book is a unique resource for radiologists, emergency medicine physicians, and physicians in other specialties who need to be informed about the most appropriate uses of diagnostic imaging in the emergency care setting.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Rajeev Parameswan, Amit Agarwal, editors.
    Summary: In this textbook, leading experts from highly acclaimed institutions describe evidence-based best practice in the management of a wide range of benign and malignant thyroid, parathyroid, adrenal, and neuroendocrine conditions. Detailed attention is devoted to the current role of surgery, including minimally invasive surgery and robotic surgery, in different endocrine disorders. The reader will also learn how best to respond to the problems that may be encountered during endocrine surgical practice. While much of the focus is on surgical aspects, the approach is multidisciplinary, with inclusion of information on recent advances in epidemiology, genetics, cytology, pathology, imaging modalities, and other treatment options. The clear text is complemented by instructive clinical cases as well as numerous high-quality illustrations and tables summarizing key points. This book will be of value for specialists in endocrine medicine and surgery as well as general surgeons with an interest in endocrine surgery.

    Contents:
    THYROIDOLOGY
    Benign thyroid disease: Overview
    Chapter. Anatomy and Physiology of the thyroid
    Chapter. Genetics of thyroid disease
    Chapter. Investigating a thyroid nodule
    Chapter. Nodular goiter
    Chapter. Investigating hyperthyroidism
    Chapter. Thyroiditis
    Chapter. Subclinical thyroid disease
    Chapter. Grave's disease
    Chapter. Cytology of benign disease
    Thyroid oncology: Overview
    Chapter. Molecular pathogenesis of thyroid cancer
    Chapter. Cytology of malignant disease
    Chapter. Differentiated thyroid cancer
    Chapter. Medullary thyroid cancer
    Chapter. Anaplastic thyroid cancer
    Chapter. Imaging in thyroid cancer
    Chapter. Locally Advanced Thyroid cancer
    Chapter. Neck dissection in thyroid cancer
    Chapter. RAI ablation in cancer
    Chapter. Management of metastatic thyroid cancer
    Thyroid technology& outcomes: Overview
    Chapter: Neuromonitoring in thyroid surgery
    Chapter: Robotic and Endoscopic thyroid surgery
    ^Chapter: Outcomes in thyroid surgery
    PARATHYROID
    Benign disease overview
    Chapter: Anatomy and Physiology of the parathyroidgland
    Chapter: Investigating primary hyperparathyroidism
    Chapter: Asymptomatic and normocalcaemic HPT
    Chapter: Managing primary HPT and related complications
    Chapter: Parathyroid surgery
    Chapter: Adjuncts in parathyroid surgery
    Chapter: Renal hyperparathyroidism
    Chapter: Outcomes of parathyroid surgery
    Chapter: Reoperative parathyroid surgery
    Malignant disease and miscellaneous
    Chapter: Genetics of parathyroid disease
    Chapter: Parathyroid cancer
    Chapter: Ethanol ablation for parathyroid disease
    ADRENAL
    Overview
    Chapter: Anatomy and Physiology of the adrenal gland
    Chapter: Genetics of adrenal tumours
    Chapter: Incidentaloma
    Chapter: Cushing's syndrome
    Chapter: Conn's syndrome
    Chapter: Adrenocortical cancer
    Chapter: Paraganglionomas
    ^Chapter: Perioperative management of endocrine hypertension
    Chapter: Laparoscopic adrenalectomy
    Chapter: Complications of adrenal surgery
    NEUROENDOCRINE
    Overview
    Chapter: Epidemiology of NET's
    Chapter: Pathology of NET's
    Chapter: Imaging in NET's
    Chapter: Gastric NET's
    Chapter: Pancreatic NET's
    Chapter: Carcinoid tumours
    Chapter: Chemotherapy and adjuvant treatment
    Chapter: Outcomes in NET's.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [editors] Pauline M. Camacho, Hossein Gharib, Glen W. Sizemore.
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Peter J. Kertes, T. Mark Johnson.
    Summary: "Now in a revised and updated Second Edition, this handy guide to eye care uses evidence from the latest clinical trials to deliver practical advice directly applicable to the challenges of daily ophthalmic practice. Helpful illustrations and tables support the text and improve outcomes, summarizes the major clinical trials in ophthalmology that support the current standard of care. Practical focus helps readers apply research findings to day-to-day practice. Logical organization guides readers from general epidemiology to disease-specific sections. Broad scope addresses the full range of ophthalmologic subspecialties--from treatment of corneal defects, glaucoma, and cataracts to management of vitreo-retinal disorders. NEW in the Second Edition ... Results from the latest clinical trials let readers put current findings into practice. Coverage of new pharmacologic agents broadens therapeutic choices. Three new chapters address arterial occlusive disease, non-exudative age-related macular degeneration, and biostatistics"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: ch. 1 Clinical Epidemiology / Sanjay Sharma
    ch. 2 Biostatistics / Hussein Hollands
    ch. 3 Health Economics / Sanjay Sharma
    ch. 4 Anterior Segment: Cornea and External Diseases / Qais A. Farjo
    ch. 5 Refractive Surgery / Clara C. Chan
    ch. 6 Glaucoma: Clinical Trials in Glaucoma Therapy / Robert J. Campbell
    ch. 7a Diabetic Retinopathy: Prevention and Screening / Yoshihiro Yonekawa
    ch. 7b Diabetic Macular Edema: Clinical Trials / Dean Eliott
    ch. 7c Proliferative Diabetic Retinopathy: Clinical Trials / Dean Eliott
    ch. 8a Clinical Trials in Nonneovascular Age-Related Macular Degeneration / Emily Y. Chew
    ch. 8b Clinical Trials in Wet Age-Related Macular Degeneration / Peter K. Kaiser
    ch. 9 Retinal Vein Occlusions (Evidence-Based Eye Care) / Sharon Fekrat
    ch. 10 Evidence-Based Ophthalmology: Clinical Trials and Beyond Retinal Detachment and Proliferative Vitreoretinopathy / T. Mark Johnson
    Contents note continued: ch. 11 Evidence-Based Medicine: The Prophylaxis and Treatment of Endophthalmitis / William F. Mieler
    ch. 12 Arterial Occlusive Disease / Mark O. Baerlocber
    ch. 13 Retinopathy of Prematurity (ROP) / Antonio Capone
    ch. 14 Amblyopia / Raymond T. Kraker
    ch. 15 Uveal Melanoma: Approaches to Management / Ernest Rand Simpson
    ch. 16 Optic Neuritis / Jonathan D. Trobe
    ch. 17 Thyroid-Associated Orbitopathy: An Evidence-Based Approach to Diagnosis and Management / HarmeetS. Gill
    ch. 18 Traumatic Optic Neuropathy: An Evidence-Based Perspective on Management / Robert A. Kersten.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Digital
    Marie Boltz, executive editor ; Elizabeth Capezuti, DeAnne Zwicker, Terry Fulmer, editors.
    Summary: "Across health care settings, older adults represent the majority of consumers served. They present with the most clinically and socially complex situations, and thus require nurses to possess highly developed assessment competencies, critical thinking abilities, and relationship-based skills. Nurses have an enormous responsibility when providing care to older adults in this rapidly changing health care environment with its increasing regulatory requirements, variable staffing levels, and unpredictable reimbursement. Nurses also have an amazing opportunity to positively change the daily experiences and health of older adults. The nurse who is armed with an understanding of the unique clinical presentations and response to treatment in older adults, and who has knowledge about evidence-based assessment and interventions, is situated to not only prevent and manage health problems, but also to promote function and quality of life"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Contributors
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    PART I. INCORPORATING EVIDENCE INTO PRACTICE. 1. Developing and evaluating clinical practice guidelines: a systematic approach / Kathleen Phillips
    2. Measuring performance and improving quality / Lenard L. Parisi
    3. Informational technology: embedding geriatric clinical practice guidelines / Rebecca L. Trotta and Terese Kornet.
    4. Organizational approaches to promote person-centered care / Andrea Yevchak Sillner and Liza Behrens
    5. Environmental approaches to support aging friendly care / Rana Sagha Zadeh
    PART II. ASSESMENT AND MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES. 6. Age-related changes in health / Marianne Logan Fingerhood
    7. Healthcare decision-making / Joanne Roman Jones and Marie Boltz
    8. Sensory changes in the older adult / Pamela Z. Cacchione
    9. Assessing cognitive function in the older adult / Donna M. Fick, Pieter Heeren, and Koen Milisen
    10. Assessment of physical function in the older adult / Denise M. Kresevic
    11. Oral healthcare in the older adult / Linda J. O'Connor
    12. Managing oral hydration in the older adult / Phyllis M. Gaspar and Janet C. Mentes
    13. Nutrition in the older adult / Rose Ann DiMaria-Ghalili
    14. Family caregiving / Deborah C. Messecar
    15. Issues regarding sexuality in older adults / Elaine E. Steinke
    16. Elder mistreatment detection / Billy A. Caceres, Neelima Kurup, Terry Fulmer
    17. Advance care planning / Joanne Roman Jones and Marie Boltz
    PART III. CLINICAL INTERVENTIONS. 18. Preventing functional decline in the acute care setting / Marie Boltz, Barbara Resnick, and Elizabeth Galik
    19. Late life depression / Glenise McKenzie and Kathryn Sexson
    20. Delirium: prevention, early recognition, and treatment / Cheri Blevins
    21. Dementia: assessment and care strategies / Marie Boltz
    22. Pain management in the older adult / Ann L. Horgas, Joanne Laframboise-Otto, Karen Aul, and Saunjoo L. Yoon
    23. Assessing, managing and preventing falls in acute care / Deanna Gray-Miceli and Patricia A. Quigley
    24. Reducing adverse drug events in the older adult / DeAnne Zwicker, Carolina Carvajal, and Terry Fulmer
    25. Urinary incontinence in the older adult / Annemarie Dowling-Castronovo, Joanna Long, and Christine Bradway
    26. Prevention of catheter-associated urinary tract infection / Michelle Kidd and Mary Beth Flynn Makic
    27. Physical restraints and side rails in acute and critical care settings / Cheryl M. Bradas, Satinderpal K. Sandhu, and Lorraine C. Mion
    28. Preventing pressure injuries and skin tears / Reneeka Persaud-Jaimangal, Elizabeth A. Ayello, and R. Gary Sibbald
    29. Optimizing mealtimes for persons living with dementia / Melissa Batchelor
    30. Disorders of sleep in the older adult / Jonna L. Morris, Lynn Baniak, Michelle L. Klimpt, Eileen R. Chasens, and Grace E. Dean
    31. The frail hospitalized older adult / Stewart M. Bond
    32. HIV prevention and care for the older adult / Rosanna F. DeMarco and Simon Manga
    33. LGBTQ perspectives for older adult care / Janejira J. Chaiyasit and Anthony R. Lutz
    PART IV. INTERVENTIONS IN SPECIALTY PRACTICE. 34. Substance misuse and alcohol use disorder in the older adult / Donna E. McCabe, Michelle M. Knapp, and Madeline A. Naegle
    35. Comprehensive assessment and management of the critically ill older adult / Michele C. Balas, Lee Cordell, Paige Donahue, and Mary Beth Happ
    36. Fluid overload: identifying and managing heart failure patients at risk of hospital readmission / Ameera Chakravarthy and Joan Davenport
    37. Cancer assessment and intervention strategies in the older adult / Janine Overcash
    38. Perioperative care of the older adult / Fidelindo Lim and Larry Z. Slater
    39. General surgical care of the older adult / Fidelindo Lim and Larry Z. Slater
    40. Care of the older adult with fragility hip fracture / Anita J. Meehan, Ann Butler Maher, Valerie MacDonald, Karen Hertz, and Ami Hommel
    PART V. MODELS OF CARE. 41. Acute care models / Elizabeth Capezuti, Marie Boltz, Michael L. Malone, and Robert M. Palmer
    42. Transitional care / Fidelindo Lim and Janice B. Foust
    43. Palliative care models / Constance Dahlin
    44. Care of the older adult in the emergency department / Rachel Arendacs and Marie Boltz
    Index.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
  • Digital
    Dilly OC Anumba, Shamanthi M. Jayasooriya, editors.
    Summary: This is an open access book. In this open access book the NIHR Global Health research group on preterm birth, PRIME, prioritizes the development of prenatal risk assessment guidance for preterm birth. This book is based on global literature, published international, national and regional guidance and it is structured into six chapters providing: an overview of the domains for risk assessment and the summary recommendations in greater depth maternal demographics and past pregnancy histories, accurate pregnancy dating, and the contribution of infection, nutritional status and substance misuse to preterm birth risk. Each chapter has structured sections which include a) background information, b) an evidence statement highlighting the risk factors covered, and c) practical recommendations for evaluating those risks as well as the evidenced recommended and effective interventions for women deemed to be at risk. The chapter ends with clinical and research recommendations regarding factors of unknown or unproven risk "myth busters". This open access book will be a very useful guide for all health care professionals involved in delivering pregnancy care.

    Contents:
    Antenatal Risk Assessment for Preterm Birth: A guidance Document for Healthcare Providers
    Prenatal Risk Assessment for Preterm Birth in Low-resources Settings: Demographics and Obstetric History
    Pregnancy Dating Guidance
    Prenatal Risk Assessment for Preterm Birth in Low-resources Settings: Infections
    Nutritional Status and the Risk of Preterm Birth
    Evaluating Alcohol, Tobacco and other Substance Use in Pregnancy Women.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    David Camfield, Erica McIntyre, Jerome Sarris, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I: Clinical evidence in support of herbal and nutritional treatments for anxiety: Herbal Anxiolytics with sedative actions
    Adaptogens
    Cognitive Anxiolytics
    Nutritional-based Nutraceuticals
    Treatments for comorbid anxiety and mood disorders
    Part II: Traditional Treatments in Need of further study: Plant-based Psychotropics
    Other Potential anxiolytic Phytotherapies
    Part III: Clinical Perspectives and Case Studies
    Generalized Anxiety Disorder (GAD) and Panic
    Obsessive Compulsive Disorder
    Comorbid Anxiety and Depression
    Appendix: Herb-drug Interactions table.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    David E. Rosow, Chandra M. Ivey, editors.
    Summary: This text provides a critical look at the state of the evidence in the most compelling areas of laryngology. Rather than being a comprehensive text covering every single possible area, it focuses on published works in the 9 areas that are of the most interest to laryngologists as well as speech pathologists, general otolaryngologists, and head and neck oncologists managing laryngologic issues. The state of the literature is succinctly summarized and tabulated in each area, allowing the reader to see which areas have high-grade evidence (Levels 1 or 2) to support decision making, and which areas are in need of better quality studies. Each chapter is divided into three main sections: Diagnosis and Pathophysiology, Surgical management, and Non-surgical management. This makes it easier for the reader to browse to the area of interest in each section and to find the evidence basis for a given concept. Evidence-Based Laryngology will be an invaluable resource to otolaryngologists, residents, speech-language pathologists, and other clinicians who manage laryngological problems and would like to know the evidence basis behind different treatment options.

    Contents:
    Vocal Fold Nodules
    Recurrent Respiratory Papillomatosis
    Early Glottic Cancer
    Unilateral Vocal Fold Paralysis and Paresis
    Spasmodic Dysphonia and Vocal Tremor
    Laryngopharyngeal Reflux
    Chronic Cough
    Laryngotracheal Stenosis
    Evidence Based Practice in Dysphagia.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, Tim Raderstorf.
    Summary: "Evidence from numerous studies support that leadership and innovation are critical factors for organizational success and improved outcomes. Further, no change takes place and sustains without strong leadership. Although the United States spends more money on healthcare than any western world country, our health outcomes are poor. For example, the U.S. is the worst western world country for a women to give birth. Sick care continues to be the predominant paradigm and needs to be shifted to well care since 80 percent of chronic conditions can be prevented with healthy lifestyle behaviors. We also are living during a time when over 50 percent of clinicians are suffering from burnout, which is affecting the quality and safety of care. Solutions, including strong leaders and innovators, are urgently needed"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Making the Case for Evidence-Based Leadership and Innovation / Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk and Tim Raderstorf
    Important Lessons Learned from a Personal Leadership, Innovation, and Entrepreneurial Journey / Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk
    Understanding and Developing Yourself as a Leader / T. Scott Graham
    Key Strategies for Optimizing Personal Health and Well-being : A Necessity for Effective Leadership / Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk and Susan Neale
    Learning from a History of Great Leaders / T. Scott Graham
    Forming and Leading a High-Performing Team / Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, Dianne Morrison-Beedy, and Robert Smith
    Leading Organizational Change and Building Wellness Cultures for Maximum ROI and VOI / Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk and Sharon Tucker
    Achieving the Quadruple Aim in Healthcare with Evidence-based Practice : A Necessary Leadership Strategy for Improving Quality, Safety, Patient Outcomes and Cost Reductions / Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk and Lynn Gallagher-Ford
    Healthcare Finance for Leaders / Cheryl L. Hoying, Courtney Campbell-Saxton, and Alma Helping
    Healthcare Innovation : Bringing the Buzzword to Real World Healthcare Settings / Nancy Albert and Tim Raderstorf
    Emerging Trends in Healthcare Innovation / Bonnie Clipper and Tami H. Wyatt
    Patient-Centered Innovation / Adrienne Boissy
    Positive Deviance : Advancing Innovation to Transform Healthcare / Kathy Malloch and Tim Porter-O'Grady
    Measuring Innovation and Determining Return on Investment (ROI) / Deborah Mills-Scofield, Sidney Kushner, Stefanie Lyn Kaufman, and Eli MacLaren
    Design Thinking for Healthcare Leadership and Innovation / Jess Roberts and Suratha Elango
    Negotiating Complex Systems / Dan Weberg
    Entrepreneurship in Healthcare / Tim Raderstorf
    Identifying Opportunities to Innovate and Creating Your Niche / David Putrino
    Intrapreneurship, Business Models, and How Companies Make Money / Tim Raderstorf, Michelle Podlesni, Christine Meehan, Joe Novello, Pamala Wilson
    Legal Considerations in Starting a Healthcare Business / Jonathon Vinocur
    Building and Pitching Your Plan / Tim Raderstorf
    Starting and Sustaining a Healthcare Business / Gary L. Sharpe
    Starting and Sustaining a Healthcare Practice / Candy Rinehart and John McNamara
    Key Strategies for Moving from Research to Commercialization with Real World Success Stories / Caroline Crisafulli, Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, Dianne Morrison-Beedy, and Mary Beth Happ
    Leveraging Social Media and Marketing for Professional Branding and Business Influence / Betsy Sewell, Dianne Morrison-Beedy, Linsey Grove, and Vibeke Westh.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    edited by Robert F. LaPrade, Jorge Chahla.
    Contents:
    Comprehensive clinical examination
    Plain radiography of the knee
    Magnetic resonance imaging of the knee: conventional and novel techniques
    Computed tomography of the knee joint: indications and significance
    Mechanical malalignment of the knee joint: how and when to address
    Anterior cruciate ligament
    Posterior cruciate ligament
    Repair and reconstruction of the superficial medial collateral ligament and the posteromedial corner
    Posterolateral corner of the knee
    Anterolateral ligament and the anterolateral corner
    Multiligament knee injuries
    Arthroscopic primary repair of the cruciate ligaments
    Meniscal pathology: meniscus anatomy
    Meniscus biomechanics
    Meniscal tears: meniscectomy versus repair
    Meniscal root tears
    Meniscal radial tears
    Meniscal ramp lesions
    Meniscus deficiency and meniscal transplants
    Synthetic meniscal substitutes
    A basic science understanding of cartilage repair and its clinical application
    Focal chondral injuries
    Ocd injuries in the paediatric and adult population
    How to manage the active patient with osteoarthritis:: biological approaches
    Osteonecrosis of the knee
    Patellofemoral anatomy and its surgical implications
    Treatment algorithm in patellofemoral disorders: 'le menu à la carte'
    Tibial tuberosity osteotomies
    Pathological torsion of the lower limb
    Lateral patellar instability:: diagnosis, treatment algorithm, conservative approaches, surgical techniques, outcomes, rehabilitation and future directions
    Medial patellar instability: primary and iatrogenic
    Trochleoplasty
    Injuries of the patellar tendon
    Quadriceps tendon injuries
    Knee arthrofibrosis: how to prevent and how to treat
    The paediatric knee
    Miscellaneous complex pathological conditions of the knee
    Intraoperative management: anaesthesia, tourniquet, tranexamic acid, blood loss and fluid management
    Preparing the surgical team for a quick and efficient procedure
    Postoperative management
    Postoperative rehabilitation concepts.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Jonathan A. Perkins, Karthik Balakrishnan, editors.
    Summary: This text addresses vascular anomalies and the management of these diverse and clinically challenging set of conditions which have significant impact on patient function, quality of life and, in certain cases, survival. The text covers each category and type of vascular anomaly and the unique diagnostic and therapeutic challenges they pose. The chapters will also include fundamental scientific literature pertaining to each specific condition to help clinicians and clinical researchers better assess and manage vascular anomalies of the head and neck. Each vascular condition will be supported with medical photographs and radiographic images, summaries of diagnostic and therapeutic options, a list of syndromes and genetic mutations known to be associated with each anomaly, case studies, and clinical and research pearls from national and international leaders in the field. Management of Head and Neck Vascular Anomalies: Evidenced-based Assessment will be an invaluable resource for otolaryngologists, plastic surgeons, general and general pediatric surgeons, orthopaedic surgeons, dermatologists, interventional radiologists, residents and fellows in these fields, and researchers with interest in vascular anomalies of the head and neck.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Sharon E. Straus, Paul Glasziou, W. Scott Richardson, R. Brian Haynes.
    Summary: Constitutes a traditional way of presenting ideas about EBM. It explains how to ask answerable clinical questions, translate them into effective searches for the best evidence, critically appraise that evidence for its validity and importance, integrate it with patients' values and preferences, assess the practice of EBM. Additional materials, including resources for practicing EBM can be downloaded to PDAs, contain clinical examples, critical appraisals and background papers from other healthcare disciplines such as nursing and occupational therapy with links to various evidence resources. A supporting website for this book also provides updates and new materials.

    Contents:
    Asking answerable clinical questions
    Acquiring the evidence: how to find current best evidence and have current best evidence find us
    Appraising the evidence
    Therapy
    Diagnosis and screening
    Prognosis
    Harm
    Evaluation
    Teaching evidence-based medicine.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC80 E7 2019
    1
  • Digital
    David Isaacs.
    Contents:
    How to search for evidence
    Epidemiology
    Clinical manifestations
    Laboratory tests
    Rational antibiotic use
    Adjunctive treatment
    Bacterial meningitis
    Respiratory tract infections
    Osteomyelitis and septic arthritis
    Urinary tract infections
    Necrotizing enterocolitis and gastrointestinal infections
    Eye infections
    Skin and soft tissue infections
    Bacterial infections
    Mycoplasmas
    Fungal infections
    Viral infections
    Other congenital infections
    Breast milk
    Surveillance
    Infection control
    Developing countries
    Prevention of neonatal infections
    Neonatal antimicrobials.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Elie M. Ferneini, Michael T. Goupil, editors.
    Summary: This book is designed to guide the dental practitioner in the medical and surgical management of the oral surgery patient. It provides dentists and dental professionals with up-to-date, evidence-based information on how to handle any oral surgical problem and how to work up a patient. The book is divided into five sections, the first two of which present overviews of general and basic perioperative topics and the principles of exodontia. Management of oral pathology is then discussed in detail, covering odontogenic infections, osteonecrosis, preprosthetic surgery, common oral pathology, biopsy techniques, and dentoalveolar trauma. The fourth section is devoted to topics in advanced oral surgery, such as disturbances of the temporomandibular joint apparatus, facial deformities, and dental implants. Finally, a series of illustrative case reports and unusual surgical cases is presented. The book is multi-institutional and multispecialty based. Both editors have extensive academic experience and have authored numerous scientific publications.

    Contents:
    Patient assessment
    Principles of exodontia
    Management of oral pathology
    Advanced oral surgery
    Illustrative case reports.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Mohit Bhandari.
    Summary: "Surgical orthopedic procedures such as hip replacements, arthroscopy or knee replacements are surrounded by pre- and post-operative complications, and there are varying different methods for the procedures themselves. This book brings together the best evidence for treatments as well as any complications. Not only does it cover the evidence base for orthopedic surgery, but also orthopedic conditions requiring medical treatment, and pediatric orthopedics. Using the approved EBM methodology, and edited by teachers of evidence-based medicine this EBM textbook is an essential resource for all orthopedic specialists and trainees"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2020
  • Digital
    Steven McGee, M.D., Professor of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA.
    Contents:
    What is evidence-based physical diagnosis?
    Diagnostic accuracy of physical findings
    Using the tables in this book
    Using the evidence-based medicine calculator (expert consult)
    Reliability of physical findings
    Mental status examination
    Stance and gait
    Jaundice
    Cyanosis
    Anemia
    Hypovolemia
    Protein-energy malnutrition and weight loss
    Obesity
    Cushing syndrome
    Pulse rate and contour
    Abnormalities of pulse rhythm
    Blood pressure
    Temperature
    Respiratory rate and abnormal breathing patterns
    Pulse oximetry
    The pupils
    Diabetic retinopathy
    The red eye
    Hearing
    Thyroid and its disorders
    Meninges
    Peripheral lymphadenopathy
    Inspection of the chest
    Palpation and percussion of the chest
    Auscultation of the lungs
    Ancillary tests
    Pneumonia
    Chronic obstructive lung disease
    Pulmonary embolism
    Pleural effusion
    Inspection of the neck veins
    Percussion of the heart
    Palpation of the heart
    Auscultation of the heart : general principles
    The first and second heart sounds
    The third and fourth heart sounds
    Miscellaneous heart sounds
    Heart murmurs : general principles
    Aortic stenosis
    Aortic regurgitation
    Miscellaneous heart murmurs
    Disorders of the pericardium
    Congestive heart failure
    Coronary artery disease
    Inspection of the abdomen
    Palpation and percussion of the abdomen
    Abdominal pain and tenderness
    Auscultation of the abdomen
    Peripheral vascular disease
    The diabetic foot
    Edema and deep vein thrombosis
    Examination of the musculoskeletal system
    Visual field testing
    Nerves of the eye muscles (iii, iv, and vi) : approach to diplopia
    Miscellaneous cranial nerves
    Examination of the motor system : approach to weakness
    Examination of the sensory system
    Examination of the reflexes
    Disorders of the nerve roots, plexuses, and peripheral nerves
    Coordination and cerebellar testing
    Tremor and Parkinson disease
    Hemorrhagic versus ischemic stroke
    Acute vertigo and imbalance
    Examination of nonorganic neurologic disorders
    Examination of patients in the intensive care unit
    Likelihood ratios, confidence intervals, and pre-test probability.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Kate Gawlik, DNP, RN, ANP-BC, FNP-BC, Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, PhD, APRN-CNP, FAANP, FNAP, FAAN, Alice M. Teall, DNP, APRN-CNP, FAANP.
    Summary: "We begin this preface by emphasizing that the only way to ensure an accurate diagnosis for an individual's health and well-being is through a thorough history and evidence-based health and well-being assessment. Learning to effectively assess the health and well-being of an individual involves integrating skills of history taking, physical exam, and diagnostic decision-making within the context of patient-centered, culturally-sensitive, evidence-based clinical practice. The process of teaching and learning assessment is complex"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    edited by Kari Bø, Bary Berghmans, Siv Mørkved, Marijke Van Kampen ; forewords by Robert Freeman, Christopher Chapple.
    Contents:
    Overview of physical therapy for pelvic floor dysfunction / Kari Bo
    Critical appraisal of randomized trials and systematic reviews of the effects of physical therapy interventions for the pelvic floor / Rob Herbert
    Functional anatomy of the female pelvic floor / James A. Ashton-Miller, John O.L. DeLancey
    Neuroanatomy and neurophysiology of pelvic floor muscles / David B. Vodusek
    Measurement of pelvic floor muscle function and strength and pelvic organ prolapse
    Pelvic floor and exercise science
    Female pelvic floor dysfunctions
    Male pelvic floor dysfunctions and evidence-based physical therapy
    Evidence-based physical therapy for pelvic floor dysfunctions affecting both women and men
    Evidence for pelvic floor physical therapy in children / Wendy F. Bower
    Pelvic floor physical therapy in the elderly: where's the evidence? / Adrian Wagg
    Evidence for pelvic floor physical therapy for neurological disease / Marijke Van Kampen, Inge Geraerts
    Pelvic floor dysfunction, prevention and treatment in elite athletes / Kari Bo
    The development of clinical practice guidelines / Bary Berghmans [and others].
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    Dyane E. Tower, editor.
    Summary: This practical text reviews the most recent literature supporting clinical decisions regarding over a dozen common foot and ankle conditions, along with presentations of the techniques themselves, both surgical and non-surgical. The conditions are presented anatomically from forefoot to ankle, beginning with issues surrounding toenails, such as fungal infection and treatment of ingrown toenails, then proceeds to discuss the toes and toe joints, including hammertoe fixation, 2nd MPJ pathology, and Lapidus bunionectomy. Treatmentsfor arthritis of the midfoot and flatfoot follow, along with arthroscopy and arthroplasty of the ankle, surgical and non-surgical approaches for Achilles tendon ruptures, and treatments for Charcot neuroarthropathy, clubfoot and general considerations of wound care of the foot and ankle. Throughout, an emphasis is placed on the best available evidence for each treatment strategy. Evidence-Based Podiatry will be a valuable resource for podiatrists, orthopedic surgeons, and residents, fellows and trainees treating these common foot and ankle conditions.

    Contents:
    Permanent Ingrown Toenails
    The Fungal Toenail
    Hammertoe Fixation
    2nd Metatarsophalangeal Joint Pathology
    Lapidus Bunionectomy
    Midfoot Arthritis
    Flatfoot Deformity
    Ankle Arthroscopy
    Achilles Tendon Ruptures
    Charcot Neuropathy
    Clubfoot
    Podiatric Wound Care
    Total Ankle Arthroplasty.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Heather Hall, Linda Roussel.
    Summary: "This text is intended for graduate-level audiences in nursing research courses and is particularly well suited for those in administration tracks. It focuses on understanding how research-based evidence drives scholarly practice and how that evidence can justify innovation and policy change to improve patient outcomes. The new edition will add implementation and dissemination science applications to the EBP framework. It will feature health policy content and incorporate global and population health perspectives, content on informatics and technology, and educational strategies for patient and provider practices"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Quantitative research
    Qualitative research
    Mixed methods research
    Data analysis
    Navigating the institutional review board
    Critical appraisal of research-based evidence.
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    [edited by] Nola A. Schmidt, Janet M. Brown.
    Summary: "Evidence-Based Practice for Nurses: Appraisal and Application of Research, Fifth Edition is an essential resource for teaching students how to translate research into practice. The text is based on the five step IDP process (knowledge, persuasion, decision, implementation, and confirmation). The authors employ a fresh and updated approach to teaching nursing research using evidence-based practice. This text is incredibly inclusive and a terrific fit for undergraduate classrooms. The Fifth Edition features a new chapter on evidence hierarchy, new information on mixed-methods research, updated "Apply What You've Learned" articles, and more. Additional content has been added on the evolution of nursing science, quality improvement projects and how they relate to evidence-based practice, and search strategies and authentic web content. Chapters throughout the text have been updated, with significant changes made in chapters on evidence appraisal, quality and outcomes, and change theories. This new edition pays great attention to detail to the Magnet Recognition Program, which is becoming increasingly important for hospitals"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    What Is Evidence-Based Practice?
    What is Nursing Research?
    Using Evidence Through Collaboration to Promote Excellence in Nursing Practice
    Identifying Research Questions
    Finding Sources of Evidence
    Linking Theory, Research, and Practice
    Key Concepts and Principles of Quantitative Designs
    Quantitative Designs: Using Numbers to Provide Evidence
    Epidemiologic Designs: Using Data to Understand Populations
    Qualitative Designs: Using Words to Provide Evidence
    Using Samples to Provide Evidence
    Collecting Evidence
    What Do the Quantitative Data Mean?
    What Do the Qualitative Data Mean?
    Appraising Evidence to Determine Best Practice
    Transitioning Evidence to Practice
    Developing Oneself as an Innovator
    Evaluating Outcomes of Innovation
    Sharing the Insights with Others.
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Geri LoBiondo Wood, Judith Haber, Marita G. Titler.
    Summary: "A straightforward yet comprehensive guide to planning, implementation, and evaluation of EBP and QI projects to improve quality of care and health outcomes. This brand-new, full-color, richly illustrated textbook begins with foundational content and then works through the processes of developing and exploring clinical questions, implementing results, and disseminating information." -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part I. Introduction
    Overview of evidence-based practice
    Models and evidence
    Part II. Processes of developing EBP and questions in various clinical settings
    Developing compelling clinical questions
    Search and critical appraisal of the literature
    Principles of assessing research quality
    Intervention studies
    Observational studies
    Systematic reviews and clinical practice guidelines
    Qualitative studies
    Understanding statistics for evidence-based practice
    Part III. Implementation
    Evidence-based approaches for improving healthcare quality
    Planning for success
    Launching implementation
    Implementation strategies for stakeholders
    Patient-centered evidence-based practices
    Part IV. Evaluation and dissemination
    Evaluation of evidence-based practice
    Dissemination
    Appendices.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2019
  • Digital
    Laura Cullen, Kirsten Hanrahan, Michele Farrington, Jennifer DeBerg, Sharon Tucker, Charmaine Kleiber.
    Summary: One of the biggest challenges of evidence-based practice (EBP) is translating knowledge, research, and clinical expertise into action. Failure to execute EBP well is rarely due to a lack of information, understanding, or experience; rather, it comes down to the lack of tools and practicality of implementing EBP into nursing care.

    Contents:
    Identifying triggering issues/opportunities
    State the question or purpose
    Is the topic a priority?
    Form a team
    Assemble, appraise, and synthesize body of evidence
    Is there sufficient evidence?
    Design and pilot the practice change
    Implementation
    Evaluation
    Is change appropriate for adoption in practice?
    Integrate and sustain the practice change
    Disseminate results.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2018
  • Digital
    Laura Cullen, Kirsten Hanrahan, Michele Farrington, Sharon Tucker, Stephanie Edmonds.
    Summary: "Evidence-based practice (EBP) is a process of shared decision-making between clinicians and patients based on research evidence, the patient's experiences and preferences, and the clinician's clinical expertise. We are now well beyond the Institute of Medicine (IOM) goal that 90% of healthcare be evidence-based by 2020 (IOM, 2010), and a gap persists. The need for EBP is more crucial than ever and must consider value-based care; patient preferences; diversity, equity, and inclusion; regulatory standards; costs; and implementation science. EBP in Action addresses the need for a clear EBP process along with precise, accurate, and effective selection of implementation strategies and resources to promote adoption and sustainability of EBP recommendations. In this book, we will inspire you to use the EBP process, think creatively, and engage patients in EBP co-design for improved outcomes"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Identify Triggering Issues/Opportunities
    State the Question or Purpose
    Is This Topic A Priority?
    Form a Team
    Assemble, Appraise, and Synthesize Body of Evidence
    Is There Sufficient Evidence?
    Design and Pilot the Practice Change
    Evaluation
    Implementation
    Is Change Appropriate for Adoption in Practice?
    Integrate and Sustain the Practice Change
    Disseminate Results.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2023
  • Digital
    Supriya Mallick, Prashanth Giridhar, Goura K. Rath, editors.
    Summary: This book provides evidence-based management in neuro-oncology covering all aspects such as pathology, radiology, surgery, radiation, and chemotherapy. The field of neuro-oncology is rapidly evolving and new evidence is coming out every day towards the optimal management of brain tumors. This necessitates a requirement of a complete guide that shall provide an evidence-based and personalized approach towards dealing with patients. This book also covers recent advances in personalized treatment formed through the relevant basis of anatomy, imaging, radiology, surgical, radiation and systemic treatment of brain and spinal tumors. In addition it also covers the , practical aspects of the planning of the Gamma knife and other radio surgical aspects. The book shall provide valuable assistance to practicing neuro-oncologists to practice better evidence-based personalized medicine.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Epidemiology, neuro-anatomy and neuro- pathology for a neuro-oncologist
    1 Epidemiology and demography of brain tumours
    2 Neuro-anatomy for Oncologist
    3 Pathology, Molecular Biology and classification of Gliomas
    4 Pathology and Molecular pathology of ependymoma
    5 Pathology and Molecular pathology of meningioma
    6 Pathology and Molecular pathology of medulloblastoma
    Part 2 Clinical examination, neuro-imaging and basics of radiotherapy in neuro-oncology
    7 Radiology in modern neuro-oncology practice
    8 PET in Brain Tumors
    9 Fundamentals of Radiation for Neuro-oncology
    10 Stereotactic Radiosurgery: Planning and Evaluation
    11 Radiation induced brain injury
    Part 3 Management of brain tumours
    12 Glioblastoma
    13 Oligodendroglioma
    14 Anaplastic Astrocytoma
    15 Grade 2 Gliomas
    16 Grade 1 Gliomas
    17 Mixed Gliomas or Oligoastrocytoma
    18 Pleomorphic Xanthoastrocytoma
    19 Astroblastoma
    20 Management of Gliomatosis Cerebri
    21 Nervous System Hemangioblastoma
    22 Rare/Uncommon brain tumors
    23 Medulloblastoma & other embryonal brain tumors
    24 Ependymoma
    25 Intracranial germ cell tumour
    26 Management of Pineal region tumors
    27 Skull Base Chordoma and Chondrosarcoma
    28 Intracranial Hemangiopericytoma
    29 Management of Choroid Plexus Carcinoma
    30 Meningioma
    31 Pituitary tumors: Diagnosis and management
    32 Craniopharyngioma
    33 Acoustic Neuroma
    34 Spinal cord tumors
    35 Brain metastases
    36 Paediatric CNS tumours
    37 Primary central nervous system lymphoma
    Part 4 Miscellaneous
    38 Neurocognition in Neurooncology
    39 Syndromes associated with Brain Tumors
    40 Endocrine management in Neuro-oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Thomas L. Christenbery, editor.
    Summary: "Delivers unique systematic guidelines for understanding and applying EBP in nursing programs. A fundamental, reader-friendly guide to evidence-based practice (EBP) for BSN, MSN, and DNP nursing students, Evidence-Based Practice in Nursing explains the conceptual underpinnings of EBP and demonstrates how nurses can put EBP concepts into practice. Replete with critical knowledge, skills, tools, and scholarly development to enable nurses to fully and confidently deliver the highest-quality EBP care, this book eschews a one-size-fits-all approach in favor of unique systematic guidelines for understanding and applying EBP. Building blocks of information grow progressively more complex, enabling their application to any point along nursing's academic trajectory. Thoughtfully organized to fit a variety of EBP-related course objectives, Evidence-Based Practice in Nursing easily adapts for standalone EBP courses at any level as well as advanced practice specialty courses that integrate EBP content. This book addresses the needs of all nursing instructors, including those who teach at multiple levels simultaneously. Key content includes requisite conceptual knowledge of EBP for building clinical decision-making skills; conceptualizing, implementing, and evaluating EBP projects; applying translational science; quality improvement for implementation and evaluation of EBP; developing leadership and structural empowerment strategies; and analyzing how students at each degree/level work with EBP independently, interprofessionally, and intraprofessionally. Chapters align with American Association of Colleges of Nursing (AACN) essentials."--Back cover.

    Contents:
    Nursing's commitment to best clinical decisions / Thomas L. Christenbery
    Using evidence to inform and reform clinical practice / Thomas L. Christenbery
    Integrating best evidence into practice / Phillip Walker and Thomas L. Christenbery
    Setting the boundaries for nursing evidence / Donna McArthur, Rene Love
    Using nursing phenomena to explore evidence / Joanne Duffy
    Evidence-based practice : success of practice change depends on the question / Mary Meyer
    Change theories : the key to knowledge translation / Lydia Rotondo
    How to read and assess for quality of research / Rene Love, Donna McArthur
    Clinical practice guidelines / Molly Bradshaw
    Identifying significant evidence-based practice problems within complex health environments / Nancy Wells, Elizabeth Card
    Organizing an evidence-based practice implementation plan / Alison Edie
    Translational research / Lianne Jeffs, Marianne Saragosa, Michelle Zahradik
    Translational science : bridging the gap between science and application / Lianne Jeffs, Marianne Saragosa, Michelle Zahradik
    Quality improvement processes and evidence-based practice / Susie Leming Lee, Richard Watters
    Evidence-based practice : a culture of organizational empowerment / Thomas L. Christenbery
    Nursing leadership : the fulcrum of evidence-based practice culture / Thomas L. Christenbery
    A prosperous evidence-based culture : nourishing resources / Thomas L. Christenbery
    Advancing evidence-based practice through mentoring and interprofessional collaboration / Elaine Kauschinger
    Evidence-based practice : sequential layering of BSN, MSN, and DNP competencies and opportunities / Thomas L. Christenbery
    Evidence-based practice : empowering nurses / Thomas L. Christenbery.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Print
    Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, Ellen Fineout-Overholt.
    Summary: "The go-to guide to evidence-based practice in nursing for more than a decade, Evidence-Based Practice in Nursing & Healthcare: A Guide to Best Practice, 5th Edition, presents the latest perspectives on research-backed nursing practice in an engaging, user-friendly approach that has made this the bestselling resource of its kind. AJN award-winning authors Bernadette Melnyk and Ellen Fineout-Overholt combine straightforward, conversational storytelling, inspiring quotes, and engaging case studies to make evidence-based practice accessible for students at any level of familiarity. With real-world examples and meaningful strategies in every chapter, this revised and reimagined 5th Edition gives students the confidence to meet today's clinical challenges and ensure the most effective patient outcomes for years to come. New to this edition: NEW! Reimagined coverage and a new chapter on applying implementation science to clinical practice settings familiarize students with the latest evidence and emerging implementation and evaluation tools.. UPDATED! Content throughout empowers you to more effectively teach evidence-based practice principles in academic and clinical settings. UPDATED! Making EPB Real case studies reinforce clinical application through real-world examples"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Unit 1. Steps 0, 1, and 2 : getting started: Chapter 1. Making the case for evidence-based practice and cultivating a spirit of inquiry / Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk and Ellen Fineout-Overholt
    Chapter 2. Asking compelling clinical questions / Ellen Fineout-Overholt and Shelly J. Johnson
    Chapter 3. Finding relevant evidence to answer clinical questions / Tami A. Hartzell, Ellen Fineout-Overholt, and Cyndi B. Kelley
    Unit 1 making EBP real, a success story: Improving outcomes in intensive care through adherence to evidence-based sedation protocol.
    Unit 2. Step 3 : critically appraising evidence: Chapter 4. Critically appraising knowledge for clinical decision making / Ellen Fineout-Overholt
    Chaper 5. Clinician expertise and patient-valued preferences as context for critical appraisal for evidence-based decision making / Ellen Fineout-Overholt, Gina M. Nickels-Nelson, and Lisa English Long
    Chapter 6. Critically appraising quantitative evidence for clinical decision making / Dónal P. O'Mathúna, Ellen Fineout-Overholt, Debra B. Graham, and Amanda Canada
    Chapter 7. Critically appraising qualitative and mixed methods evidence for clinical decision making / Mikki Meadows-Oliver and Chaluza Kapaale
    Chapter 8. Advancing optimal care with robust clinical practice guidelines / Doris Grinspun, Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, Ellen Fineout-Overholt, Shanoja Naik, and Katherine Wallace
    Unit 2 making EBP real, a success story: Diabetic foot care in Hispanic females with type II diabetes : an evidence-based quality improvement initiative.
    Unit 3. Steps 4 and 5 : moving from evidence to sustainable practice change: Chapter 9. Key strategies for implementing evidence in real-world clinical settings / Lynn Gallagher-Ford, Kevin P. Browne, Amanda Shrout, and Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk
    Chapter 10. The role of quality improvement and evidence-based quality improvement in practice change / Ellen Fineout-Overholt, Tracy L. Brewer, Deana Hays, and Dana Tschannen
    Chapter 11. Implementing the evidence-based practice competencies in clinical and academic settings to enhance healthcare quality, safety, and patient outcomes / Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, Lynn Gallagher-Ford, and Cindy Zellefrow
    Chapter 12. Leadership strategies for creating and sustaining evidence-based practice organizations / Lynn Gallagher-Ford, Penelope F. Gorsuch, Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, and Jacalyn S. Buck
    Unit 3 making EBP real, a success story: Improving outcomes for depressed adolescents with the brief cognitive behavioral skills building COPE intervention delivered in 30-minute out-patient visits.
    Unit 4. Creating and sustaining a culture and environment for evidence-based practice: Chapter 13. Innovation and evidence : a partnership in advancing best practice and high quality care / Kathy Malloch and Timothy Porter-O'Grady
    Chapter 14. Models to guide implementation and sustainability of evidence-based practice / Sandra L. Dearholt [and 13 others]
    Chapter 15. Implementation science to clinical practice settings : accelerating the uptake of evidence into practice for best outcomes / Sharon Tucker and Molly McNett
    Chapter 16. Evidence-based practice mentors : the key to sustaining evidence-based practice in clinical and educational settings / Ellen Fineout-Overholt and Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk
    Chapter 17. Creating a vision and motivating a change to evidence-based practice in individuals, teams, and organizations / Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk and Ellen Fineout-Overholt
    Chapter 18. Teaching evidence-based practice in academic settings / Ellen Fineout-Overholt, Alice E. Dupler, and Heather Carter-Templeton
    Chapter 19. Teaching evidence-based practice in clinical settings / Ellen Fineout-Overholt, Marcella Upshaw, and Kathleen M. Williamson
    Unit 4 making EBP real, a success story: Skilled nursing facility readmissions : an evidence-based telemedicine innovation project.
    Unit 5. Step 6 : disseminating evidence and evidence-based practice implementation outcomes: Chapter 20. Using evidence to influence health and organizational policy / Todd E. Tussing, John C. Welch, and Jacqueline M. Loversidge
    Chapter 21. Disseminating evidence through presentations, publications, health policy briefs, and the media / Cecily L. Betz, Kathryn A. Smith, Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, and Philip J. Saken
    Unit 5. Making EBP real, a success story: Taking a moment : evaluating preceptions of burnout and wellbeing in bone marrow transplant nurses using a mindfulmess smartphone app.
    Unit 6. Generating external evidence and writing successful grant proposals: Chapter 22. Generating evidence through quantitative and qualitative research / Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, Dianne Morrison-Beedy, and Denise Cote-Arsenault
    23. Writing a successful grant proposal to fund research and evidence-based practice implementation projects / Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk and Ellen Fineout-Overholt
    Chapter 24. Ethical considerations for evidence implementation and evidence generation / Dónal P. O'Mathúna, Joanne Cleary-Holdforth, and Ellen Fineout-Overholt
    Unit 6 making EBP real, a success story: COPE/Healthy lifestyles TEEN : a school-based RCT.
    Appendix A. Question template for asking PICOT questions
    Appendix B. PICOT questions to systematic search strategy : development and use worksheet example
    Appendix C. General appraisal overview for all studies
    Appendix D. Evaluation table template and synthesis table examples for critical appraisal
    Appendix E. ARCC model timeline for an EBP in educational settings
    Appendix F. Sample instruments to evaluate EBP in educational settings
    Appendix G. Title short versions of instruments to evaluate EBP in clinical settings
    Appendix H. Instruments to assess the EBP competencies and EBP mentorship in any setting.
    Glossary
    Index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Print
    Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, Ellen Fineout-Overholt.
    Contents:
    Making the case for evidence-based practice and cultivating a spirit of inquiry
    Asking compelling, clinical questions
    Finding relevant evidence to answer clinical questions
    Critically appraising knowledge for clinical decision making
    Critically appraising quantitative evidence for clinical decision making
    Critically appraising qualitative evidence for clinical decision making
    Integration of patient preferences and values and clinician expertise into evidence-based decision making
    Advancing optimal care with rigorously developed clinical practice guidelines and evidence-based recommendations
    Implementing evidence in clinical settings
    The role of outcomes and quality improvement in enhancing and evaluating practice changes
    Leadership strategies and evidence-based practice competencies to sustain a culture and environment that supports best practice
    Innovation and evidence: a partnership in advancing best practice and high quality care
    Models to guide implementation and sustainability of evidence-based practice
    Creating a vision and motivating a change to evidence-based practice in individuals, teams, and organizations
    Teaching evidence-based practice in academic settings
    Teaching evidence-based practice in clinical settings
    ARCC evidence-based practice mentors : the key to sustaining evidence-based practice
    Disseminating evidence through publications, presentations, health policy briefs, and the media
    Generating evidence through quantitative research
    Generating evidence through qualitative research
    Writing a successful grant proposal to fund research and evidence-based practice implementation projects
    Ethical considerations for evidence implementation and evidence generation.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RT42 .M44 2015
    1
  • Print
    Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk, PhD, RN, APRN-CNP, FAANP, FNAP, FAAN, Ellen Fineout-Overholt, PhD, RN, FNAP, FAAN.
    Summary: "Enhance your clinical decision-making capabilities and improve patient outcomes through evidence-based practice. Develop the skills and knowledge you need to make evidence-based practice (EBP) an integral part of your clinical decision-making and everyday nursing practice with this proven, approachable text. Written in a straightforward, conversational style, Evidence-Based Practice in Nursing and Healthcare delivers real-world examples and meaningful strategies in every chapter to help you confidently meet today's clinical challenges and ensure positive patient outcomes"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Unit 1: Steps zero, one, two; getting started :
    Making the case for evidence-based practice and cultivating a spirit of identity
    Asking compelling clinical questions
    Finding relevant evidence to answer clinical questions
    Unit 1 making EBP real: A success story. Using an evidence-based, autonomous nurse protocol to reduce catheter-associated urinary tract infections in a long-term acute care facility
    Unit 2: Step three: critically appraising evidence :
    Critically appraising knowledge for clinical decision making
    Critical appraising quantitative evidence for clinical decision making
    Critically appraising qualitative evidence for clinical decision making
    Integration of patient preferences and values and clinician expertise into evidence-based decision making
    Advancing optimal care with robust clinical practice guidelines
    Unit 2 making EBP real: A success story. Intradermal lidocaine intervention on the ambulatory unit : an evidence-based implementation project
    Unit 3: Steps four and five: moving from evidence to sustainable practice change :
    Implementing evidence in clinical settings
    The role of outcomes and evidence-based quality improvement in enhancing and evaluating practice changes
    Implementing the evidence-based practice competencies in clinical and academic settings to ensure healthcare quality and improved patient outcomes
    Leadership strategies for creating and sustaining evidence-based practice organizations
    Unit 3 making EBP real: A success story. Improving outcomes for depressed adolescents with the brief cognitive behavioral COPE intervention delivered in 30-minute outpatient visits
    Unit 4: Creating and sustaining a culture and environment for evidence-based practice :
    Innovation and evidence : a partnership in advancing best practice and high quality care
    Models to guide implementation and sustainability of evidence-based practice
    Creating a vision and motivating a change to evidence-based practice in individuals, teams, and organizations
    Teaching evidence-based practice in academic settings
    Teaching evidence-based practice in clinical settings
    ARCC evidence-based practice mentors : the key to sustaining evidence-based practice
    Unit 4 making EBP real: A success story. Mercy heart failure pathway
    Unit 5: Step six: Disseminating evidence and evidence-based practice implementation outcomes :
    Using evidence to influence health and organizational policy
    Disseminating evidence through presentations, publications, health policy briefs, and the media
    Unit 5 making EBP real: A success story. Research projects receive worldwide coverage
    Unit 6: Generating external evidence and writing successful grant proposals :
    Generating evidence through quantitative and qualitative research
    Writing a successful grant proposal to fund research and evidence-based practice implementation projects
    Ethical considerations for evidence implementation and evidence generation
    Unit 6 making EBP real: Selected excerpts from a funded grant application. COPE/healthy lifestyles for teens : a school-based RCT
    Appendix A: Question templates for asking PICOT questions
    Appendix B: Rapid critical appraisal checklists
    Appendix C: Evaluation table template and synthesis table examples for critical appraisal
    Appendix I: ARCC model timeline for an EBP implementation project
    Appendix J: Sample instruments to evaluate EBP in educational settings
    Appendix K: Sample instruments to evaluate EBP in clinical settings.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Davy C.H. Cheng, Janet Martin, Tirone David, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive yet concise book addresses current best practice in the combined areas of cardiac surgery and anesthesia, interventional minimally invasive cardiac procedures, perioperative management and monitoring, and critical care recovery. This book not only provides the latest best practices in the perioperative management of cardiac surgical patients, but also it summarizes the current clinical guidelines and algorithms from leading cardiac programs and professional societies. Contemporary best practice approaches are written by experts from leading cardiac surgical centers. The preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative management and recovery of surgical patients, including medication, monitoring techniques, and innovative surgical procedures, are presented by experts in the field of cardiac anesthesia and surgery. Perioperative clinical care guidelines, postoperative recovery pathways and models of care are presented with supporting protocols. Evidence-Based Practice in Perioperative Cardiac Anesthesia and Surgery is aimed at all cardiac anesthesiology consultants, fellows, and trainees; all cardiac surgery consultants, fellows, and trainees; nurses in perioperative care and those involved in patient recovery management; cardiac program administrative professionals; and all critical care consultants and trainees looking after cardiovascular surgical patients in the modern era. .

    Contents:
    Section I. Introduction
    Overview of a Cardiac Anesthesia & Surgical Program
    Overview of a Cardiology Interventional Program
    Prognostic Risks and Preoperative Assessment
    Section II. Anesthesia and Cardiopulmonary Bypass Management
    Fast Track Cardiac Anesthesia Management in On-Pump and Off-Pump Coronary Artery Bypass Surgery
    Anesthetic Management in Valvular Heart Surgery
    Anesthetic Management in Robotic Cardiac Surgery
    Anesthetic Management in Interventional Cath Lab Procedures
    Circulatory Arrest and Neuroprotection
    Anesthesia for Combined Cardiac and Thoracic Surgery
    Anesthesia for Intrathoracic Transplantation
    Anesthesia for Patients with Ventricular Assist Devices
    Anesthesia in Pediatric Cardiac Surgery
    Anesthetic Management of Co-Morbid Diseases Affecting Cardiopulmonary Bypass
    Regional Anesthesia Techniques and Management
    Perioperative Monitoring in Cardiac Surgery
    Perioperative Transesophageal Echocardiography
    Essence of CP B Circuit and Intra-aortic Balloon Pump
    Cardiac Pharmacology
    Weaning From Cardiopulmonary Bypass and Low Output Syndrome
    Pulmonary Hypertension and Right Ventricular Dysfunction Post-CPB
    Perioperative Blood Conservation
    Antifibrinolytics and Coagulation Management
    Heparin Associated Thrombocytopenia and Alternatives to Heparin
    Management of Cardiac Surgical Emergency
    Section III. Perioperative Echocardiography Monitoring and Management
    Perioperative Transesophageal echocardiography
    Perioperative Transthoracic echocardiography
    Section IV. Surgical Technique and Postoperative Consideration
    Myocardial Protection During Cardiac Surgery
    On-Pump Aorto-Coronary Bypass Surgery
    Off-Pump Coronary Revascularization Surgery
    Robotic Coronary Artery Revascularization Surgery
    Surgery of the Aortic Valve
    Surgery of the Mitral Valve
    Surgery of the Tricuspid Valve
    Robotic Cardiac Valvular Surgery
    Surgery of the Transverse Arch and Cerebral Protection
    Surgery of Descending Thoracic Aorta
    Combined Cardiac and Vascular Surgery
    Surgery for Mechanical Complications of Myocardial Infarction
    Surgery for End-Stage Heart Disease and Heart Transplantation
    Lung and Heart-Lung Transplantation Surgery
    Ventricular Assist Devices Implantation
    Congenital Heart Surgery
    Ventricular Aneurysm Resection & Partial Left Ventriculotomy
    AICD and Pacemakers Insertion
    Section V. Cardiac Surgical Recovery Unit and Postoperative Complications Management
    Routine Cardiac Surgery Recovery Care: Extubation to Discharge Pathway
    Common Problems in Cardiac Surgery Recovery Unit
    Atrial and Ventricular Arrhythmia Management
    Tamponade and Chest Reopening
    Infection, Sternal Debridement and Muscle Flap
    Difficult Weaning From Mechanical Ventilation and Tracheotomy Care
    Renal Failure and Dialysis
    Neurological Complications and Management
    Section VI. Surgical Ward Management
    Routine Surgical Ward Care
    Common Ward Complications and Management
    Section VII. Appendices.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Clifford S. Deutschman, Patrick J. Neligan.
    Contents:
    PrefaceIs
    hypothermia useful to prevent brain injury after cardiac arrest? In other settings?
    1. Has evidence-based medicine changed the practice of critical care?
    2. Do protocols/guidelines actually improve outcomes?
    3. What happens to critically ill patients after they leave the ICU?
    4. What can be done to enhance recognition of the post-ICU syndrome (PICS)? What can be done to prevent it? What can be done to treat it?
    5. How have genomics informed our understanding of critical illness?
    6. Is oxygen toxic?
    7. What is the role of noninvasive respiratory support and high-flow nasal cannula in the intensive care client?
    8. What is the role of PEEP and recruitment maneuvers in ARDS?
    9. What is the best way to wean and liberate patients from mechanical ventilation?
    10. How does mechanical ventilation damage lungs? What can be done to prevent it?
    11. How should exacerbations of COPD be managed in the intensive care unit?
    12. Is diaphragmatic dysfunction a major problem following mechanical ventilation?
    13. ARDS: Are the current definitions useful?
    14. What are the pathologic and pathophysiologic changes that accompany ARDS?
    15. What factors predispose patients to acute respiratory distress syndrome?
    16. What is the best mechanical ventilation strategy in ARDS?
    17. Is carbon dioxide harmful or helpful in ARDS?
    18. Does patient positioning make a difference in ARDS?
    19. Do inhaled vasodilators in ARDS make a difference?
    20. Does ECMO work?
    21. What lessons have we learned from epidemiologic studies of ARDS?
    22. What are the long-term outcomes after ARDS?
    23. How do I approach fever in the intensive care unit and should fever be treated?
    24. What fluids should be given to the critically ill patient? What fluids should be avoided?
    25. Should blood glucose be tightly controlled in the intensive care unit?
    26. Is there a role for therapeutic hypothermia in critical care?
    27. How do I manage the morbidly obese critically ill patient?
    28. How do I safely transport the critically ill patient?
    29. What are the causes of and how do I treat critical illness neuropathy/myopathy?
    30. What is sepsis? What is septic shock? What are mods and persistent critical illness?
    31. How do I identify the patient with "sepsis"?
    32. Is there immune suppression in the critically ill patient - pro?
    33. Is there immune suppression in the critically ill patient--con?
    34. Does the timing of antibiotic administration matter in sepsis?
    35. What is the role of vasopressors and inotropes in septic shock?
    36. Does monitoring the microcirculation make a difference in sepsis? Outcome?
    37. Are we getting any better at diagnosing sepsis?
    38. Do the surviving sepsis campaign guidelines work?
    39. Has outcome in sepsis improved? What works? What does not?
    40. What happens to the autonomic nervous system in critical illness?
    41. Is persistent critical illness a syndrome of ongoing inflammation/immunosuppression/catabolism? --42. How do I optimize antibiotic use in critical illness?
    43. How do I identify pathologic organisms in the 21st century?
    44. How do I diagnose and manage catheter-related bloodstream infections?
    45. How do I manage central nervous system infections (meningitis/encephalitis)?
    46. How can biomarkers be used to differentiate between infection and non-infectious causes of inflammation?
    47. What is ventilator-associated pneumonia? How do I diagnose it? How do I treat it?
    48. What is the role of invasive hemodynamic monitoring in critical care?
    49. Does the use of echocardiography aid in the management of the critically ill?
    50. How do I manage hemodynamic decompensation in a critically ill patient?
    51. What are the best tools to optimize the circulation?
    52. How should cardiogenic shock be managed (including assist devices)?
    53. How do I manage acute heart failure?
    54. How do I diagnose and manage myocardial ischemia in the ICU?
    55. How do I prevent or treat atrial fibrillation in postoperative critically ill patients?
    56. How do I rapidly and correctly identify acute kidney injury? --57. What is the role of renal replacement therapy in the intensive care unit?
    58. What is the value of nondialytic therapy in acute kidney injury?
    59. How should acid-base disorders be diagnosed?
    60. Is hyperchloremia harmful?
    61. Dysnatremias--what causes them and how should they be treated?
    62. Why is lactate important in critical care?
    63. How does critical illness alter metabolism?
    64. How should traumatic brain injury be managed?
    65. How should aneurysmal subarachnoid hemorrhage be managed?
    66. How should acute ischemic stroke be managed in the intensive care unit?
    67. How should status epilepticus be managed?
    68. When and how should I feed the critically ill patient?
    69. What does critical illness do to the liver?
    70. How do I manage a patient with acute liver failure?
    71. Is there a place for anabolic hormones in critical care?
    72. How do I diagnose and manage acute endocrine emergencies in the ICU?
    73. What is the current role for corticosteroids in critical care?
    74. How should trauma patients be managed in the intensive care unit?
    75. What is abdominal compartment syndrome and how should it be managed?
    76. How should patients with burns be managed in the intensive care unit?
    77. What is the best approach to resuscitation in trauma?
    78. How do I diagnose and treat major gastrointestinal bleeding?
    79. How should the critically ill pregnant patient be managed?
    80. How do I diagnose and manage patients admitted to the intensive care unit after common poisonings?
    81. When is transfusion therapy indicated in critical illness and when is it not?
    82. Is there a role for granulocyte-macrophage colony-stimulating factor and/or erythropoietin in critical illness?
    83. What anticoagulants should be used in the critically ill patient? How do I choose?-- 84. Is there a better way to deliver optimal critical care services?
    85. How do critical care pharmacists contribute to team-based care?
    86. What is the role of advanced practice nurses and physician assistants in the ICU?
    87. Do the guidelines for brain death determination need to be revised?
    88. How do I diagnose, treat, and reduce delirium in the intensive care unit? --
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Murad Alam, editor.
    Summary: This book compiles the best evidence in procedural dermatology, including skin cancer surgery, laser techniques, minimally invasive cosmetic surgery, and emerging techniques. Building on the highly successful first edition, this volume provides much expanded coverage of a range of topics. The best information is provided to reveal the most appropriate interventions for particular indications, optimal treatment techniques, and strategies for avoiding adverse events. Evidence-Based Procedural Dermatology, 2nd edition, includes two types of chapters: procedures and indications. Each chapter is designed to be clear and concise, with tables and flowcharts to showcase main findings. Each cited study is tagged with a level of evidence, and every recommendation includes a strength of evidence score. More than double the length of the first edition, this newest edition includes added procedures and interventions like: new lasers and energy devices for skin resurfacing and pigmentation; non-invasive fat reduction and skin tightening using cryolipolysis, radiofrequency, ultrasound, and chemical adipocytolysis; specific post-skin cancer excision reconstruction techniques; and novel approaches for melanoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Tina Bhutani, Wilson Liao, Mio Nakamura, editors.
    Summary: Given the multitude of new treatment options for psoriasis, including topicals, phototherapy, oral systemic therapy, and injectable biologics, the treatment of the disease has truly become an art. Evidence-Based Psoriasis passes on this art to practicing physicians in a very practical and easy-to-use format, focusing on mild, moderate, and severe psoriasis. Offering evidence-based information in a concise text, this book discusses new treatment options, including topicals, phototherapy, oral systemic therapy, and injectable biolgoics. This text also describes unique methods of use, such as sequential and combination therapy, and is written for practicing dermatologists, residents, and primary care physicians. Evidence-Based Psoriasis also includes high quality color photographs and tables for quick and easy reference.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Psoriasis: Overview and Diagnosis
    Chapter 2. Topical Treatments
    Chapter 3. Phototherapy and Photochemotherapy
    Chapter 4. Oral Agents for Psoriasis
    Chapter 5. Biologics
    Chapter 6. Future Therapeutics in Psoriasis
    Chapter 7. Combination Therapy
    Chapter 8. Maximizing Treatment Compliance in Psoriasis.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Daniel David, Steven Jay Lynn, Guy Montgomery.
    Contents:
    An introduction to the science and practice of evidence-based psychotherapy : a framework for evaluation and a way forward / Daniel David, Steven J. Lynn and Guy H. Montgomery
    Varieties of psychotherapies for major depressive disorder in adults : an evidence-based evaluation / Daniel David, Ioana A. Cristea and Aaron T. Beck
    Evidence-based psychological interventions for bipolar disorder / Aurora Szentágotai-Tatar and Daniel David
    Panic and phobias disorders / Barbara Depreeuw, Leigh A. Andrews, Sharon Eldar and Stefan G. Hofmann
    Generalized anxiety disorder / Hanna McCabe-Bennett, Katie Fracalanza, and Martin M. Antony
    Obsessive-compulsive disorder / Lindsey M. Collins, Laura B. Bragdon and Meredith E. Coles
    Evidence based practice for posttraumatic stress disorder / B. Christopher Frueh, Anouk L. Grubaugh, Alok Madan, Sandra Neer, Jon Elhai and Deborah C. Beidel
    Evidence-based psychological interventions for eating disorders / Diana M. Cândea, Daniel David and Aurora Szentágotai-Tatar
    Evidence-based treatment for alcohol use disorders : a review through the lens of the theory : efficacy matrix / James MacKillop, Monika Stojek, Lauren VanderBroek and Max Owens
    Psychotherapeutic treatments for male and female sexual dysfunction disorders / Jessica C. Emanu, Isabelle Avildsen and Christian J. Nelson
    The psychological treatment of psychopathy : theory and research / Lisa K. Hecht, Robert D. Latzman and Scott O. Lilienfeld
    Borderline personality disorder / Lorie A. Ritschel, Colleen M. Cowperthwait, Lindsay M. Stewart and Noriel E. Lim
    The treatment of dissociation : an evaluation of effectiveness and potential mechanisms / Reed Maxwell, Harald Merckelbach, Scott O. Lilienfeld and Steven Jay Lynn
    Psychotherapy for schizophrenia-spectrum disorders / Stacy Ellenberg, Steven Jay Lynn and Gregory P. Strauss
    Psychotherapy and autism spectrum disorder : conceptual and pragmatic challenges / Raymond G. Romanczyk, Rachel N.S. Cavalari and Jennifer M. Gillis
    Varieties of psychotherapies for ADHD : an evidence-based evaluation / Anca Dobrean, Costina R. Păsărelu and Manfred Döpfner
    Insomnia / Elisabeth Hertenstein, Bogdan Voinescu and Dieter Riemann
    The scientific status of evidence-based psychotherapies : concluding thoughts / Daniel David, Steven J. Lynn and Guy H. Montgomery.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Ross C. Brownson, Elizabeth A. Baker, Anjali D. Deshpande, Kathleen N. Gillespie.
    Summary: The acclaimed textbook for navigating the practice and challenges of public health, now updated and completely revised ""It should be recommended or assigned to all students in public health.""--American Journal of Epidemiology This fully revised and updated edition Evidence-Based Public Health offers an essential primer on how to choose, carry out, and evaluate evidence-based programs and policies in public health settings. It addresses not only how to locate and utilize scientific evidence, but also how to implement and evaluate interventions in a way that generates new evidence.

    Contents:
    The need for evidence-based public health
    Building capacity for evidence-based public health
    Assessing scientific evidence for public health action
    Understanding and applying economic evaluation and other analytic tools
    Conducting community assessment
    Developing an initial statement of the issue
    Quantifying the issue
    Searching the scientific literature and using systematic reviews
    Developing and prioritizing intervention options
    Developing an action plan and implementing interventions
    Evaluating the program or policy
    Opportunities for advancing evidence-based public health.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    Siu-Wai Leung, Hao Hu, editors.
    Summary: This book is a practical guide to the evidence-based medicine (EBM) research methods that are applicable to Chinese medicine (CM). It includes 3 parts: clinical research, healthcare data research and laboratory research. In each chapter, it explains how to acquire, analyze and evaluate a specific kind of CM research result. Authors exemplify the most important methods with successful cases in transforming reliable data into new knowledge of CM. This book emphasizes the requirements for CM researchers to design and conduct CM studies by following the best available principles, standards and guidelines.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Achilles Thoma, [and 3 others], editors.
    Summary: The purpose of this book specifically is to teach surgeons (academic or community), surgical fellows and surgical residents regardless of the surgical specialty, the skills to appraise what they read in the surgical literature. Surgeons need to be able to understand what they read before applying the conclusions of a surgical article to their practice. As most surgeons do not have the extra training in health research methodology, understanding how the research was done, how to interpret the results and finally deciding to apply them to the patient level is indeed a difficult task. Chapters explain the methodological issues pertaining to the various study designs reported in the surgical literature. Most chapters begin with a clinical scenario with uncertain course of action with which most surgeons are struggling. Readers are taught how to search the literature for the best evidence that will answer the surgical problem under discussion. An identified article that seems relevant to the problem you are investigating can be appraised by addressing 3 key questions: 1). Is the study I am reading valid? 2). What are the results of this study? 3). Can I apply these results to my patients? While the primary goal of Evidence-Based Surgery is to teach surgeons how to appraise the surgical literature, an added benefit is that the concepts explained here may help research-minded surgeons produce higher quality research.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    E. Sebastian Debus, Reinhart T. Grundmann.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Michele Berk.
    Summary: The book includes a chapter, written by the treatment developer(s), on each of the six treatments that have been shown in randomized controlled trials to reduce suicidal and/or self-harm behavior in adolescents with prior histories of these behaviors.

    Contents:
    Risk and protective factors for suicidal thoughts and behaviors in adolescents / Andrew C. Porter, Jaclyn C. Kearns, Erika C. Esposito, and Catherine R. Glenn
    Safety planning and risk management / Michele Berk and Stephanie Clarke
    Dialectical behavior therapy for suicidal multiproblem adolescents / Alec L. Miller, Jill H. Rathus, Michele Berk, and Amy S. Walker
    Mentalization-based therapy for adolescents / Peter Fonagy, Chloe Campbell, Trudie Rossouw, and Anthony Bateman
    Cognitive-behavioral therapy for co-occurring suicidal behavior and substance use / Christianne Esposito-Smythers, Anthony Spirito, and Jennifer Wolff
    A psychiatric adaptation of multisystemic therapy for suicidal youth / Melisa D. Rowland
    Attachment-based family therapy for suicidal youth and young adults / Guy S. Diamond, Quintin A. Hunt, Bora Jin, and Suzanne A. Levy
    The SAFETY program : a youth and family centered cognitive-behavioral intervention informed by dialectical behavior therapy / Jennifer L. Hughes, Kalina Babeva, and Joan R. Asarnow
    Pharmacological approaches for treating suicidality in adolescents / Isheeta Zalpuri and Manpreet K. Singh.
  • Digital
    Ulrich Schnyder, Marylène Cloitre, editors.
    Summary: This book offers an evidence based guide for clinical psychologists, psychiatrists, psychotherapists and other clinicians working with trauma survivors in various settings. It provides easily digestible, up-to-date information on the basic principles of traumatic stress research and practice, including psychological and sociological theories as well as epidemiological, psychopathological, and neurobiological findings. However, as therapists are primarily interested in how to best treat their traumatized patients, the core focus of the book is on evidence based psychological treatments for trauma-related mental disorders. Importantly, the full range of trauma and stress related disorders is covered, including Acute Stress Reaction, Complex PTSD and Prolonged Grief Disorder, reflecting important anticipated developments in diagnostic classification. Each of the treatment chapters begins with a short summary of the theoretical underpinnings of the approach, presents a case illustrating the treatment protocol, addresses special challenges typically encountered in implementing this treatment, and ends with an overview of related outcomes and other research findings. Additional chapters are devoted to the treatment of comorbidities, special populations and special treatment modalities, and to pharmacological treatments for trauma-related disorders. The book concludes by addressing the fundamental question of how to treat whom, and when.

    Contents:
    Traumatic stress: The basic principles
    Epidemiology of trauma and trauma-reated disorders
    Trauma as a public mental health issue
    Psychological and sociological theories
    Neurobiological findings
    Trauma and physical health
    The diagnostic spectrum of trauma-related disorders
    Acute Stress Disorder
    Posttraumatic Stress Disorder
    Complex PTSD
    Enduring Personality Change After Catastrophic Experience
    Beyond DSM-IV and ICD-10
    Evidence based psychological treatments for trauma-related disorders
    Prolonged Exposure Therapy
    Cognitive Processing Therapy
    Eye Movement Desensitization and Reprocessing
    Narrative Exposure Therapy
    Brief Eclectic Psychotherapy for PTSD
    STAIRS for Complex PTSD
    Evidence based trauma-focused psychotherapies for children
    Evidence based trauma-focused psychotherapies for elderly people
    Treating special populations: Tortured refugees
    Chronic pain
    Combat veterans
    Special treatment settings: Group treatment
    Couples treatment
    Web based treatment
    Pharmacological treatment for trauma-reated disorders
    How to treat whom and when?.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Ulrich Schnyder, Marylène Cloitre, editors.
    Summary: The second, completely updated edition of this book offers an evidence based guide for clinical psychologists, psychiatrists, psychotherapists and other clinicians working with trauma survivors in various settings. It provides easily digestible, up-to-date information on the basic principles of traumatic stress research and practice, including psychological and sociological theories as well as epidemiological, psychopathological, and neurobiological findings. However, as therapists are primarily interested in how to best treat their traumatized patients, the core focus of the book is on evidence based psychological treatments for trauma-related mental disorders. The full range of trauma and stress related disorders is covered, including Acute Stress Reaction, Complex PTSD and Prolonged Grief Disorder, reflecting important anticipated developments in diagnostic classification. Each of the treatment chapters begins with a short summary of the theoretical underpinnings of the approach, presents a case illustrating the treatment protocol, addresses special challenges typically encountered in implementing this treatment, and ends with an overview of related outcomes and other research findings. Additional chapters are devoted to the treatment of comorbidities, special populations and special treatment modalities and to pharmacological treatments for trauma-related disorders. A novel addition is the chapter on Innovative interventions to increase global mental health. The book concludes by addressing the fundamental question of how to treat whom, and when--Pulisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Traumatic Stress : The Basic Principles. Trauma as a public health issue : epidemiology of trauma and trauma-related disorders
    Psychological and sociological theories of PTSD
    An integrative view on the biopsychology of stress and posttraumatic stress disorder
    Understanding pathways from traumatic exposure to physical health
    Stress and Trauma Related Disorders. The diagnostic spectrum of trauma-related disorders
    Psychotherapy. Early intervention after trauma
    Prolonged exposure therapy
    Cognitive therapy for PTSD : updating memories and meanings of trauma
    Cognitive processing therapy
    EMDR therapy for trauma-related disorders
    Narrative exposure therapy (NET) : reorganizing memories of traumatic stress, fear and violence
    Brief eclectic psychotherapy for PTSD
    STAIR narrative therapy
    Prolonged grief disorder therapy (PGDT)
    Innovative interventions to increase global mental health
    Treating Comorbidities. Trauma and addiction : a clinician's guide to treatment
    Treating PTSD and borderline personality disorder
    The complexity of chronic pain in traumatized people : diagnostic and therapeutic challenges
    Treating Special Populations. Evidence-based treatments for children and adolescents
    Treating PTSD symptoms in older adults
    Treatment of traumatized refugees and immigrants
    Considerations in the treatment of veterans with posttraumatic stress disorder
    Special Treatment Modalities. Group treatment for trauma-related psychological disorders
    Couple treatment for posttraumatic stress disorder
    Telemental health approaches for trauma survivors
    Pharmacotherapy. Pharmacological treatment for trauma-reated psychological disorders
    Conclusions. Next steps : building a science for improving outcomes.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Subhash C. Mandal, Raja Chakraborty, Saikat Sen, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: The demand for traditional medicines, herbal health products, herbal pharmaceuticals, nutraceuticals, food supplements and herbal cosmetics etc. is increasing globally due to the growing recognition of these products as mainly non-toxic, having lesser side effects, better compatibility with physiological flora, and availability at affordable prices. In the last century, medical science has made incredible advances all over the globe. In spite of global reorganization and a very sound history of traditional uses, the promotion of traditional medicine faces a number of challenges around the globe, primarily in developed nations. Regulation and safety is the high concern for the promotion of traditional medicine. Quality issues and quality control, pharmacogivilane, scientific investigation and validation, intellectual property rights, and biopiracy are some key issues that restrain the advancement of traditional medicine around the globe. This book contains diverse and unique chapters, explaining in detail various subsections like phytomolecule, drug discovery and modern techniques, standardization and validation of traditional medicine, and medicinal plants, safety and regulatory issue of traditional medicine, pharmaceutical excipients from nature, plants for future. The contents of the book will be useful for the academicians, researchers and people working in the area of traditional medicine. .

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Global Approach for Drug Discovery and Development from Indian Traditional Medicine
    Chapter 2. Bioactive Natural Leads TargetingCancer Cell Metabolism
    Chapter 3. Omics Technologies and Development of Anti-diabetic Therapies from Prospective Natural Products
    Chapter 4. Amaryllidaceae Alkaloids as Anti-inflammatory Agents Targeting Cholinergic Anti-inflammatory Pathway: Mechanisms and Prospects
    Chapter 5. Neurodegenerative Diseases and Small Molecule Protein Chaperone Activator of Natural Origin
    Chapter 6. Role of Phytomolecules on the Basic Biology of Aging
    Chapter 7. Role of phytomedicine in alleviating oxidative stress mediated vascular complications in diabetes
    Chapter 8. Plant Based #xF062;-Secretase (BACE-1) Inhibitors: A Mechanistic Approach to Encounter Alzheimer's Disorder
    Chapter 9. Bioactive Compounds of Mangroves as Potent Drug and in Nanoparticle Synthesis
    Play a Pivotal Role in Combating Human Pathogens. Chapter 10. Medicinal Plants: A Rich Source of Bioactive Molecules Used in Drug Development
    Chapter 11. Cell-based Assays in Natural Product-based Drug Discovery
    Chapter 12. Allelochemicals: An Emerging Tool for Weed Management
    Chapter 13. Secondary Metabolites of Higher Plants as Green Preservatives of Herbal Raw Materials and Their Active Principles During Postharvest Processing
    Chapter 14. Importance of Chromatography Techniques in Phytomedicine Research
    Chapter 15. Reverse Pharmacology - A Tool for Drug Discovery From Traditional Medicine
    Chapter 16. Role of Modern Biological Techniques in Evidence-Based Validation of Ayurvedic Herbometallic Preparations
    Chapter 17. HPTLC Fingerprinting analysis of Phytoconstituents from Indigenous Medicinal Plants
    Chapter 18. Climate Change,Geographical Location and Other Allied Triggering Factors Modulate the Standardization and Characterization of Traditional Medicinal Plants: AChallenges and Prospect for Phyto-Drug Development
    Chapter 19. Molecular Docking Studies of Plant-Derived Bioactive Compounds: A Comprehensive in silico Standardization Approach
    Chapter 20. Standardization and Quality Evaluation of Botanicals with Special Reference to Marker Components
    Chapter 21. Analytical Standardization of Haridra Formulation by UV-VIS Spectrophotometry and RP-HPLC
    Chapter 22. Ethnobotanical survey: the foundation to evidence based validation of medicinal plants
    Chapter 23. Phytotherapeutics: The Rising Role of Drug Transporters in Herb-Drug Interactions with Botanical Supplements
    Chapter 24. An Insight into Herb Interactions: Clinical Evidence Based Overview
    Chapter 25. Pharmacovigilance of Herbal Medicines: An Overview
    Chapter 26. Herbal Drugs: Efficacy, Toxicity and Safety Issues
    Chapter 27. Herbal Drug Patenting
    Chapter 28. Safety and Regulatory Issues on Traditional Medicine Entrusted Drug Discovery
    Chapter 29. Pharmacovigilance of Herbal Medicine: An Evolving Discipline
    Chapter 30. Toxicity Studies Related to Medicinal Plants
    Chapter 31. Herb-Drug Interactions
    Chapter 32. Plant Based Traditional Herbal Contraceptive Use in India: Safety and Regulatory Issues
    Chapter 33. Traditional Medicine Stability and Pharmacokinetic Issue
    Chapter 34. Pharmacovigilance: Methods in developing the safety and acceptability of traditional medicines
    Chapter 35. Zoopharmacognosy (Plant-Animal Interaction)
    Chapter 36. Significance of Stability and Pharmacokinetic issues in Traditional Medicine
    Chapter 37. Pharmaceutical Formulations Development Based on the Polymers Obtained from Edible Plants: An Excellent Approach for the Betterment in Health Care Services
    Chapter 38. Evaluation of bioactivity of green nanoparticles synthesized from traditionally used medicinal plants: a review
    Chapter 39. Physicochemical, Micromeritics, Biomedical and Pharmaceutical Applications of Assam Bora Rice Starch
    Chapter 40. Natural Excipients in Pharmaceutical Formulations
    Chapter 41. A Wonder Plant Withania: Pharmacological and Chemical Perspectives
    Chapter 42. Immunomodulators and Phyto Drugs
    Chapter 43. Combined Effects of Plant Extracts on Ovarian Cell Functioning
    Chapter 44. Pterocarpussantalinus: A Wonder Gift of Nature
    Chapter 45. Phytochemicals And Investigations On Traditionally Used Medicinal Mushrooms
    Chapter 46. A Review On Investigational Studies Of Marine Macroalgae Spogomorpha Indica L
    Chapter 47. Validation of Traditional Claim of Oxalis debilis Kunth., An Ethnomedicinal Plant from North-eastern Region of India
    Chapter 48. Traditional Herbal Medicine Practiced in Plateau-Fringe and Rarh Districts of West Bengal, India
    Chapter 49. Pharmacology and Mechanisms of Natural Medicine in Treatment of Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus
    Chapter 50. Indian Traditional Herbs and Alzheimer's Disease: Integrating Ethnobotany and Phytotherapy. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ronald H.M.A. Bartels, Maroeska M. Rovers, Gert P. Westert, editors.
    Summary: This book covers spinal, cranial and peripheral nerve surgeries. Each chapter has a uniform format for ease of reading, including a description of the problem, a literature summary and analysis, and conclusions made using evidence-based medicine (including the GRADE method). The scientific evidence for a selection of neurosurgical procedures for well-known pathologic entities is thoroughly summarized and analysed in order to provide an overview of the efficacy and effectiveness of procedures in relation to the target patient population. Evidence for Neurosurgery: Effective Procedures & Treatment is aimed at a professional audience of junior and consultant neurosurgeons, researchers in the area, and policy makers.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Jacqueline M. Loversidge, Joyce Zurmehly.
    Summary: "What happens in health policy at local, state, and federal levels directly affects patients, nurses, and nursing practice. Some healthcare professionals, though, are intimidated by the complex and often nonlinear policy process or simply don't know how to take the first step toward implementing policy change. In the second edition of Evidence-Informed Health Policy, authors Jacqueline M. Loversidge and Joyce Zurmehly demystify health policymaking and equip nurses and other healthcare professionals with the knowledge, tools, and confidence to navigate the first of many steps into health policy. This book translates the EBP language of clinical decision-making into an evidence-informed health policy (EIHP) model-a foundation for integrating evidence into health policymaking and leveraging dialogue with stakeholders. Readers will develop a stronger understanding of policymaking and its role within government, learn strategies for influencing policymakers, and help shape future healthcare policy that makes the best use of evidence. This new edition includes: Fresh perspectives on the use of evidence to inform smart health policy, learned knowledge of the COVID-19 pandemic and global crisis to more effectively strategize for sound policy informed by the best science, a new visual graphic representation of the EIHP Model with added descriptions of the EIHP process, and additional breadth and depth on policymaking theories and models"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library [2023]
  • Digital
    edited by Donatella Marazziti, Stephen M. Stahl.
    Contents:
    Evil, terrorism and psychiatry / Donatella Marazziti and Stephen M. Stahl
    To die to kill : suicide as a weapon. some historical antecedents of suicide terrorism / Stefano Salvatori and Donatella Marazziti
    The philosophy of hate and anger / Claudio Bonito and Guido Traversa
    Identity, alienation and violent radicalisation / Antonio Ventriglio and Dinesh Bhugra
    The mind of suicide terrorists / Donatella Marazzitti, Antonello Veltri and Armando Piccinni
    Psychopathology of terrorists / Armando Piccinni, Donatella Marazziti and Antonello Veltri
    Why is terrorism a man's business? / Anne Maria Moller-Leimkuhler
    Religion, violence, and the brain : a neuroethical perspective / Alberto Carrara
    Brain alterations potentially associated with aggression and terrorism / Bernhard Bogerts, Maria Schone, and Stephanie Breitschuh
    Political terrorism and affective polarization in "black" and "red" terrorists in Italy during the years 1968-1988 / Matteo Pacini and Icro Maremmani
    Conditions of life and death of psychiatric patients in France during world war II : euthanasia or collateral casualties? / Patrick Lemoine and Stephen M. Stahl
    Neuropsychiatric characteristics of antiterrorist operation combatants in the Donbass (Ukraine) / Konstantin N. Loganovsky, Natalia A. Zdanevich, Marina V. Gresko, Donatella Marazziti, and Tatiana K. Loganovskaja
    The international scenario of terrorism / Donato Marzano
    Identification and prevention of radicalisation. Practice and experiences with a multidisciplinary working model / Dorte Sestoft
    How to fight terrorism? Political and strategic aspects / Erich Vad.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Waclaw Tworzydlo, Szczepan M. Bilinski, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Theoretical background. 1. Reflections on model organisms in evolutionary developmental biology / Alan C. Love and Yoshinari Yoshida ; 2. Hourglass or twisted ribbon? / Peter K. Dearden ; 3. Ambulacrarians and the ancestry of deuterostome nervous systems / Laurent Formery, Michael Schubert, and Jenifer C. Croce
    Part II. New and emerging model systems in evo-devo research. 4. Oikopleura dioica : an emergent chordate model to study the impact of gene loss on the evolution of the mechanisms of development / Alfonso Ferrández-Roldán, Josep Martí-Solans, Cristian Cañestro, and Ricard Albalat ; 5. Neuropeptides, peptide hormones, and their receptors of a tunicate, Ciona intestinalis / Honoo Satake, Shin Matsubara, Akira Shiraishi, Tatsuya Yamamoto, Tomohiro Osugi, Tsubasa Sakai, and Tsuyoshi Kawada ; 6. Emergence of embryo shape during cleavage divisions / Alex McDougall, Janet Chenevert, Benoit G. Godard, and Remi Dumollard ; 7. Sex determination, sexual development, and sex change in slipper snails / Maryna P. Lesoway and Jonathan Q. Henry ; 8. The cricket Gryllus bimaculatus : techniques for quantitative and functional genetic analyses of cricket biology / Arpita Kulkarni and Cassandra G. Extavour ; 9. The rove beetle Creophilus maxillosus as a model system to study asymmetric division, oocyte specification, and the germ-somatic cell signaling / Malgorzata Kloc ; 10. Cell biology of the tardigrades : current knowledge and perspectives / K. Ingemar Jönsson, Ingvar Holm, and Helena Tassidis ; 11. Development of Xenoturbellida / Hiroaki Nakano ; 12. Cellular and molecular mechanisms of hydra regeneration / Puli Chandramouli Reddy, Akhila Gungi, and Manu Unni ; 13. Paramecium biology / Judith Van Houten
    Part III. Evo-devo in comparative context. 14. Insights into germline development and differentiation in molluscs and reptiles : the use of molecular markers in the study of non-model animals / Liliana Milani and Maria Gabriella Maurizii ; 15. Molecular markers in the study of non-model vertebrates : their significant contributions to the current knowledge of tetrapod glial cells and fish olfactory neurons / Simone Bettini, Maurizio Lazzari, and Valeria Franceschini ; 16. Embryogenesis of marsupial frogs (Hemiphractidae), and the changes that accompany terrestrial development in frogs / Eugenia M. del Pino ; 17. Evolution and regulation of limb regeneration in arthropods / Yuichiro Suzuki, Jacquelyn Chou, Sarah L. Garvey, Victoria R. Wang, and Katherine O. Yanes ; 18. Viviparity in two closely related epizoic dermapterans relies on disparate modifications of reproductive systems and embryogenesis / Szczepan M. Bilinski, Mariusz K. Jaglarz, and Waclaw Tworzydlo ; 19. Morphology of ovaries and oogenesis in chelicerates / Izabela Jędrzejowska ; 20. Reproduction, gonad structure, and oogenesis in tardigrades / Izabela Poprawa and Kamil Janelt ; 21. Architecture and life history of female germ-line cysts in clitellate annelids / Piotr Świątek and Anna Z. Urbisz.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Graham A.W. Rook, Christopher A. Lowry, editors.
    Summary: This edited collection of 12 chapters by research workers from a wide range of disciplines resolves the confusion that currently surrounds the "hygiene hypothesis" by considering the human need for exposure to microorganisms from an evolutionary point of view. The book explains why we evolved a requirement for exposure to microbiota from our mothers, from other people, and from the natural environment. It also explains the physiological roles of these exposures, what goes wrong when the exposures are distorted and how human lifestyles and activities, including degradation of the natural environment, are leading to this distortion. Particular attention is given to the range of pathologies associated with inappropriate microbial exposures and inappropriate colonization, including immunoregulatory problems such as allergies and autoimmunity, metabolic problems such as obesity and diabetes, and problems of central nervous system function and neurodegeneration. This book is of profound relevance to most medical disciplines, but also to those concerned with preserving the natural environment and with developing healthier urbanisation.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. From observing children in traditional upbringing to concepts of health
    Chapter 2. Human evolution, microorganisms, socioeconomic status and reconciling necessary microbial exposures with essential hygiene
    Chapter 3. Biodiversity, microbiomes, and human health
    Chapter 4. Regulation of host immunity by the gut microbiota
    Chapter 5. The gut microbiota and host metabolism
    Chapter 6. The impacts of the microbiota on animal development and physiology
    Chapter 7. The development of the gut microbiota in childhood, and its distortion by lifestyle changes
    Chapter 8. Distortion of the microbiota of the natural environment by human activities
    Chapter 9. The nature and functions of vertebrate skin microbiota
    Chapter 10. The influence of the microbiota on brain structure and function: Implications for stress-related neuropsychiatric disorders
    Chapter 11. Neurodegenerative diseases and the gut microbiota
    Chapter 12. Clinical application of the biodiversity hypothesis in the management of allergic disorders. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA776.5 .E86 2022
    1
  • Digital
    Pierre Pontarotti, editor.
    Summary: This book presents 15 selected contributions to the 22nd Evolutionary Biology Meeting, which took place in September 2018 in Marseille. They are grouped under the following major themes: · Origin of Life · Concepts and Methods · Genome and Phenotype Evolution The aims of these annual meetings in Marseille are to bring together leading evolutionary biologists and other scientists who employ evolutionary biology concepts, e.g. for medical research, and to promote the exchange of ideas and encourage interdisciplinary collaborations. Offering an up-to-date overview of recent advances in the field of evolutionary biology, this book represents an invaluable source of information for scientists, teachers and advanced students.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Origin of Life; 1 A Non-paradoxical Pathway for the Chemical Evolution Toward the Most Primitive RNA-Based Life-like System; 1.1 Importance of the RNA World Hypothesis for the Origin-of-Life Problem; 1.2 Drawbacks Regarding the RNA World Hypothesis; 1.2.1 RNA-Based Life-like System Involving Both Information and Metabolism Machineries; 1.2.2 Compartmentalization for the RNA-Based Life-like System; 1.2.3 Importance of Additional Functions to the Self-replication of RNA; 1.3 Two-Gene Hypothesis; 1.4 Experimental Techniques Simulating the Hadean Earth Environments 1.4.1 Compatibility with the Hadean Earth Environments1.4.2 Hydrothermal Flow Reactor Systems; 1.4.3 Other Methods on Extreme Conditions; 1.5 Chemical Evolution of Proteins and RNA Under the Hadean Earth Environments; 1.5.1 Protein-like Molecules; 1.5.2 RNA; 1.5.3 High-Temperature Origin of Life; 1.6 Conclusions; References; 2 Formation of Nucleosides and Nucleotides in Chemical Evolution; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Formation of Nucleobases; 2.3 Formation and Conformation of Ribose; 2.4 Formation of Nucleosides and Nucleotides; 2.5 Concluding Remarks; References 3 The First Universal Common Ancestor (FUCA) as the Earliest Ancestor of LUCA's (Last UCA) Lineage3.1 Historical Background; 3.1.1 The Lineage of LUCA; 3.1.2 LUCA and the Viruses; 3.2 Life Versus Biological Systems; 3.2.1 Origins Versus Emergence; 3.3 Biological Systems are Chemical Translators; 3.3.1 The Molecular Establishment of the Genetic Code; 3.3.2 The Anatomy of Ribosomes; 3.4 FUCA Is Born at the Proto-PTC; 3.5 The Maturation of FUCA; 3.6 Conclusions; References; Concepts and Methods; 4 Repeatability and Predictability in Experimental Evolution; 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Factors Limiting Predictability in Experimental Evolution4.2.1 Historical Contingency and Determinism in Experimental Evolution; 4.2.2 Influence of Genetic Background; 4.2.3 Environmental Influence; 4.2.4 Complexity and Diversity in Experimental Evolution; 4.2.5 Relevance to Natural Populations; 4.3 Causes of Repeated Experimental Evolution; 4.4 Potential for Forecasting on Different Biological Levels; 4.4.1 Prediction of Fitness; 4.4.2 Prediction of Phenotypes; 4.4.3 Origin of Adaptive Mutants; 4.4.4 Prediction of Mutational Effects 4.4.5 Conclusion-Desired Properties of Model Systems for Forecasting Experimental EvolutionReferences; 5 RetroSpect, a New Method of Measuring Gene Regulatory Evolution Rates Using Co-mapping of Genomic Functional Features with Transposable Elements; 5.1 Background; 5.2 Methods; 5.2.1 Quantitative Metrics of Genes and Pathways Regulatory Evolution; 5.2.2 Extraction and Quantitation of RE-Specific TFBS; 5.2.3 Evolutionary Age of REs; 5.2.4 Gene Enrichment by RE-Linked TFBS; 5.2.5 Pathway Enrichment by RE-Linked TFBS; 5.2.6 Specific Cell Line Distribution Patterns of RE-Linked TFBS
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Georg Glaeser, Werner Nachtigall.
    Summary: With spectacular large-format images complemented by scientifically grounded, yet easy-to-read, explanatory texts, Georg Glaeser and Werner Nachtigall take you on an exciting journey through the fascinating world of macrostructures - small structures in nature that fulfill specific functions. This book will pique your curiosity about a secret world known only to a few by presenting an impressive range of evolutionary mechanisms, from shrimps "tail flips" to the adhesive pads of gecko setae and the implementation of biological structures in the field of bionics. The book can be read in any fashion you please - the cross-references make it easy to jump across the sections, which are largely self-contained and discuss various highlights of the evolutionary process.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Table of contents; 1. Shape, Movement, Lever; Morphological structures; Flexible shells and levers; Spiral twisting; Protected as a ball; Ants in interaction; Stiffening under internal pressure; Distending and extending apparatuses; Extendable stalks; Seeing in the macro world; Hydraulics in spider legs; Active and passive growth; Hinge joints and ball-and-socket joints; Leg-flexing; Kinematic chains; Sling jaw; Click mechanism and stings; The joint system of insect antennae; 2. Sticking, Filtering, Drilling; Adhesion apparatuses; Sticky spider webs; Sticky sundew droplets Coupling mechanisms; Predetermined breaking points; Digging shovels; "Sand shoes"; Brushes; Pollen-gathering with abdomen and legs; Pollen-gathering with pollen baskets; Dust filters and sealing strips; Traps and filters; Earth drillers; Mobile ovipositors and stings; 3. Gripping, Stretching, Folding; Gripping devices; Pincers; Injection syringes and cannulas; Apparatuses for gripping and scraping; Barb Systems; Springs and bolts; Stretching space; Membrane constructions; Folding mechanisms; 4. Signaling, Swimming, Flying, Exploding; Light organs and signal flags; Surface tension (1) Flutter stability and tensile strength6. Packaging, Primordia, Unfolding Mechanisms; Packaging; Casing of mericarp fruits and seeds; Casing (2); Unfolding mechanisms; Pre-fabricated structures; Pollination Mechanisms (1); Pollination Mechanisms (2); Environmental sensors; Antennae; Dragonflies
    world champion maneuverers; 7. Brave New World; Lateral torsional buckling in Strelitzia blossoms; The anteater's claw; The pectoral fins of large rays; Fin edges and the kickback principle; Superhydrophobia ... ; ... and the Salvinia Paradox; Corrosion-resistant sandfish scales; The famous lotus effect Surface tension (2)Flow adaptation; The swiftest predators under water; Propulsion Apparatuses; Swimming with paddle fins; Parachutes and Gliders; Wing cascades and slats; Explosion mechanisms; Powder dispensers; Cocoons; Hanging by a thread; 5. Storage, Constructions, Building materials; Botanical traps for animals; Water reservoirs; Clay constructions; Protective shells; Chitin as a building material; Stockwork and frame construction; Bone constructions (1); Bone constructions (2); Lightweight constructions in the plant world; Above-ground constructions in the plant world The elephant's trunk ... and a cutting-edge technical gripper arm; Remarks on the pictures of the chapter headings; Select Bibliography; Index
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Christian Foth, Oliver W.M. Rauhut, editors.
    Summary: Feathers are one of the most unique characteristics of modern birds and represent the most complex and colourful type of skin derivate within vertebrates, while also fulfilling various biological roles, including flight, thermal insulation, display, and sensory function. For years it was generally assumed that the origin of flight was the main driving force for the evolution of feathers. However, various discoveries of dinosaur species with filamentous body coverings, made over the past 20 years, have fundamentally challenged this idea and produced new evolutionary scenarios for the origin of feathers. This book is devoted to the origin and evolution of feathers, and highlights the impact of palaeontology on this research field by reviewing a number of spectacular fossil discoveries that document the increasing morphological complexity along the evolutionary path to modern birds. Also featuring chapters on fossil feather colours, feather development and its genetic control, the book offers a timely and comprehensive overview of this popular research topic.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction to the morphology, development, and ecology of feathers
    2. Molecular and cellular mechanisms of feather development provide a basis for diverse evolution of feather forms
    3. The origin of birds: current consensus, controversy, and the occurrence of feathers
    4. Integumentary structures in Kulindadromeus zabaikalicus, a basal neornithischian dinosaur from the Jurassic of Siberia
    5. Filamentous integuments in non-avialan theropods and their kin: advances and future perspectives for understanding the evolution of feathers
    6. Two of a feather: A comparison of the preserved integument in the juvenile theropod dinosaurs Sciurumimus and Juravenator from the Kimmeridgian Torleite Formation of southern Germany
    7. Feather evolution in Pennaraptora
    8. The feathers of the Jurassic Urvogel Archaeopteryx
    9. The plumage of basal birds
    10. A morphological review of the enigmatic elongated tail feathers of stem birds
    11. Review on color patterns of fossil feathers
    12. On the ancestry of feathers in Mesozoic dinosaurs.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Hubert-Jean Ceccaldi, Yves Hénocque, Teruhisa Komatsu, Patrick Prouzet, Benoit Sautour, Jiro Yoshida, editors.
    Summary: Coastal and estuarine environments at the interface of terrestrial and marine areas are among the most productive in the world. However, since the beginning of the industrial era, these ecosystems have been subjected to strong anthropogenic pressures intensified from the second half of the 20th century, when there was a marked acceleration in the warming (climate change) of the continents, particularly at high latitudes. Coastal ecosystems are highly vulnerable to alteration of their physical, chemical and biological characteristics (marine intrusion, acidification of marine environments, changes in ecosystems, evolution and artificialization of the coastline, etc.). In contact with heavily populated areas, these environments are often the receptacle of a lot of chemical and biological pollution sources that significantly diminish their resilience. In this context of accelerated evolution and degradation of these areas important for food security of many populations around the world, it is necessary to better identify the factors of pressure and understand, at different scales of observation, their effects and impacts on the biodiversity and on the socio-eco-systems, in order to determine the degree of vulnerability of these coastal ecosystems and the risks they face. A transdisciplinary and integrated approach is required to prevent risks. Within this framework, operational coastal oceanography occupies an important place but also the implementation of a true socio-eco-system approach in order to set up an environmentally friendly development. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introductory Communications
    Chapter 1. Our Future and The Oceans
    Chapter 2. General guidelines for future exchanges in marine science and technology between the two Sociétés franco-japonaises dOcéanographie
    Part II: Identification and Analysis of Environmental Stressors
    Chapter 3. The Japan Sea: a changing Pacific Asian marginal sea
    Chapter 4. Statistical analysis of surface circulation in Sagami Bay using High Frequency(HF)Radar
    Chapter 5. Statistical analysis of high frequency pCO2 data acquired with the Astan buoy (Southern Western English Channel, off Roscoff)
    Chapter 6. Spatial variation in pCO2 based on 16 years of in-situ measurements in the Seto Inland Sea, Japan
    Chapter 7. The Bay of Seine: a resilient socio-eco-system under cumulative pressures
    Chapter 8. Effect of bacterial infection on the expression of stress proteins and antioxidative enzymes in Japanese flounder
    Part III: Impacts on Socio-Eco-Systems and Biological Resources
    Chapter 9. A Review of the Effects of Global Warming and Currents Trends on Fisheries and its Impact on Important Commercial Species in Japan
    Chapter 10. Physiology of winter coral bleaching in temperate zone
    Chapter 11. Preliminary report of impacts of the 2011 earthquake and tsunami and subsequent events on macrobenthic community in a shallow brackish lagoon in Sendai Bay, Japan
    Chapter 12. Post-tsunami oyster feeding environment in Nagatsuraura Bay for three years
    Chapter 13. Seagrass-oyster farmers interaction detected by eelgrass DNA analysis in Hinase area of the Seto Inland Sea, Japan
    Chapter 14. Fisheries Biology of Blue Sharks in Sagami Bay, Japan
    Part IV: Vulnerability of Coastal Ecosystems and Risk Assessment
    Chapter 15. Temperature and salinity changes in coastal waters of Western Europe: variability, trends and extreme events
    Chapter 16. Risk Based Consenting of Offshore Renewable Energy Projects (RICORE)
    Chapter 17. Does global warming favour the occurrence of recent blue mussel mortality events in France?
    Chapter 18. Integrated ecosystem management for exploited coastal ecosystem dynamics under oligotrophication and climate changes
    Chapter 19. Forty years of decline and 10 years of management plan: are European eels (Anguilla anguilla) recovering?
    Chapter 20. The management of Mediterranean coastal habitats: a plea for a socio-ecosystem-based approach.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Elisabeth A. Murray, Steven P. Wise, Kim S. Graham.
    Summary: Current theories about human memory have been shaped by clinical observations and animal experiments. This doctrine holds that the medial temporal lobe subserves one memory system for explicit or declarative memories, while the basal ganglia subserves a separate memory system for implicit or procedural memories, including habits. Cortical areas outside the medial temporal lobe are said to function in perception, motor control, attention, or other aspects of executive function, but not in memory. The Evolution of Memory Systems' advances dramatically different ideas on all counts. It proposes that several memory systems arose during evolution and that they did so for the same general reason: to transcend problems and exploit opportunities encountered by specific ancestors at particular times and places in the distant past. Instead of classifying cortical areas in terms of mutually exclusive perception, executive, or memory functions, the authors show that all cortical areas contribute to memory and that they do so in their own ways-using specialized neural representations. The book also presents a proposal on the evolution of explicit memory. According to this idea, explicit (declarative) memory depends on interactions between a phylogenetically ancient navigation system and a representational system that evolved in humans to represent one's self and others. As a result, people embed representations of themselves into the events they experience and the facts they learn, which leads to the perception of participating in events and knowing facts.The Evolution of Memory Systems' is an important new work for students and researchers in neuroscience, psychology, and biology.

    Contents:
    Part I. Foundations of memory systems. 1. The history of memory systems ; 2. The history of the brain
    Part II. Architecture of vertebrate memory. 3. The reinforcement memory systems of early animals ; 4. The navigation memory system of early vertebrates ; 5. The biased-competition memory system of early mammals
    Part III. Primate augmentations. 6. The manual-foraging memory system of early primates ; 7. The feature memory system of anthropoids ; 8. The goal memory system of anthropoids
    Part IV. Hominin adaptations. 9. The goal and feature memory systems of hominins ; 10. The social-subjective memory system of hominins ; 11. The origin of explicit memory in hominins
    Part V. Deconstructing and reconstructing memory systems. 12. Deconstructing amnesia ; 13. Reconstructing memory's past.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Kensal E. van Holde, Jordanka Zlatanova.
    Summary: The Evolution of Molecular Biology: The Search for the Secrets of Life provides the historical knowledge behind techniques founded in molecular biology, also presenting an appreciation of how, and by whom, these discoveries were made. It deals with the evolution of intellectual concepts in the context of active research in an approachable language that accommodates readers from a variety of backgrounds. Each chapter contains a prologue and epilogue to create continuity and provide a complete framework of molecular biology. This foundational work also functions as a historical and conceptual supplement to many related courses in biochemistry, biology, chemistry, genetics and history of science. In addition, the book demonstrates how the roots of discovery and advances-and an individual's own research-have grown out of the history of the field, presenting a more complete understanding and context for scientific discovery.

    Contents:
    Beginnings
    The Origins of Biochemistry
    The Chemical Structure of Proteins
    Proteins in Three Dimensions
    The Origins of Genetics
    Nucleic Acids
    The Great Synthesis
    How DNA is Replicated
    The Central Dogma
    The Genetic Code
    Gene to Protein: The Whole Path
    Eukaryotes Pose New Problems
    Development and Differentiation
    Recombinant DNA: The Next Revolution
    Understanding Whole Genomes: Creating New Paradigms
    Whole Genomes and Evolution
    Practical Applications of Recombinant DNA Technologies
    Appendix: Nobel Prize Laureates That Have Contributed to the Development of Molecular Biology.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Wolfgang Seeger.
    Summary: The main focus of this book is on providing students, neurosurgery trainees, certified neurosurgeons and colleagues in neighbouring disciplines essential information on the evolution of the central nervous system (CNS) of craniata and homo. Therefore the book is divided in three parts: Part I is describing the evolution of CNS of craniata (starting 800 million of years ago). Part II is explaining in detail the exceptional position of the human encephalon. Part III is discussing maturity and immaturity of all parts of CNS of craniatas and the consequences concerning further development of brain structure and psychological functions. In all parts anatomical fundamentals are presented in the form of didactic and self-explanatory illustrations. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Part I: Evolution of Craniata and Homo; Part II: Exceptional Position of the Human Encephalon; Part III: Morphologic Maturity and Immaturity; Contents; Part I: Evolution of Craniata and Homo;
    1: Chronological Survey;
    2: Ontogenetic and Phylogenetic Basis; 2.1 Survey (Figs. 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, and 2.4); 2.2 Details (Figs. 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 2.10, 2.11, and 2.12);
    3: Comparative Morphology of the Adult Central Nervous System of Craniata; 3.1 Pisces (Figs. 3.1 and 3.2); 3.2 Amphibia (Fig. 3.3); 3.3 Reptilia and Aves (Both Together: Sauropsides) (Fig. 3.4) 3.4 Mammalia (Figs. 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, and 3.10)Part II: Exceptional Position of the Human Encephalon;
    4: Telencephalon, Survey;
    5: Diencephalon, Mesencephalon, Rhombencephalon, Cerebellum: Survey;
    6: Telencephalon: Details; 6.1 Definition of Telencephalic Fiber Systems and Gyri: Introduction; 6.1.1 Gyrification and U-Fibers (Figs. 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, and 6.5); 6.1.2 Association Fibers (Figs. 6.6, 6.7, and 6.8): Anatomical Fiber Dissections; 6.1.3 Projection Fibers (Figs. 6.9, 6.10, 6.11, 6.12, 6.13, 6.14, 6.15, and 6.16) 6.1.3.1 Intratelencephalic Projection System (Corpus Callosum): Survey (Figs. 6.9 and 6.10)6.1.3.2 Corpus Callosum and Extra-Intratelencephalic Systems (Corona Radiata) (Figs. 6.11, 6.12, 6.13, 6.14, 6.15, and 6.16);
    7: Diencephalon, Mesencephalon, and Rhombencephalon: Details; 7.1 Topography (Figs. 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, and 7.4); 7.2 Fiber Connections (Figs. 7.5, 7.6, and 7.7);
    8: Transectional Planes of Rhombencephalon (Medulla Oblongata, Pons) and Mesencephalon; 8.1 Topography (Figs. 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, and 8.7); 8.2 Fiber Connections (Figs. 8.8, 8.9, 8.10, and 8.11)
    9: Cranial Nerves9.1 Principles of the Embryonic Developments: Survey (Fig. 9.1); 9.2 Cranial Nerves: Details (Figs. 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 9.11, and 9.12); Part III: Morphologic Maturity and Immaturity;
    10: Recent Neocortex; 10.1 Neocortical Areas (Figs. 10.1, 10.2, and 10.3); 10.2 Paleoanthropological Aspects (Figs. 10.4 and 10.5); Bibliography; Further Readings
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    John Montgomery and David Bodznick.
    Summary: Uses an evolutionary perspective to open up the exciting body of work that is cerebellar research to a wide audience. Understanding the brain is of interest to many people, from many different backgrounds, and for many different reasons. Therefore, understanding cerebellum is a significant step towards the wider challenge of understanding the brain.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the cerebellar sense of self
    Cerebellar sense of self and sense of agency
    Cerebellum as a neuronal machine : the cerebellar 'chip'
    Self and other in sensory systems : the cerebellum-like structure in sharks
    From cerebellum-like to cerebellum : evolution by duplication?
    How does the cerebellum work? Model systems: compensating for self-movement (vestibulo-ocular reflex), predictive motor learning (eye blink reflex), voluntary goal-directed behaviour (saccades), and action and reaction
    Adaptive filter as the basis for cerebellar function and versatility
    A history of cerebellum research : science, scientists, and the competition of ideas and evidence
    Learning from the cerebellum : applications for rehabilitation, sports, and technology
    General conclusion.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Michel A. Hofman.
    Summary: "Evolution of the Human Brain: From Matter to Mind, Volume 250 in the Progress in Brain Research, series documents the latest developments and insights about the origin and evolution of the human brain and mind. Specific sections in this new release include Evolution and development of the human cerebral cortex, Functional connectivity of the human cerebral cortex, Lateralization of the human cerebral cortex, Life history strategies and the human cerebral cortex, Evolution of the modern human brain, On the nature and evolution of the human mind, Origin and evolution of human cognition, Origin and evolution of human consciousness, and more."--publisher's web page, viewed November 7, 2019.

    Contents:
    Preface / Michel A. Hofman
    Section I: Molecular and cellular mechanisms of human brain evolution. Chapter 1. Genetics of human brain evolution / Eric J. Vallender
    Chapter 2. Genetic diversity underlying behavioral plasticity in human adaptation / Amy L. Bauernfeind, Courtney C. Babbitt
    Section II: Cerebral cortex: neural organization and functional connectivity. Chapter 3. The origin and evolution of neocortex: from early mammals to modern humans / Jon H. Kaas
    Chapter 4. Allometry, evolution and development of neocortex size in mammals / Jeroen B. Smaers, Carrie S. Mongle, Kamran Safi, Dina K.N. Dechmann
    Chapter 5. Neurodevelopmental disorders of the prefrontal cortex in an evolutionary context / Branka Hrvoj-Mihic, Katerina Semendeferi
    Chapter 6. The human connectome from an evolutionary perspective / Dirk Jan Ardesch, Lianne H. Scholtens, Martijn P. van den Heuvel
    Chapter 7. Evolution of cerebral asymmetry / Michael C. Corballis
    Chapter 8. Life history changes accompany increased numbers of cortical neurons: a new framework for understanding human brain evolution / Suzana Herculano-Houzel
    Section III: Origin and evolution of the human mind. Chapter 9. Evolution of the modern human brain / Amélie Beaudet, Andrew Du, Bernard Wood
    Chapter 10. On the nature and evolution of the human mind / Michel A. Hofman
    Chapter 11. Origin and evolution of human cognition / Gerhard Roth, Ursula Dicke
    Chapter 12. Origin and evolution of human consciousness / Franco Fabbro, Damiano Cantone, Susanna Feruglio, Cristiano Crescentini
    Chapter 13. Origin and evolution of human speech: emergence from a trimodal auditory, visual and vocal network / Maëva Michon, Vladimir López, Francisco Aboitiz.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    Jennifer A. Clack, Richard R. Fay, Arthur N. Popper, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Vertebrate Diversity in a Sensory System: The Fossil Record of Otic Evolution
    Actinopterygians: The Ray-Finned Fishes, an Explosion of Diversity
    Sarcopterygians: From Lobe-Finned Fishes to the Tetrapod Stem Group
    Early Tetrapods: Experimenting with Form and Function
    Nonmammalian Synapsids: The Beginning of the Mammal Line
    Evolution of the Middle and Inner Ears of Mammaliaforms: The Approach to Mammals
    Evolution of the Ear of Mammals: From Monotremes to Humans
    Basal Reptilians, Marine Diapsids, and Turtles: The Flowering of Reptile Diversity
    The Lepidosaurian Ear: Variations on a Theme
    Archosaurs and their Kin: The Ruling Reptiles
    Amphibia: A Case of Diversity and Convergence in the Auditory Region.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Michael C. Brodsky.
    Summary: This text is a comprehensive collection and discussion of scientific essays that define the pathogenesis of common forms of pediatric strabismus and nystagmus in terms of their common evolutionary mechanisms. The goal of this book is to assemble these essays, to provide a definitive source for current clinicians to use along with follow up comments to help direct future scientific research in the field of pediatric ophthalmology. This book includes 20 original essays written by Michael C. Brodsky which mechanistically explain and unify such enigmatic conditions such as infantile esotropia, latent nystagmus, primary oblique muscle overreaction action, dissociated vertical divergence, infantile nystagmus, and intermittent exotropia in terms of ancestral evolutionary reflexes which become expressed in different ways to generate these disorders. This collection of essays is poised to become a classic reference, providing the necessary neurological framework for contextualizing unique ocular motor disorder and understanding the evolutionary mechanisms responsible for their development in early childhood. Written with focused interest for pediatric ophthalmologists and neuro-ophthalmologists, this reference will also find audience with ophthalmologists, neurologists, evolutionary biologists, and neuroscientists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: Dissociated Vertical Divergence: A Righting Reflex Gone Wrong
    Chapter 3: DVD Remains a Moving Target
    Chapter 4: Primary Inferior Oblique Overaction: The Brain Throws a Wild Pitch
    Chapter 5: Do You Really Need Your Oblique Muscles? Adaptations and Exaptations
    Chapter 6: Latent Nystagmus: Vestibular Nystagmus with a Twist
    Chapter 7: Dissociated Vertical Divergence: Perceptual Consequences of the Human Dorsal Light Reflex
    Chapter 8: Visuo-Vestibular Eye Movements: Infantile Nystagmus in Three Dimensions
    Chapter 9: Does Infantile Esotropia Arise from a Dissociated Deviation
    Chapter 10: The Lizard's Tail: An Ocular Allegory
    Chapter 11: The Accessory Optic System: The Fugitive Visual Control System in Infantile Strabismus
    Chapter 12: The Optokinetic Cover Test: Subcortical Optokinesis in Infantile Esotropia
    Chapter 13: An Expanded View of Infantile Esotropia: Bottoms Up!
    Chapter 14: A Unifying Neurologic Mechanism for Infantile Nystagmus
    Chapter 15: An Optokinetic Clue to the Pathogenesis of Infantile Esotropia
    Chapter 16: Intermittent Exotropia and Accommodative Esotropia: Two Ends of a Spectrum?
    Chapter 17: Is Infantile Esotropia Subcortical in Origin?
    Chapter 18: Phoria Adaptation: The Ghost in the Machine
    Chapter 19: Monocular Nasotemporal Asymmetry: Unravelling the Mystery
    Chapter 20: Intermittent Exotropia: A Deficit in Phoria Adaptation?.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Cara M. Wall-Scheffler, Helen K. Kurki, Benjamin M. Auerbach.
    Summary: "Lately, a number of interesting and innovative investigations have started to approach the pelvis and pelvic variation from different perspectives, including developmental, demographic and phylogenetic, as well as functional from the perspectives of tasks other than unloaded, level walking, like burden transport and a combination of arboreality and terrestriality. Additionally, as technology improves, we have begun the vast task of actually quantifying the variation of this complex three-dimensional shape and comparing across and between populations. All of these different studies - functional, morphological, developmental - offer important clues towards a better understanding of hominin evolution, sexual dimorphism, morphological modularity and development constraints. In this volume, people at the forefront of work on the pelvis will process and expand our knowledge in order to explain the evolutionary mechanisms acting on hominin pelvic morphology"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Robert Jack, Louis Du Pasquier.
    Summary: Immunology is a nodal subject that links many areas of biology. It permeates the biosciences, and also plays crucial roles in diagnosis and therapy in areas of clinical medicine ranging from the control of infectious and autoimmune diseases to tumour therapy. Monoclonal antibodies and small molecule modulators of immunity are major factors in the pharmaceutical industry and now constitute a multi billion dollar business. Students in these diverse areas are frequently daunted by the complexity of immunology and the astonishing array of unusual mechanisms that go to make it up. Starting from Dobzhanskys famous slogan, "Nothing in biology makes sense except in the light of evolution", this book will serve to illuminate how evolutionary forces shaped immunity and thus provide an explanation for how many of its counter intuitive oddities arose. By doing so it will provide a conceptual framework on which students may organise the rapidly growing flood of immunological knowledge.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: What makes evolution tick?
    Chapter 2: Immunity
    the unicellular to metazoan transition
    Chapter 3: Innate immunity
    Chapter 4: The triumph of individualism: evolution of somatically generated adaptive immune systems
    Chapter 5: The other side of the arms race
    Chapter 6: Postface.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    L. Nuno de la Rosa, G.B. Müller, editors.
    Summary: This reference work provides an comprehensive and easily accessible source of information on numerous aspects of Evolutionary Developmental Biology. The work provides an extended overview on the current state of the art of this interdisciplinary and dynamic scientific field. The work is organized in thematic sections, referring to the specific requirements and interests in each section in far detail. Evolutionary Developmental Biology A Reference Guide is intended to provide a resource of knowledge for researchers engaged in evolutionary biology, developmental biology, theoretical biology, philosophy of sciences and history of biology.

    Contents:
    Key Concepts in evo-Devo/Theoretical Issues in evo-Devo
    Philosophy of evo-Devo
    History of evo-Devo
    Extensions of evo-Devo
    Evolution of Development
    Developmental Mechanisms of Evolution
    Populational Mechanisms of Developmental Evolution
    Methods in evo-Devo Biology
    Macroevolutionary Patterns
    Evo-Devo by Phenotype: evo-Devo of Organs and Body Parts
    Evo-Devo by Phenotype: evo-Devo of Tissues and Cell Types
    Plant evo-Devo
    Animal evo-Devo
    Vertebrate evo-Devo
    Invertebrate evo-Devo.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jeremy J. Burdon, Anna-Liisa Laine.
    Summary: This volume sits at the cross-roads of a number of areas of scientific interest that, in the past, have largely kept themselves separate - agriculture, forestry, population genetics, ecology, conservation biology, genomics and the protection of plant genetic resources. Yet these areas also have a lot of common interests and increasingly these independent lines of inquiry are tending to coalesce into a more comprehensive view of the complexity of plant-pathogen associations and their ecological and evolutionary dynamics. This interdisciplinary source provides a comprehensive overview of this changing situation by identifying the role of pathogens in shaping plant populations, species and communities, tackling the issue of the increasing importance of invasive and newly emerging diseases and giving broader recognition to the fundamental importance of the influence of space and time (as manifest in the metapopulation concept) in driving epidemiological and co-evolutionary trajectories.

    Contents:
    The diverse and ubiquitous nature of pathogens
    Environment as a determinant of pathogen incidence, abundance and evolution
    Genetics of host plant resistance and pathogen infectivity and aggressiveness
    Sources and patterns of variation in plant pathogens
    Demographic and genetic processes in host and pathogen populations
    Coevolutionary dynamics in a metapopulation context
    Coevolutionary and host and pathogen life-histories
    Effect of pathogens on plant community dynamics
    Future developments.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Alexandra Alvergne, Crispin Jenkinson, Charlotte Faurie, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter 1: Applying evolutionary thinking in medicine: an introduction
    Chapter 2: "Foetal-maternal conflicts" and adverse outcomes in human pregnancies
    Chapter 3: Obstructed labour: the classic obstetric dilemma and beyond
    Chapter 4: Bottle feeding: the impact on postpartum depression, birth spacing and autism
    Chapter 5: Sudden Infant Death Syndrome
    Chapter 6: The Developmental Origins of Health and Disease: adaptation reconsidered
    Chapter 7: Is calculus relevant to survival? Managing the evolutionary novelty of modern education
    Chapter 8: Binge eating, Disinhibition and obesity
    Chapter 9: Evolutionary aspects of the dietary omega-6/omega-3 fatty acid ratio: medical implications
    Chapter 10: Evolutionary paradigms in cardiology: the case of chronic heart failure
    Chapter 11: Evolutionary imprints on cardiovascular physiology and pathophysiology
    Chapter 12: Darwinian Strategies to Avoid the Evolution of Drug Resistance During Cancer Treatment
    Chapter 13: Why chemotherapy does not work: cancer genome evolution and the illusion of oncogene addiction
    Chapter 14: Evolution, Infection, and Cancer
    Chapter 15: Microbes, Parasites and Immune diseases
    Chapter 16: Evolutionary principles and Host Defense
    Chapter 17: Helminth immunoregulation and Multiple Sclerosis treatment
    Chapter 18: Inflammaging and its role in ageing and age-related diseases
    Chapter 19: Dementias of the Alzheimer type: views through the lens of evolutionary biology suggest amyloid-driven brain aging is balanced against host defence
    Chapter 20: The Evolutionary Etiologies of Autism Spectrum and Psychotic-Affective Spectrum Disorders
    Chapter 21: Why are humans vulnerable to Alzheimer's Disease?
    Chapter 22: Evolutionary approaches to depression: prospects and limitations
    Chapter 23: The ups and downs of placebos. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Hitoshi Yoshiji, Kosuke Kaji.
    Summary: This book comprehensively covers the latest developments in the diagnosis and treatment of liver cirrhosis, including molecular mechanisms and therapeutic strategies. It elaborates on and explores the relation between chronic liver disease (CLD) and its causes, including viral hepatitis, steatohepatitis, autoimmune liver diseases and/or inherited liver diseases, and sustained liver injury. Furthermore, it discusses various complications such as hepatic encephalopathy, ascites, sarcopenia, esophagogastric varices, muscle cramps and pruritus, and the fact that it frequently leads to the development of hepatocellular carcinoma. CLD is becoming a growing issue with substantial effects on public health, and Evolving Landscape in Management of Liver Cirrhosis provides scholars in gastroenterology and hepatology with invaluable insights. At the same time, it is a valuable resource for clinicians specializing in gastroenterology and hepatology as well as for researchers who are curious about new research on liver disease.

    Contents:
    Liver cirrhosis with steatohepatitis-ASH and NASH
    Liver cirrhosis with autoimmune liver diseases-AIH and PBC
    Diagnostic imaging in liver cirrhosis
    Liver cirrhosis with inherited liver diseases-hemochromatosis
    Liver cirrhosis with inherited liver diseases-Wilson disease
    Nutrition in liver cirrhosis
    Microbiome in liver cirrhosis
    Hepatic encephalopathy in liver cirrhosis
    Hepatic ascites in liver cirrhosis
    Sarcopenia in liver cirrhosis
    Esophagogastric varices in liver cirrhosis
    Muscle cramps in liver cirrhosis
    Management of pruritus in liver cirrhosis
    Prevention of hepatocarcinogenesis in liver cirrhosis
    Antifibrotic therapy for liver cirrhosis
    Liver transplantation for liver cirrhosis
    Regenerative therapy for liver cirrhosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Amir R. Aref, David Barbie, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to Ex Vivo Cancer Models
    2. Patient-derived Xenografts in Oncology
    3.Organoid Culture: Applications in Development and Cancer
    4. Microfluidics and future of cancer diagnostics
    5. Advancing techniques and insights in circulating tumor cell (CTC) research
    6. The Cancer Secretome
    7. An overview of the tumor microenvironments and future of cancer therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Summary: Examination preparation and subject review for USMLE Step 1 (9000+ questions), USMLE Step 2 (5000+ questions), USMLE Step 3 (3000+ questions), and PANCE (1200+ questions) among others. Certification Review aids cover Family Practice, General Pediatrics, General Surgery, Internal Medicine, Obstetrics and Gynecology, and SPEX. Students can create self-study exams in a variety of subjects.
    Digital Access Database
    Users must register with their Stanford.edu email at https://stanford.myexammaster.com and login via this link. Access is not IP restricted.
  • Digital
    Stephen Russell.
    Summary: "This book teaches the reader how to properly examine a patient with a suspected focal neuropathy. This instruction includes the pertinent anatomy of each peripheral nerve, clear photographs illustrating the muscular examination, and also discussion on how to approach localization and diagnosis. Because a strong foundation in anatomical relationships is paramount for examining patients with nerve injury, this is stressed in the text and by using numerous illustrations." --Excerpt from notes provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Median Nerve
    2. Ulnar Nerve
    3. Radial Nerve
    4. Brachial Plexus Anatomy
    5. Clinical Evaluation of the Brachial Plexus
    6. Sciatic Nerve
    7. Inguinal Complex of Nerves
    8. Lumbosacral Plexus.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Digital
    Martin Caon.
    Summary: This second edition provides 2400 multiple choice questions on human anatomy and physiology, and some physical science, separated into 40 categories. The answer to each question is accompanied by an explanation. Each category has an introduction to set the scene for the questions to come. However, not all possible information is provided within these Introductions, so an Anatomy and Physiology textbook is an indispensable aid to understanding the answers. The questions have been used in end-of-semester examinations for undergraduate anatomy and physiology courses and as such reflect the focus of these particular courses and are pitched at this level to challenge students that are beginning their training in anatomy and physiology. The question and answer combinations are intended for use by teachers, to select questions for their next examinations, and by students, when studying for an upcoming test. Students enrolled in the courses for which these questions were written include nursing, midwifery, paramedic, physiotherapy, occupational therapy, nutrition and dietetics, health sciences, exercise science, and students taking an anatomy and physiology course as an elective.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface to the Second Edition; Advice to the Exam Candidate; Some Thoughts on Writing Good MCQs and on Answering Poorly Prepared MCQ Quizzes; Ten Pieces of Advice for Writing Good Multiple Choice Questions; Five Ways to Score More Highly on a Poorly Prepared Multiple Choice Question Test; Some Thoughts on the Marking of MCQ Tests (Where There Are 4 Choices of Answer, One of Which Is the Best Correct); Bibliography; Contents;
    Chapter 1: Organisation of the Body;
    Chapter 2: Cells and Tissues; 2.1 Cells and Tissues; 2.2 Cell Cycle (Mitosis and Protein Synthesis). 12.5 Pressure Applied to the Cardiovascular System12.6 Blood Pressure and Its Control;
    Chapter 13: Respiratory System; 13.1 Anatomy and Physiology; 13.2 Pressure Applied to the Respiratory System;
    Chapter 14: Nervous System; 14.1 Cells and Action Potential; 14.2 Brain and Spinal Cord Anatomy; 14.3 Autonomic Nervous System, Neurotransmitters, and Reflexes; 14.4 Special Senses (Eye and Ear); 14.4.1 Eye; 14.4.2 Ear;
    Chapter 15: Reproductive System;
    Chapter 16: Waves, Light Waves, Sound Waves and Ultrasound (The Physics of); 16.1 Waves; 16.2 Light Waves; 16.3 Sound; 16.4 Ultrasound.
    Chapter 17: Ionising Radiation17.1 Medical Imaging with X-Radiation; 17.2 Radioactivity, Radiotherapy, Nuclear Medicine and Radiation Safety;
    Chapter 18: Electricity;
    Chapter 19: Biomechanics;
    Chapter 20: Body Temperature, Energy and Heat Loss;
    Chapter 21: Essay Topics for a Written Assignment Assessment in Anatomy and Physiology.
    Chapter 3: Measurement, Errors, Data and Unit Conversion
    Chapter 4: Chemistry for Physiology; 4.1 Atoms and Molecules; 4.2 Solutions; 4.3 Diffusion and Osmosis; 4.4 Tonicity, Moles and Osmoles; 4.5 Acids, Bases and Buffers; 4.6 Organic Chemistry and Macromolecules;
    Chapter 5: Integument;
    Chapter 6: Homeostasis;
    Chapter 7: Skeleton and Joints;
    Chapter 8: Muscles;
    Chapter 9: Gastrointestinal System;
    Chapter 10: Endocrine System;
    Chapter 11: Renal System;
    Chapter 12: Cardiovascular System; 12.1 Blood; 12.2 Heart; 12.3 Blood Vessels; 12.4 Pressure: The Physics of Pressure.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Michael F. Klaassen, Earle Brown.
    Summary: This book serves as a guide for senior trainees preparing for their final professional exams at the end of at least 4 - 5 years of advanced training in an approved plastic and reconstructive surgery training programme. These exams are extremely challenging and difficult to pass, and a knowledge of plastic surgery alone is not enough. Judgement, discipline and the ability to handle the pressure of the exam interactions are key. The book dissects each segment of the exam and presents the common clinical, anatomical and pathological cases that candidates are likely to encounter.

    Contents:
    The psychology of exam performance
    Caught in the spotlight
    Knowledge is power, experinece is key
    General principles
    The art of writing exam answers
    Long clinical cases
    Shrot clinical cases
    Scenarios : surgical pathology + operative surgery
    Applied anatomy
    Anaesthesia for plastic surgeons
    Aesthetic surgery principles
    Science principels for plastic surgery
    The successful candidate
    The failed candidate
    For your support team/family/friends
    Summary and general advice.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Eelco F.M. Wijdicks.
    Summary: This indispensable title rethinks the neurologic examination in a format tailored, modified, and specialized for neurocritical illness. Generously illustrated, this book provides a detailed clinical assessment of the acutely ill neurologic patient. It explains why certain neurologic signs appear and provides fundamentals of localization. Certain situations demand certain structured examinations. Eventually, all information has to be integrated logically. Different examination techniques may be needed. Recognition of deterioration and increased vigilance with important mimickers and confounders are part of our professional fabric. Other necessary skills include predicting a clinical course and outcome, coordinating effective transfers of unstable patients, and communicating expected clinical changes. Neurologists traditionally have carefully considered the examination findings before acting and localized findings before ordering tests; these heuristics must remain. An indispensable title designed for all learners, Examining Neurocritical Patients preserves the beauty of a comprehensive clinical neurologic examination and serves as a high-yield master class for every health care professional tasked with clinical assessment of a neurocritically ill patient. .

    Contents:
    CHAPTER 1: Taking a History
    CHAPTER 2: Scales and Scores
    CHAPTER 3: Patterns: Interpreting Localizing Findings
    CHAPTER 4: Excess or Paucity: Making Sense of Movements
    CHAPTER 5: Mimickers, Misleads and Confounders
    CHAPTER 6: Detecting Worsening
    CHAPTER 7: Unraveling Unconsciousness
    CHAPTER 8: Declaring Brain Death
    CHAPTER 9: Recognizing Acute Spinal Cord Injury
    CHAPTER 10: Sorting through Acute Neuromuscular Disease
    Chapter 11: Clinical Course and Anticipated Outcome
    CHAPTER 12: Communicating Clinical Findings.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    volume editor, Tetsuo Himi, Kenichi Takano.
    Contents:
    Clinical review of cochlear implantation performed at Sapporo Medical University Hospital / Ogasawara, N., Takano, K., Shintani, T., Saikawa, E., Takahashi, N., Ito, F., Himi, T.
    Cochlear implantation in children with cochlear malformation / Saikawa, E., Takano, K., Ogasawara, N., Tsubomatsu, C., Takahashi, N., Shirasaki, H., Himi, T.
    Congenital microtia treated at Sapporo Medical University Hospital : clinical characteristics and associated anomalies / Ogasawara, N., Jitsukawa, S., Takahashi, N., Takano, K., Himi, T.
    Influence of age on caloric response / Jitsukawa, S., Takano, K., Ito, F., Tsubomatsu, C., Himi, T.
    Pneumolabyrinth with labyrinthitis as the suspected cause / Nomura, K., Takano, K., Yamamoto, K., Abe, A., Takahashi, N., Okuni, T., Himi, T.
    Behavior of primary cilia and tricellular tight junction proteins during differentiation in temperature-sensitive mouse cochlear precursor hair cells / Kakuki, T., Kaneko, Y., Takano, K., Ninomiya, T., Kohno, T., Kojima, T., Himi, T.
    Relationship between otitis media and epithelial function in the lymphoepithelium of pediatric adenoids / Ogasawara, N., Yamamoto, K., Takano, K., Himi, T.
    Role of cysteinyl leukotrienes in allergic rhinitis / Shirasaki, H., Himi, T.
    Radiological assessment of the anatomy of frontal recess cells and the Anterior ethmoidal artery / Okuni, T., Takano, K., Nomura, K., Yamashita, K., Abe, A., Ito, F., Murayama, K., Shirasaki, H., Himi, T.
    Nasal mucosal expression of the receptors for inflammatory chemical mediators / Shirasaki, H., Kanaizumi, E., Seki, N., Kikuchi, M., Himi, T.
    Adenovirus-mediated ICOSIg gene therapy in a presensitized murine model of allergic rhinitis / Sato, J., Konno, N., Murakami, M., Uede, T., Himi, T.
    A Novel drug delivery system for the human nasal epithelium / Takano, K., Kojima, T., Keira, T., Miyata, R., Nomura, K., Kakuki, T., Kaneko, Y., Yajima, R., Kakiuchi, A., Himi, T.
    Role of crosstalk between epithelial and Immune cells, the epimmunome, in allergic rhinitis pathogenesis / Kamekura, R., Yamashita, K., Jitsukawa, S., Nagaya, T., Ito, F., Ichimiya, S., Himi, T.
    A clinical study of maxillary sinus squamous cell carcinoma / Kondo, A., Kurose, M., Obata, K., Yamamoto, K., Murayama, K., Shirasaki, H., Himi, T.
    A clinical review of thyroid cancer at Sapporo Medical University Hospital / Koizumi, J., Takano, K., Obata, K., Yamamoto, K., Murayama, K., Himi, T.
    Junctional Adhesion Molecule-A in Head and Neck Squamous Cell Carcinoma / Kurose, M., Kakuki, T., Takano, K., Kondo, A., Obata, K., Nomura, K., Miyata, R., Kaneko, Y., Konno, T., Kohno, T., Kojima, T., Himi, T.
    Expression of inflammasome-associated proteins in human oropharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma / Takano, K., Kondo, A., Kurose, M., Yamashita, K., Nomura, K., Obata, K., Murayama, K., Ito, F., Himi, T.
    Diagnosis and treatment of obstructive sleep apnea syndrome in children / Tsubomatsu, C., Abe, A., Yajima, R., Takahashi, N., Ito, F., Takano, K., Himi, T.
    Expression and localization of human defensins in palatine tonsils / Kamekura, R., Imai, R., Takano, K., Yamashita, K., Jitsukawa, S., Nagaya, T., Ito, F., Hirao, M., Tsubota, H., Himi, T.
    Studies of tonsils in basic and clinical perspectives : from the past to the future / Yamashita, K., Ichimiya, S., Kamekura, R., Nagaya, T., Jitsukawa, S., Matsumiya, H., Takano, K., Himi, T.
    A case study of anisakiasis in the palatine tonsils / Takano, K., Okuni, T., Murayama, K., Himi, T.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    Clifford D. Packer.
    Summary: Working in the outpatient clinic is a key training experience for medical students. When they arrive at the clinic, students may discover that their time on the inpatient wards does not necessarily prepare them to perform well in the outpatient setting. Everything is different in the clinic, from the nature and context of the patient encounter to the student’s role in note-writing, oral case presentation, and case discussion with the attending physician. The purpose of this book is to guide students as they transition to the world of 15-minute appointments, telemedicine, cyberchondriasis, motivational interviewing, shared medical appointments, and real-time informatics. The aim is to give students a clear understanding of their role in a variety of clinic settings, to evaluate and present their patients well, maximize learning, and provide excellent care for their patients. Excelling in the Clinic explains the process of becoming an effective, efficient, and scholarly worker in the primary care clinic.

    Contents:
    The Importance of Primary Care
    Medical Education in the Outpatient Clinic: Benefits and Barriers
    Clinic Settings, Schedules, and Structures
    COVID-19 and the Rapid Rise of Telemedicine
    Preparing to See the Patient
    The Patient-Centered Interview
    The Physical Exam
    The Concise Oral Case Presentation
    Discussing the Case
    Writing a Clinic Note
    Service-Learning Clinics
    Careers in Primary Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    [Jerome Hellmuth, editor].
    Contents:

    v. 1. The Normal infant.--
    v. 2. Studies in abnormalities.--
    v. 3. Assessment & intervention.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    P501 .H46
    3
  • Digital
    edited by Elkhonon Goldberg.
    Summary: Executive Functions in Health and Disease provides a comprehensive review of both healthy and disordered executive function. It discusses what executive functions are, what parts of the brain are involved, what happens when they go awry in cases of dementia, ADHD, psychiatric disorders, traumatic injury, developmental disorders, cutting edge methods for studying executive functions and therapies for treating executive function disorders. It will appeal to neuropsychologists, clinical psychologists, neuroscientists and researchers in cognitive psychology.

    Contents:
    Part I. Executive functions in health
    Prefrontal executive functions predict and preadapt
    The cellular mechanisms of executive functions and working memory: relevance to mental disorders
    Gene expression in the frontal lobe
    A functional network perspective on the role of the frontal lobes in executive cognition
    Neural network models of human executive function and decision making
    Crucial role of the prefrontal cortex in conscious perception
    Neurodevelopment of the executive functions
    Executive functions and neurocognitive aging
    Assessment of executive functions in research
    Part II. Executive functions in disease
    Cognitive, emotional, and behavioral inflexibility and perseveration in neuropsychiatric illness
    Functional neuroimaging of deficits in cognitive control
    Executive function in striatal disorders
    Neurodevelopmental disorders and the frontal lobes
    Executive control and emerging behavior in youth with Tourette's syndrome
    Inside the triple-decker: Tourette's syndrome and cerebral hemispheres
    Executive dysfunction in addiction
    Seizures of the frontal lobes: clinical presentations and diagnostic considerations
    Executive functions after traumatic brain injury: from deficit to recovery
    Dementias and the frontal lobes
    Executive function in posttraumatic stress disorder
    Executive dysfunction in medical conditions
    Assessment of executive functions in clinical settings.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Ning Chen, editor.
    Summary: This book establishes a bridge between exercise-mediated functional status of autophagy and non-communicable chronic diseases for elucidating and clarifying the corresponding signal pathways and underlying mechanisms. The book consists of 13 chapters focusing on the in-depth discussion on signal pathways for regulating the functional status of autophagy for the prevention, treatment and rehabilitation of chronic diseases, the optimization of exercise intervention strategies for common and frequently-occurring chronic diseases, and the development of exercise mimetic pills for the persons with disability for exercise performance, or the persons without willing to exercise. This book is interesting and will be useful to a wide readership in the various fields of exercise science, exercise fitness, sports medicine, preventive medicine, and functional foods.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Molecular processes and regulation of autophagy
    Chapter 2. Acute and chronic exercise on autophagy
    Chapter 3. The beneficial roles of exercise-mediated autophagy in T2DM
    Chapter 4. Exercise-induced autophagy and obesity
    5. Exercise-mediated autophagy and non-alcoholic fatty liver disease
    Chapter 6. Exercise-mediated autophagy and brain aging
    Chapter 7. Exercise-mediated autophagy and Alzheimers disease
    Chapter 8. Exercise-induced autophagy and Parkinsons disease
    Chapter 9.Exercise-mediated autophagy in cardiovascular diseases
    Chapter 10. Exercise-induced autophagy in the prevention and treatment of sarcopenia
    Chapter 11. Prospective advances in exercise-induced autophagy on health
    Chapter 12. Exercise mimetic pills for chronic diseases based on autophagy
    Chapter 13. Exercise-mediated functional status of autophagy is beneficial to health.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Paolo Palatini, Enrico Agabiti-Rosei, Giuseppe Mancia, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the current knowledge on the mechanisms by which exercise lowers blood pressure in hypertension and on its effects on the heart and arteries. In addition, it focuses on the optimal exercise protocols, the international consensus on clinical implementation, and the clinical indications for special populations (obese, diabetic etc). It also addresses possible drawbacks of exercise on left ventricular structure and function. Many experts in epidemiology, patophysiology and clinical research have contributed in preparing the chapters, with the main purpose of guiding clinicians in the optimal application of the present knowledge and to stimulate scientists to fill the gaps in knowledge by performing further research. The book is addressed not only to specialists in Hypertension, Internal Medicine, Cardiology, Metabolism, and Nephrology, but also to general practitioners and all healthcare professionals working in the field of rehabilitation medicine.

    Contents:
    Haemodynamics of Exercise Testing and Sports Activities
    Effect of Physical Activity on Blood Pressure and Prevention of Hypertension
    Effect of Regular Exercise on Autonomic Nervous System Activity
    Endothelial Function and Physical Exercise: A Key to Cardiovascular Protection?
    Exercise and Microcirculation in Hypertension
    Effect of Regular Physical Activity on Arterial Distensibility
    Physiological Versus Pathological Left Ventricular Hypertrophy in the Hypertensive Athlete
    Atrial Fibrillation and Sports: Still a Challenging Problem
    Metabolic Syndrome: Effect of Physical Activity on Arterial Elasticity.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Diana Vaamonde, Stefan S du Plessis, Ashok Agarwal, editors.
    Contents:
    Overview of the male reproductive system.- Overview of the female reproductive system.- Overview of Fertilization, Gestation and Parturition.- Conceptual and terminological foundations for the sciences of physical exercise: new perspectives.- Sports Physiology and Endocrinology (Endurance vs. Resistance Exercise).- General adaptations to exercise. Acute vs. chronic and strength vs. endurance training.- Impact of physical activity and exercise on male reproductive potential. Semen alterations.- Hormonal changes associated with physical activity and exercise training.- Common male reproductive tract pathologies associated with physical activity, exercise and sport.- Consequences of the Use of Anabolic Androgenic Steroids In Male Athletes' Fertility.- Impact of physical activity and exercise on female reproductive potential.- Hormonal and Reproductive Changes Associated with Physical Activity and Exercise.- Risk Biotypes and the Female Athlete Triad.- Consequences Of The Use Of Anabolic Androgenic Steroids On Female Athletes' Fertility.- Impact of intense physical activity on puberty and reproductive potential of young athletes.- Physical activity and pregnancy.- Impact of combined oral contraceptive use on exercise and health in female athletes.- Oxidative Stress and Infertility: a Possible Link to Exer cise.- Nutritional Deficiencies and Impairment of Fertility in Athletes
    Recommendations and therapeutic guidelines for exercise-related reproductive disorders
    Exercise strategies as therapeutic treatment for fertility disorders (obesity, PCOS, etc).
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Rita Santos-Rocha, editors.
    Summary: This is the second edition of a well-received, practice oriented, multidisciplinary book filling the gap between evidence-based knowledge on the benefits of physical activity and exercise during pregnancy and postpartum and the implementation of exercise programs and related health promotion measures in pregnant women. Readers will find up-to-date evidence on the psychological, social, physiological, body composition, musculoskeletal, and biomechanical changes that occur during pregnancy and their implications for physical activity and exercise. Further, the authors equip the reader with the latest guidelines and detailed description of exercise testing, prescription, selection and adaptation for pregnant and postpartum women, including those with clinical conditions. This new edition has been thoroughly updated, and includes additional chapters focused on the pedagogical intervention in pre and postnatal exercise programs, exercise prescription and adaptation during postpartum and diet recommendations for the pregnant exerciser and athlete. Written by recognized experts in the field, the book aims to allay undue fears regarding the consequences of exercising during pregnancy. Moreover, it provides medical, sports, and fitness professionals both with the knowledge and the practical expertise needed to offer an optimal guidance on exercising to pregnant exercisers and athletes. .

    Contents:
    1. Physical Activity, Exercise and Health Promotion for the Pregnant Exerciser
    2. Psychological, Social and Behavioural Changes during Pregnancy. Implications for Physical Activity and Exercise
    3. Physiological Changes during Pregnancy. Main Adaptations and Discomforts and Implications for Physical Activity and Exercise
    4. Body Composition Changes during Pregnancy and Effects of Physical Exercise
    5. Biomechanical Adaptations of Gait in Pregnancy. Implications for Physical Activity and Exercise
    6. Specific Musculoskeletal Adaptations in Pregnancy: pelvic floor, abdominal muscles, pelvic girdle, and lower back. Implications for physical activity and exercise
    7. Evidence-Based and Practice-Oriented Guidelines for Exercising during Pregnancy
    8. Exercise Testing and Prescription in pregnancy
    9. Exercise Selection and Adaptations during Pregnancy
    10. Exercise prescription and adaptations in early postpartum. 11.Strengthening competences of future healthcare professionals to promote physical activity during pregnancy and post-partum
    12. Therapeutic Exercise regarding Musculoskeletal Health of the Pregnant Exerciser and Athlete
    13. Nutritional and energy Requirements for the Pregnant Exerciser and Athlete
    14. Diet Recommendations for the Pregnant Exerciser and Athlete
    (new chapters, not included in the first edition, are highlighted in bold).
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Joost Dekker, editor.
    Summary: Osteoarthritis (OA) is among the top 10 of most disabling diseases in the Western world. It is the major cause of pain and disability among the elderly. This book provides a contextual review of recent research on neuromuscular factors and behavioral risk factors for functional decline in OA, with a special emphasis on explanatory mechanisms. In addition, the book discusses innovative approaches to exercise and physical activity in OA, derived from research on behavioral and neuromuscular risk factors for functional decline in OA. Recent research has shown that neuromuscular factors (such as muscle strength, joint laxity) and behavioral factors (such as avoidance of activity, depressed mood) predict pain and disability in OA. Furthermore, exercise and physical activity are among the dominant interventions aiming at reducing pain and disability, and innovative interventions targeting neuromuscular and behavioral interventions have been recently developed. This research has been published as separate papers, with the result that the field is in need of an integrative contextual review that puts the research into theoretical perspective.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    Part I. Osteoarthritis of the knee or hip
    2. Epidemiology, pathogenesis, and clinical aspects
    3. Therapeutic options
    Part II. Functional decline
    4. Risk factors for functional decline
    5. Neuromuscular mechanisms explaining functional decline
    6. Behavioral mechanisms explaining functional decline
    Part III. Exercise therapy
    7.Regular exercise therapy
    8. Exercise aiming at neuromuscular mechanisms
    9. Exercise aiming at behavioral mechanisms
    10. Comorbidity, overweight, and exercise
    11. Concluding remarks.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rita Santos-Rocha, editor.
    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents;
    1: Physical Activity, Exercise, and Health Promotion for the Pregnant Exerciser and the Pregnant Athlete; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Education for Health and Lifestyle During Pregnancy; 1.2.1 Pregnancy as an Opportunity to Promote Health; 1.2.2 Preparing for Childbirth and Parenting; 1.2.3 Health and Lifestyle Promotion; 1.3 Public Health and Physical Activity During Pregnancy; 1.3.1 Impact of Maternal Physical Activity on Chronic Disease Risk; 1.3.2 Impact of Maternal Physical Activity on Offspring Health 1.4 Correlates of Physical Activity Among Pregnant Women1.4.1 Identifying Physically Active Pregnant Women; 1.4.2 Identifying Physically Inactive Women; 1.5 Physical Activity Patterns Among Pregnant Women; 1.6 Further Research; References;
    2: Psychological, Social and Behaviour Changes During Pregnancy: Implications for Physical Activity and Exercise; 2.1 Psychological and Social Changes During Pregnancy; 2.1.1 Identity; 2.1.2 Loss of Control; 2.1.3 Cognitive Function; 2.1.4 Behaviour Changes 2.2 The Influence of Physical Activity and Exercise on Psychological Well-Being During Pregnancy2.2.1 Depressive Symptoms; 2.2.2 Anxiety Symptoms; 2.2.3 Sleep; 2.2.4 Summary; 2.3 Psychosocial Barriers and Facilitators to Being Active During Pregnancy; 2.3.1 Individual Factors; 2.3.2 Physical Symptoms; 2.3.2.1 Fatigue; 2.3.2.2 Nausea; 2.3.2.3 Discomfort, Physical Limitations and High-Risk Pregnancies; 2.3.2.4 Lack of Time; 2.3.2.5 Motivation; 2.3.2.6 Beliefs; 2.3.3 Social Factors; 2.3.3.1 Social Norms; 2.3.3.2 Healthcare Professional Advice; 2.3.3.3 Social Support 2.3.4 Physical Environmental Factors2.3.4.1 Transport; 2.3.4.2 Access to Facilities; 2.3.5 Summary; 2.4 Behaviour Change Strategies; 2.4.1 Systematic Reviews; 2.4.2 Walking Interventions; 2.4.3 Supervised Individual or Group Exercise; 2.4.4 Information and Behavioural Counselling; 2.4.5 Combined Interventions; 2.4.6 Summary; 2.5 Using Theory to Support Physical Activity in Pregnancy; 2.5.1 The COM-B Model; 2.6 Conclusion; References;
    3: Physiological Changes During Pregnancy: Main Adaptations, Discomforts, and Implications for Physical Activity and Exercise; 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Cardiovascular Changes3.2.1 Implications of Exercise During Pregnancy on the Maternal Heart; 3.2.2 Maternal Cardiovascular Response to Exercise; 3.2.3 Maternal Cardiovascular Adaptations to Exercise; 3.3 Hematological Changes; 3.4 Respiratory Changes; 3.5 Metabolic Changes; 3.6 Locomotor Changes; References;
    4: Body Composition Changes During Pregnancy and Effects of Physical Exercise; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Body Composition Overview; 4.2.1 Body Composition Levels; 4.2.2 Fat and Adipose Tissue; 4.2.3 Fat Depots and Adipose Tissue Location
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Annalisa Cogo, Matteo Bonini, Paolo Onorati, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an innovative and comprehensive overview of the relationship between lung and exercise, both in healthy, active subjects and in subjects with chronic respiratory diseases. It investigates in detail the central role of the lungs during exercise and illustrates the impact of respiratory impairment due to both acute and chronic lung diseases on performance. Further, the book presents the latest evidence-based findings, which confirm that exercise is an effective and safe form of prevention and rehabilitation in respiratory diseases. The first section describes the changes in the respiratory system during exercise and the contribution of respiration to exercise, while readers will learn how to perform a respiratory assessment in the second section. The third section addresses a broad range of chronic respiratory diseases and the (in)ability of those affected to play sports and perform exercise, thus providing a basis for individual assessments. The last two sections focus on respiratory training, rehabilitation and the relationship between respiration and the environment, e.g. in high-altitude and underwater sports. The book will appeal to a wide readership, including pulmonologists, sport medicine physicians, physiotherapists and trainers, as well as instructors and students in exercise science.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Brendon Stubbs, Simon Rosenbaum.
    Summary: Exercise-Based Interventions for People with Mental Illness: A Clinical Guide to Physical Activity as Part of Treatment provides clinicians with detailed, practical strategies for developing, implementing and evaluating physical activity-based interventions for people with mental illness. The book covers exercise strategies specifically tailored for common mental illnesses, such as depression, schizophrenia, bipolar disorder, and more. Each chapter presents an overview of the basic psychopathology of each illness, a justification and rationale for using a physical activity intervention, an overview of the evidence base, and clear and concise instructions on practical implementation. In addition, the book covers the use of mobile technology to increase physical activity in people with mental illness, discusses exercise programming for inpatients, and presents behavioral and psychological approaches to maximize exercise interventions. Final sections provide practical strategies to both implement and evaluate physical activity interventions.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Gail M. Sullivan, Alice K. Pomidor.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Kathryn H, Schmitz, editor.
    Summary: This groundbreaking book presents a unique and practical approach to the evolving field of exercise oncology - the study of physical activity in the context of cancer prevention and control. Presenting the current state of the art, the book is sensibly divided into four thematic sections. Following an opening chapter presenting an overview and timeline of exercise oncology, the chapters comprising part I discuss primary cancer prevention, physical activity and survivorship, and the mechanisms by which these operate. Diagnosis and treatment considerations are discussed in part II, including prehabilitation, exercise during surgical recovery, infusion and radiation therapies, and treatment efficacy. Post-treatment and end-of-life care are covered in part III, including cardio-oncology, energetics and palliative care. Part IV presents behavioral, logistical and policy-making considerations, highlighting a multidisciplinary approach to exercise oncology as well as practical matters such as reimbursement and economics. Written and edited by experts in the field, Exercise Oncology will be a go-to practical resource for sports medicine clinicians, family and primary care physicians, oncologists, physical therapy and rehabilitation specialists, and all medical professionals who treat cancer patients.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Exercise Oncology: Past and Present
    Part 1
    Physical Activity and Cancer Prevention
    Chapter 2. Primary Prevention
    Chapter 3. Physical Activity and Cancer Survival
    Chapter 4. Mechanisms of Exercise in Cancer Prevention, Treatment and Survivorship
    Part 2
    From Diagnosis through Treatment
    Chapter 5. Exercise Oncology from Diagnosis through Treatment: An Overview of Outcomes and Considerations
    Chapter 6. Prehabilitation: An Emerging Standard in Exercise Oncology
    Chapter 7. Exercise during Surgical Recovery
    Chapter 8. Exercise during Infusion Therapy
    Chapter 9. Exercise During Radiation Therapy
    Chapter 10. Effects of Exercise on Cancer Treatment Completion and Efficacy
    Part 3
    Post-treatment to End of Life
    Chapter 11. Exercise Oncology from Post-Treatment to End of Life: An Overview of Outcomes and Considerations
    Chapter 12. Exercise during Immediate Post-treatment
    Chapter 13. Long-term and Late Effects of Cancer Treatments on Prescribing Physical Activity
    Chapter 14. Exercise and Cardio-Oncology
    Chapter 15. Energetics and Cancer Outcomes
    Chapter 16. Exercise for Advanced Cancers, Metastatic Disease and Palliative Care
    Part 4
    Behavior, logistics, and policy
    Chapter 17. Cancer Survivors Becoming and Staying Physically Active: Challenges of Behavior Change
    Chapter 18. Making Exercise Standard in Cancer Care
    Chapter 19. Viewing Exercise Oncology through the Lens of Multidisciplinarity
    Chapter 20. Policy and Reimbursement Considerations for Exercise Programming in Cancer
    Chapter 21. Shaping the Future of Exercise Oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Scott K. Powers, University of Florida, Edward T. Howley, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, John Quindry, University of Montana.
    Summary: "The eleventh edition of this book has undergone major revisions. Identical to all previous editions, this edition of Exercise Physiology: Theory and Application to Fitness and Performance is intended for students interested in exercise physiology, medicine, clinical exercise physiology, exercise science, human performance, physical therapy, and physical education. The objective of this text is to provide the student with an up-to-date understanding of the physiology of exercise. Moreover, the book contains numerous clinical applications including a discussion of the benefits of exercise for multiple sclerosis patients and the latest information on sports-related brain injuries. This book is intended for a one-semester, upper-level undergraduate or beginning graduate exercise physiology course. Clearly, the text contains more material than can be covered in a single 15-week semester. This is by design. The book was written to be comprehensive and afford instructors the freedom to select the material that they consider to be the most important for their course. Furthermore, if desired, the book could be used in a two-semester sequence of exercise physiology courses (e.g., Exercise Physiology I and II) to cover the entire 25 chapters contained in the text"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Physiology of exercise
    Chapter 1: Common measurements in exercise physiology
    Chapter 2: Control of the internal environment
    Chapter 3: Bioenergetics
    Chapter 4: Exercise metabolism
    Chapter 5: Cell signaling and the hormonal responses to exercise
    Chapter 6: Exercise and the immune system
    Chapter 7: The nervous system, structure and control of movement
    Chapter 8: Skeletal muscle: structure and function
    Chapter 9: Circulatory responses
    Chapter 10: Respiration during exercise
    Chapter 11: Acid-base balance during exercise
    Chapter 12: Temperature regulation
    Chapter 13: The physiology of training effects of aerobic and anaerobic training
    Chapter 14: The physiology of resistance training
    Section 2: Physiology of health and fitness
    Chapter 15: Preventing chronic disease : physical activity and healthy eating
    Chapter 16: Exercise prescriptions for health and fitness
    Chapter 17: Exercise for special populations
    Chapter 18: Nutrition, body composition and weight management
    Section 3: Physiology of performance
    Chapter 19: Factors affecting performance
    Chapter 20: Training for performance
    Chapter 21: Training for the female athlete, children, special populations and the masters athlete
    Chapter 22: Nutrition, body composition and performance
    Chapter 23: Exercise and the environment
    Chapter 24: Ergogenic aids.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Jonathan Rhodes, Mark E. Alexander and Alexander R. Opotowsky.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of exercise physiology in patients with congenital heart disease and other pediatric cardiopulmonary disorders. It begins with an in-depth but pragmatic discussion of exercise physiology and the cardiopulmonary adaptations to physical activity, followed by a review of the conduct and interpretation of cardiopulmonary exercise tests. Subsequent chapters discuss exercise physiology and testing in patients with a variety of congenital heart diseases, including tetralogy of Fallot, Fontan physiology, transposition of the great arteries, aortic valve disease, and coarctation of the aorta. Additional chapters analyze other conditions commonly encountered by pediatric and congenital cardiologists such as pulmonary vascular disease, cardiomyopathies, heart transplants, and metabolic disorders. The book also examines the role of exercise testing in patients with electrophysiologic issues such as Wolff-Parkinson-White Syndrome, long QT syndrome, atrioventricular node dysfunction, and pacemakers. The presentations are enhanced by data from Boston Childrens Hospitals vast experience with clinical exercise testing. The textbook concludes with a series of interesting and illustrative cases that build on the earlier chapters, present some fascinating physiology, and provide real-world examples of how exercise testing can inform clinical decision making. Exercise Physiology for the Pediatric and Congenital Cardiologist is a detailed, practical reference for clinicians and other health care providers engaged in exercise testing for children and adults with congenital heart disease and other conditions that may be encountered by the pediatric and congenital cardiologist. It is an essential resource for physicians, medical students, and exercise physiologists as well as researchers in cardiology, pediatrics, and cardiopulmonary fitness.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Rhodes' Postulates and the Reasons Why Pediatric and Congenital Cardiologists Should Study Exercise Physiology; Clinical Value of Cardiopulmonary Exercise Testing in Patients with CHD and Other Disorders; Contents; Contributors; Part I: The Normal Cardiopulmonary Response to Exercise;
    1: Biochemistry of Exercise; Suggested Readings;
    2: Oxygen Delivery; Heart Rate; Stroke Volume; Oxygen Extraction; Kinetics of Oxygen Delivery and Oxygen Debt; References;
    3: Central Hemodynamics and Coronary Blood Flow During Exercise; References;
    4: CO2 Elimination (V̇CO2); Tidal Volume Respiratory RateVD/VT Ratio; Anaerobic Threshold: Implications for CO2 Elimination (and Oxygen Delivery); References; Part II: Conduct of the Cardiopulmonary Exercise Test;
    5: Laboratory Setup, Equipment, and Protocols; Environment; Equipment; Protocols; The 6-Minute Walk Test (6MWT); Exercise Testing with Electrocardiographic Monitoring; Cardiopulmonary Exercise Testing (CPET); Other Protocols; References;
    6: Exercise Stress Echocardiography; Background; Assessment of Myocardial Ischemia; Assessment of Patients with Known or Suspected Hypertrophic Cardiomyopathy Assessment of Patients with Known or Suspected Pulmonary HypertensionConclusions; References;
    7: Other Modalities: Assessment of Pulmonary Response and Measurement of Cardiac Output; Exercise Flow-Volume Loops; Measurement of Cardiac Output; Noninvasive Measurement of Cardiac Output: Inert Gas Rebreathing; Invasive Measurements of Cardiac Output; Blood Sampling During Exercise; Exercise Oscillatory Ventilation; References;
    8: Supervision and Safety Precautions for Exercise Testing; References;
    9: Special Considerations for Children; Introduction; Pediatric Patients and Their Families Test EquipmentImaging Studies; Conclusion; References;
    10: Special Considerations for Adults with Congenital Heart Disease; Introduction; Comorbidities; Exercise Testing; Conclusion; Reference; Part III: Interpretation of the Cardiopulmonary Exercise Test;
    11: Peak Exercise Parameters; Peak V̇O2; Peak Work Rate and Endurance Time; Heart Rate; The Oxygen Pulse (O2P); Respiratory Exchange Ratio (RER); Blood Pressure; Arterial O2 Saturation; Respiratory Measurements; References;
    12: Parameters from Submaximal Exercise; Ventilatory Anaerobic Threshold (VAT); V̇E/V̇CO2 Slope; End-Tidal pCO2
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Kazumi Kawahira, Megumi Shimodozono, Tomokazu Noma, editors.
    Summary: This book introduces an innovative, efficient, and patient-friendly neural net constructive therapy for patients with mild to severe hemiplegia, not only in the recovery phase but also in acute and chronic phases. The explanations are supported by extensive photographs of each position and a set of 72 video clips to help readers follow and reproduce the techniques. This book explains the theory of Repetitive Facilitative Exercise (RFE), which is a combination of repetitive volitional flexion and extension movements from neurofacilitation approaches. This exercise is aimed at achieving the intended movements and lessening synergistic movement patterns by reconstructing and strengthening the neuropathways of the injured nerve tract. Instead of interpreting disorders based on reflex theory and constructing treatment methods, the new approach considers scientific treatment methods that emphasize the formation of neural pathways by improving synapse formation and transmission efficiency based on functional localization, central programs, and neural nets. Chapters provide a basic theory of RFE, offering the underlying mechanisms of nerve tract formation/strengthening, such as functional localization, voluntary movement, plasticity, and neural lateral sprouting, giving readers a comprehensive understanding of the prompt and repetitive therapy. This is followed by an exposition of practice and techniques, planning of treatment programs, and facilitation techniques for voluntary movements of the upper limb, individual fingers, and lower limb. Finally, the book introduces RFE to facilitate and enhance motor skills in walking and other functions. Exercise Therapy for Recovery from Hemiplegia - Theory and Practice of Repetitive Facilitative Exercise will provide rehabilitation therapists, physiotherapists, occupational therapists, and medical doctors a refreshing alternative theory and practice to current approaches. Neuroscience researchers, stroke patients, and their families would find this book informative. .

    Contents:
    Part I: Basics
    Chapter 1. Theory of Repetitive Facilitative Exercise
    Part II: Practice
    Chapter 2. Principles and Basic Techniques for Repetitive Facilitative Exercise
    Chapter 3. Planning Treatment Program
    Chapter 4. Repetitive Facilitative Exercise for the Upper Limb
    Chapter 5. Repetitive Facilitative Exercise for the Lower Limb
    Chapter 6. Walking Training to Stimulate the Function of the Affected Lower Limb
    Chapter 7. Basic Natural Movements (Rolling Over, Sitting Up, Standing Up, and Sitting Down from a Standing Position).
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    William M. Adams, John F. Jardine, editors.
    Summary: This authoritative work provides clinicians, scientists and students with a comprehensive overview of exertional heat illness. Specifically, it addresses the prevention, recognition, treatment, and care of the various medical conditions that fall within the realm of exertional heat illness. In doing so, the book also offers a setting-specific (that is, athletics, military, occupational, and road race medicine) discussion of exertional heat illness for the consideration of the varied medical providers working in these settings. Clinicians will benefit from the discussion of the evidence-based best-practice considerations that should be made in the management of exertional heat illness. Scientists will benefit from this text in that it will provide them with a review of the current scientific evidence related to exertional heat illness and the translation of evidence to clinical practice - while also discussing directions for future research. Finally, students -- primarily postgraduate students interested in developing a line of research related to exertional heat illness -- will find this title an indispensable text to familiarize themselves with this fascinating field of study. A major contribution to the literature, Exertional Heat Illness: A Clinical and Evidence-Based Guide will be of significant interest to clinicians and scientists at all levels of training and experience, especially professionals in athletic training, emergency medical services, emergency room care, sports medicine and primary care.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Overview of Exertional Heat Illness
    Chapter 2: Physiological Response to Heat Stress
    Chapter 3: Predisposing Factors for Exertional Heat Illness
    Chapter 4: Exertional Heat Stroke
    Chapter 5: Heat Exhaustion
    Chapter 6: Exercise-Associated Muscle Cramps
    Chapter 7: Minor Heat Illnesses
    Chapter 8: Molecular Aspects of Thermal Tolerance and Exertional Heat Illness Susceptibility
    Chapter 9: Management of Exertional Heat Stroke in Athletics: Interdisciplinary Medical Care
    Chapter 10: Exertional Heat Illness Considerations in the Military
    Chapter 11: Considerations for Road Race Medical Staff
    Chapter 12: Climate Change and Heat Exposure: Impact on Health in Occupational and General Populations.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Guilherme Messas.
    Summary: This book contributes to one of the most challenging areas of mental health: substance misuse. Its focus is on the psychopathological experiences associated with it: both the consequences of substance misuse and the existential vulnerabilities that lead to it, even if such a clear-cut distinction is rarely possible. The work brings an innovative perspective to the issue, as it draws on two scientific fields whose association has not yet been fully explored: phenomenological psychopathology and substance misuse studies. The association of these two perspectives could build a greater understanding of this important topic and be of practical help to a wide array of professionals in their clinical practice. The structure of the book is inspired by this overall perspective. Its division into three parts is designed to introduce the reader, in a stepwise manner, to the complexities of the theme, based on the latest advances in the specific literature. The broad objective of this work is therefore to offer a useful instrument for mental health clinicians, psychiatrists, psychologists, nurses, undergraduate students of these disciplines, and all substance abuse workers.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Andrei I. Ivanov.
    Contents:
    Pharmacological inhibitors of exocytosis and endocytosis: novel bullets for old targets
    Systematic analysis of endocytosis by cellular perturbations
    Real-time detection of SNARE complex assembly with FRET using the tetracysteine system
    Profiling lysine ubiquitination by selective enrichment of ubiquitin remnant-containing peptides
    Secretion of circular proteins using sortase
    Fractionation of subcellular membrane vesicles of epithelial and non-epithelial cells by OptiPrep density gradient ultracentrifugation
    Combining pulsed SILAC labeling and click-chemistry for quantitative secretome analysis
    Probabilistic density maps to study the spatial organization of endocytosis
    Use of Kaede and Kikume green-red fusions for live cell imaging of g protein-coupled receptors
    HaloTag as a tool to investigate peroxisome dynamics in cultured mammalian cells
    SNAP-tag to monitor trafficking of membrane proteins in polarized epithelial cells
    FlAsh-palm: Super-resolution pointillist imaging with FlAsh-tetracysteine labeling
    Analysis of protein dynamics with tandem fluorescent protein timers
    Synchronization of secretory cargos trafficking in populations of cells
    Use of transmembrane fret to investigate the internalization of glycosylated proteins
    A method to rapidly induce organelle-specific molecular activities and membrane tethering
    A novel pair of split Venus fragments to detect protein-protein interactions by in vitro and in vivo bimolecular fluorescence complementation assays
    Real-time investigation of plasma membrane deformation and fusion pore expansion using polarized total internal reflection fluorescence microscopy
    Nanocones to study initial steps of endocytosis
    A novel permeabilization protocol to obtain intracellular 3d immunolabeling for electron tomography
    VIS2FIX: Rapid chemical fixation of vitreous sections for immuno-electron microscopy
    Chemical genomics: Characterizing target pathways for bioactive compounds using the endomembrane trafficking network
    Application of RNAi technology and fluorescent protein markers to study membrane traffic in c. Elegans
    Visualization of clathrin-mediated endocytosis in live drosophila egg chambers
    A novel extraction protocol to probe the role of cholesterol in synaptic vesicle recycling
    Microfluidic devices for imaging trafficking events in vivo using genetic model organisms
    The "in situ" proximity ligation assay to probe protein-protein interactions in intact tissues
    Probing the role of the actin cytoskeleton during regulated exocytosis by intravital microscopy
    Measurement of dynamic F-actin changes during exocytosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Peter Thorn, School of Biomedical Sciences, University of Queensland, St. Lucia, QLD, Australia.
    Contents:
    Part I. Techniques in the Measurement of Exocytosis
    Solution Single-Vesicle Fusion Assay by Single-Molecule Alternating-Laser Excitation / Jae-Yeol Kim, Bong-Kyu Choi, Yeon-Kyun Shin, and Nam Ki Lee
    Imaging the Stages of Exocytosis in Epithelial Type II Pneumocytes / Thomas Haller and Paul Dietl
    Carbon-Fiber Amperometry in the Study of Exocytosis / Michael D. Duffield, Ravinarayan Raghupathi, and Damien J. Keating
    Imaging of Insulin Exocytosis from Pancreatic Beta Cells / Mica Ohara-Imaizumi, Kyota Aoyagi, and Shinya Nagamatsu
    Functional, Quantitative, and Super-Resolution Imaging and Spectroscopic Approaches for Studying Exocytosis / Rory R. Duncan and Colin Rickman
    Electrophysiologic Measurements of Membrane Capacitance in Hormone-Secreting Cells / Boštjan Rituper and Robert Zorec. Part II. Model Systems for the Study of Exocytosis
    Measuring Exocytosis in Endocrine Tissue Slices / Maša Skelin Klemen, Jurij Dolenšek, Andraž Stožer, and Marjan Slak Rupnik
    Intravital Microscopy and Its Application to Study Regulated Exocytosis in the Exocrine Glands of Live Rodents / Oleg Milberg, Natalie Porat-Shliom, Muhibullah Tora, Laura Parente, Andrius Masedunskas, and Roberto Weigert
    Rapid Analysis of Synaptic Vesicle Endocytosis in Synaptosomes / James A. Daniel and Phillip J. Robinson
    Isolated Neurohypophysial Terminals: Model for Depolarization-Secretion Coupling / José R. Lemos, James McNally, Edward Custer, Adolfo Cuadra, Hector Marrero, and Dixon Woodbury
    The Sea Urchin Egg and Cortical Vesicles as Model Systems to Dissect the Fast, Ca²-Triggered Steps of Regulated Exocytosis / Prabhodh S. Abbineni, Elise P. Wright, Tatiana P. Rogasevskaia, Murray C. Killingsworth, Chandra S. Malladi, and Jens R. Coorssen.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Armando DeVirgilio, Giuseppe Spriano.
    Contents:
    Exoscopic technology
    Educational role and preclinical application of exoscope-assisted surgery
    Exoscope-assisted microlaryngeal surgery
    Exoscope-assisted laser laryngeal surgery
    Exoscope-assisted submandibular salivary stones surgery
    Exoscope-assisted oropharyngeal surgery
    Exoscope-assisted middle ear surgery
    Exoscopic surgery of lateral skull base
    The application of the exoscope in lacrimal surgery
    3D exoscopic parotidectomy
    Exoscope-assisted thyroid surgery
    Exoscope application in free flap head and neck reconstruction.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Karl L. Mettinger, Pranela Rameshwar, Vinod Kumar, editors.
    Summary: "This volume provides insight into the pivotal roles of stem cells, exosomes and other microvesicles in biofunction and molecular mechanisms and their therapeutic potential in translational nanomedicine. It further highlights evidence from recent studies as to how stem cell derived exosomes and microRNAs may restore and maintain tissue homeostasis, enable cells to recover critical cellular functions and begin repair regeneration. These early studies in animal models of aging also show evidence of improved immune, cardiovascular and cognitive functions as well as improved health span and life span. The use of exosomes from body fluids to define specific biomarkers for various tumors may also clear the path to patient-targeted treatments by developing exosome-derived microRNA based cancer therapeutics. It is essential reading for graduate students, research fellow and biomedical researchers in academia or the pharmaceutical or biotech industries"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Part I. A new stem cell biology: transplantation and baseline, cell cycle and exosomes / Peter Quesenberry, Laura R. Goldberg
    The emerging roles of microRNAs in stem cell aging / Catharine Dietrich, Manish Singh, Nishant Kumar, Shree Ram Singh
    Part II. Treating age-related diseases with somatic stem cells / Robert W. Brooks, Paul D. Robbins
    Targeting miRNA for therapy of juvenile and adult diabetic cardiomyopathy / Shyam Sundar Nandi, Paras Kumar Mishra
    Stem cell therapies for neurodegenerative diseases / Kiminobu Sugaya, Manjusha Vaidya
    Part III. MicroRNAs, regulatory messengers inside and outside cancer cells / Simone Anfossi, Xiao Fu, Rahul Nagvekar, George A. Calin
    Exosomes function in tumor immune microenvironment / Yin Huang, Keli Liu, Qing Li, Yikun Yao, Ying Wang
    EV, microvesicles/microRNAs and stem cells in cancer / Jacob A. Tickner, Derek J. Richard, Kenneth J. O'Byrne
    Human aging and cancer: role of miRNA in tumor microenvironment / Oleta A. Sandiford [and others].
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Junjie Xiao, Sanda Cretoiu, editors.
    Summary: The book provides and intensive overview on exosomes in cardiovascular diseases, its potential as biomarkers, as well as pathological and therapeutic effects. It firstly describes the general aspects of exosomes including the definition, formation and secretion of exosomes and highlight their roles as biomarkers and pathological and therapeutic effects in cardiovascular diseases as well. Secondly, basic aspects of exosomes including the purification methods of exosomes, exosomes content, and functional roles of the cardiovascular exosomes are summarized. Thirdly, exosomes as biomarkers of cardiovascular diseases are overviewed including their roles in diagnosis, prognosis and reaction to therapy. Fourthly, pathological effects of exosomes and therapeutic effects of exosomes are highlighted. Finally, future prospects of exosomes in cardiovascular research would be provided. This is an essential reference for researchers working in cell biology and regeneration, as well as clinicians such as cardiologist"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    The multifaceted functions of exosomes in health and disease: an overview / Claudia Arenaccio, Maurizio Federico
    Basic aspects of exosomes. Exosomes: nanocarriers of biological messages / Alice Conigliaro, Simona Fontana, Stefania Raimondo, Riccardo Alessandro
    Functional role of cardiovascular exosomes in myocardial injury and atherosclerosis / Maarten Vanhaverbeke, Diane Gal, Paul Holvoet
    Exosomes as biomarkers of cardiovascular diseases. Exosomes as diagnostic biomarkers in cardiovascular diseases / Felix Jansen, Qian Li
    Exosomes-based biomarkers for the prognosis of cardiovascular diseases / Yihua Bei, Pujiao Yu, Dragos Cretoiu, Sanda Maria Cretoiu, Junjie Xiao
    Pathological effects of exosomes. Exosomes as new intercellular mediators in development and therapeutics of cardiomyocyte hypertrophy / Qi Huang, Benzhi Cai
    Dual behavior of exosomes in septic cardiomyopathy / Valter Vin̕cius Silva Monteiro, Jordano Ferreira Reis, Rafaelli de Souza Gomes [and others]
    Pathological effects of exosomes in mediating diabetic cardiomyopathy / Esam S. B. Salem, Guo-Chang Fan
    Peripartum cardiomyopathy: do exosomes play a role? / Huanyu Gu, Qiying Dai, Zhuyuan Liu, Hongbao Wang, Jianhua Yao, Lei Zhou
    Vascular calcification regulation by exosomes in the vascular wall / Marcel Liberman, Luciana Cavalheiro Marti --Therapeutic effects of exosomes. Cardioprotective effects of exosomes and their potential therapeutic use / Shengguang Ding, Jingying Zhang, Qiying Dai, Mengfei Zhao, Haitao Huang, Yiming Xu [and others]
    Therapeutic effects of mesenchymal stem cell-derived exosomes in cardiovascular disease / Etsu Suzuki, Daishi Fujita, Masao Takahashi, Shigeyoshi Oba [and others]
    Exosomes derived from embryonic stem cells as potential treatment for cardiovascular diseases / Yao-Hua Song, Lianbo Shao, Yu Zhang, Jin Zhou, Bin Liu, Xiangbin Pan, Yong-jian Geng [and others]
    Cardiac progenitor-cell derived exosomes as cell-free therapeutic for cardiac repair / E. A. Mol, M. J. Goumans, J. P. G. Sluijter
    Therapeutic potential of hematopoietic stem cell-derived exosomes in cardiovascular disease / Jana Radosinska, Monika Bartekova
    Cardiac telocyte-derived exosomes and their possible implications in cardiovascular pathophysiology / Mirca Marini, Lidia Ibba-Manneschi, Mirko Manetti
    Circulating exosomes in cardiovascular diseases / Yihua Bei, Ting Chen, Daniel Dumitru Banciu, Dragos Cretoiu, Junjie Xiao
    Therapeutic effects of ischemic-preconditioned exosomes in cardiovascular diseases / Shengguang Ding, Zhiqing Fan, Che Lin, Qiying Dai, Jinzhe Zhou, Haitao Huang, Yiming Xu [and others]
    Future prospects. Exosomes: outlook for future cell-free cardiovascular disease therapy / Bahar Barani, Sheeja Rajasingh, Johnson Rajasingh.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    editor, James W. Carpenter, MS, DVM, Diplomate ACZM, Professor, Zoological Medicine, Department of Clinical Sciences, College of Veterinary Medicine, Kansas State University, Manhattan, Kansas ; assistant editor, Christopher J. Marion, DVM, MPH, Marion Veterinary Consulting, Manhattan, Kansas.
    Contents:
    Invertebrates
    Fish
    Amphibians
    Reptiles
    Birds
    Backyard Poultry and Waterfowl
    Sugar Gliders
    Hedgehogs
    Rodents
    Rabbits
    Ferrets
    Minature Pigs
    Primates
    Wildlife
    Select topics for the exotic animal veterinarian.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Tauqeer Hussain Mallhi, Yusra Habib Khan, Azreen Syazril Adnan, Nida Tanveer, Raja Ahsan Aftab.
    Summary: The book discusses all aspects of expanded dengue syndrome (EDS), an emerging entity of dengue infection, and serves as definitive source of information for health care professionals. With each chapter focusing on a different type of EDS, the book covers the definition, concept, prevalence, pathophysiology, management, complications and outcomes of the condition. It also highlights the impact of the disease on healthcare. Further, based on both basic and the latest, cutting-edge research, it examines treatments, algorithms, standard treatment guidelines and the pharmacotherapy of EDS. EDS is referred to as atypical/unusual manifestations of the dengue infections, also termed as isolated organopathies, including hepatic, renal, cardiac, respiratory and neurological involvements that could be explained as a result of severe, profound shock or associated with underlying host conditions or co-infections. Raising awareness of this neglected and little-known complication of dengue infection, the book serves as an educational and teaching aid and useful resource for upper-undergraduate students. It also provides up-to-date reference material for researchers in academia and corporations as well as for clinicians wanting to improve the management of EDS during dengue outbreaks.

    Contents:
    Classification and symptomology of dengue viral infection
    Expanded dengue syndrome
    Gastro-hepatic complications in dengue
    Renal complications in dengue
    Cardiac complications in dengue
    Respiratory complications in dengue
    Neurological complications in dengue
    Musculoskeletal complications in dengue
    Lymphoreticular complications in dengue
    Miscellaneous complications in dengue
    Recommendations for managing expanded dengue syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    volume editor, Claudio Ronco.
    Contents:
    Expanded hemodialysis : a new concept therapy / X. Yu
    Middle-molecule uremic toxins and outcomes in chronic kidney disease / Z.A. Massy, S. Liabeuf
    Uremia retention molecules and clinical outcomes / F. Carvalho Barreto, D. Veit Barreto, M.E.F. Canziani
    End-stage renal disease, inflammation, and cardiovascular outcomes / L. Dai, E. Golembiewska, B. Lindholm, P. Stenvinkel
    The cardiovascular burden in end-stage renal disease / M. Cozzolino, A. Galassi, F. Pivari, P. Ciceri, F. Conte
    Inflammation and protein-energy wasting in the uremic milieu / M. Jankowska, G. Cobo, B. Lindholm, P. Stenvinkel
    Inflammation : a key contributor to the genesis and progression of chronic kidney disease / Q. Qian
    Solute transport in hemodialysis : advances and limitations of current membrane technology / W.R. Clark, D. Gao, M. Neri, C. Ronco
    Membrane innovation in dialysis / A. Boschetti-de-Fierro, W. Beck, H. Hildwein, B. Krause, M. Storr, C. Zweigart
    Multidimensional classification of dialysis membranes / C. Ronco, M. Neri, A. Lorenzin, F. Garzotto, W.R. Clark. Modeling of internal filtration in TheraNova hemodialyzers / A. Lorenzin, M. Neri, W.R. Clark, F. Garzotto, A. Brendolan, F. Nalesso, N. Marchionna, M. Zanella, M. Sartori, G.B. Fiore, C. Ronco
    The rational for extended haemodialysis therapy (HDx) / C.A. Hutchison, M. Wolley
    Expanded hemodialysis therapy : prescription and delivery / N. Heyne
    Effects of hemodialysis therapy using dialyzers with medium cut-off membranes on middle molecules molecules / A.H. Kirsch, A.R. Rosenkranz, R. Lyko, D.H. Krieter
    The place of large pore membranes in the treatment portfolio of patients on hemodialysis / W. Van Biesen, R. Vanholder, E. Schepers, G. Glorieux, A. Dhondt, S. Eloot
    Large middle molecules and albumin removal : why should not we rest on our laurels? / N. Florens, L. Juillard
    Effects of expanded hemodialysis therapy on clinical outcomes / S. Mitra, K. Kharbanda.
    Digital Access Karger 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Paul Guichard, Virginie Hamel.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2021
  • Digital
    Jaung-Geng Lin, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on the use of acupuncture as a possible and alternative treatment in analgesia, drug addiction, depression, itchiness, peripheral nerve regeneration, stroke, diabetes, cognitive deficits and sleep regulation. Formal recognition by WHO and UNESCO concerning the use and efficacy of acupuncture science in modern medicine has encouraged high levels of investment and commitment to research and development activities into acupuncture science from several top-level health science research and treatment institutes in China Mainland, Taiwan, Japan, Korea, France and the USA. This book aims to provide direction and guidance on how the medical community can proceed with acupuncturology in modern medical treatment and precision medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Stanley E. Lazic.
    Summary: Specifically intended for lab-based biomedical researchers, this practical guide shows how to design experiments that are reproducible, with low bias, high precision, and widely applicable results. With specific examples from research using both cell cultures and model organisms, it explores key ideas in experimental design, assesses common designs, and shows how to plan a successful experiment. It demonstrates how to control biological and technical factors that can introduce bias or add noise, and covers rarely discussed topics such as graphical data exploration, choosing outcome variables, data quality control checks, and data pre-processing. It also shows how to use R for analysis, and is designed for those with no prior experience.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Key ideas in experimental design
    3. Replication (what is'N'?)
    4. Analysis of common designs
    5. Planning for success
    6. Exploratory data analysis.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2016
  • Digital
    John H. Challis.
    Summary: This is the first textbook to comprehensively cover the experimental methods used in biomechanics. Designed for graduate students and researchers studying human biomechanics at the whole-body level, the book introduces readers to the theory behind the primary data collection methods and primary methods of data processing and analysis used in biomechanics. Each individual chapter covers a different aspect of data collection or data processing, presenting an overview of the topic at hand and explaining the math required for understanding the topic. A series of appendices provide the specific math that is required for understanding the chapter contents. Each chapter leads readers through the techniques used for data collection and processing, providing sufficient theoretical background to understand both the how and why of these techniques. Chapters end with a set of review questions, and then a bibliography which is divided into three sections (cited references, specific references, and useful references). Provides a comprehensive and in depth presentation on methods in whole-body human biomechanics; First textbook to cover both collection and processing in a single volume; Appendices provide the math needed for the main chapters. .

    Contents:
    The Experimental Method
    Experimental Tools
    Signal Contents
    Signal Processing
    Electromyography
    Motion Analysis
    Force Plates and Related Technologies
    Anthropometry
    Kinematics
    Inverse Dynamics and Energetics
    Error Analysis
    Scaling
    Appendix A: Matrices
    Appendix B: SI Units and Quantities Used In Biomechanics
    Appendix C: Binary Math
    Appendix D: Trigonometry
    Appendix E: Logarithms
    Appendix F: Numerical Data Differentiation
    Appendix G: Data Sets for Testing Data Differentiation
    Appendix H: Singular Value Decomposition
    Appendix I: Ellipses
    Appendix J: Calculus
    Appendix K: Inertial Properties of Geometric Solids
    Appendix L: Dot Product
    Appendix M: Cardan and Euler Angles
    Appendix N: Quaternions
    Appendix O: Cross Product.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Jiménez Brundelet, Pablo.
    Contents: <br/
    >1. Histological study in rats of the intra-pulmonary bronchial route of elimination.
  • Digital
    Akshay Kumar Chakravarthy, Venkatesan Selvanarayanan, editors.
    Summary: The earliest land-plants evolved around 450 million years ago from aquatic plants devoid of vascular systems. The diversification of flowering plants (angiosperms) during the Cretaceous period is associated with speciation in insects. Early insect herbivores were mandibulate, but the evolution of vascular plants led to the co-evolution of other forms of herbivory, such as leaf feeding, sap-sucking, leaf mining, tissue borer, gall forming and nectar-feeding. Plant defense against biotic stress is an adaptive evolution by plants to increase their fitness. Plants use a variety of strategies to defend against damage caused by herbivores. Plant defense mechanisms are either inbuilt or induced. Inbuilt mechanisms are always present within the plant, while induced defenses are produced or mobilized to the site where a plant is injured. Induced defense mechanisms include morphological, physiological changes and production of secondary metabolites. Host plant resistance (HPR) is one of the eco-friendly methods of pest management. It protects the crop by making it less suitable or tolerant to the pest. While books on theoretical aspects of HPR are available, an exclusive book on the practical aspects is lacking. There is a wide gap between the theory and the experimental procedures required for conducting studies on plant resistance for the post graduate students and young researchers. A dire need for a book on practical aspects was strongly felt. Initially a practical manual was prepared which eventually evolved into the present book. We hope this book provides information on major aspects of screening crop germplasm, sampling techniques, genetic and biochemical basis of HPR, behavioural studies on pheromone and plant volatiles, and some of the recent approaches in HPR. Further, the references provide the scientific articles and books as additional information to readers and workers alike.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgements; Contents; Editors and Contributors; Part I: Prerequisites for Host Plant Resistance Studies; Introduction; 1 Introduction; 2 Early Success; 3 Role in Pest Management; References; Further Reading; Germplasm Exploration and Collection; 1 Introduction; 2 Major Sources of Crop Germplasm; 2.1 Banana/Plantain, Musa spp.; 2.2 Barley, Hordeum vulgare; Oat, Avena sativa; and Rye, Secale cereale; 2.3 Bean, Phaseolus Species, and Cowpea, Vigna Species; 2.4 Capsicum; 2.5 Castor; 2.6 Cassava, Manihot esculenta 2.7 Chickpea, Cicer arietinum, and Lentil, Lens culinaris2.8 Citrus; 2.9 Coconut; 2.10 Cotton; 2.11 Maize; 2.12 Mango; 2.13 Peanut; 2.14 Peas, Pisum; 2.15 Potato; 2.16 Rice; 2.17 Sesame, Sesamum Species; 2.18 Sorghum, Sorghum Species; 2.19 Soybean, Glycine max; 2.20 Spices (Black Pepper, Cardamom); 2.21 Sugarcane, Saccharum Species; 2.22 Sunflower; 2.23 Sweet Potato, Ipomoea batatas; 2.24 Tomato, Lycopersicon Species; 2.25 Wheat, Triticum aestivum; References; Further Reading; Comparison of Germplasm Evaluation Parameters; 1 Introduction; References; Further Reading 3.3 Larval Rearing Containers3.4 Oviposition Chambers; 4 Diamondback Moth (DBM), Plutella xylostella; 4.1 Materials Required; 4.2 The Rearing Procedure Is as Follows; 5 Cotton Aphid, Aphis gossypii; 5.1 Materials Required; 5.2 The Aphids Can Be Reared as Follows; 6 Bhendi Leafhopper, Amrasca devastans; 6.1 Materials Required; 6.2 Procedure; 7 Green Leafhopper, Nephotettix spp., and Brown Planthopper, Nilaparvata lugens; 7.1 Materials Required; 7.2 Procedure; 8 Whiteflies, Bemisia tabaci; 8.1 Materials Required; 8.2 Procedure; References; Further Reading Determining Relative Abundance and Distribution Patterns of Insect Pests1 Introduction; 2 Distribution Patterns, Sample Size and Sampling; 3 The Steps Are as Follows; 4 Sample Size; 5 Number of Larvae in Damaged Fruiting Structures; References; Further Reading; Mass Culturing of Phytophagous Insects for Host Plant Resistance Studies; 1 Introduction; 2 Tobacco Caterpillar, Spodoptera litura (Muthukumaran and Selvanarayanan 2008); 2.1 Materials Required; 2.2 Procedure; 3 Tomato Fruit Worm, Helicoverpa armigera (Arivudainambi and Selvanarayanan 2000); 3.1 Materials Required; 3.2 Artificial Diet Part II: Instrumentation in Host Plant Resistance StudiesLaboratory Equipments Used for Host-Plant Resistance Studies; 1 Introduction; 2 Electroantennogram; 3 EthoVision; References; Further Reading; Electroantennogram for Recording Olfactory Responses of an Insect to Plant Volatiles; 1 Introduction; References; Further Reading; Standardization of Feeding Tests in Phytophagous Insects to Host and Nonhost Plants; 1 Introduction; References; Further Reading; Wind Tunnel: A Tool to Test the Flight Response of Insects to Semiochemicals; 1 Introduction; 1.1 Structure of Wind Tunnel (Kainoh 2011)
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    von Dr. W. Kolle ... und Dr. H. Hetsch ...
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    G175 .K8 1911
    2
  • Digital
    Michael D. Coleman.
    Contents:
    A brief history of occupational toxicology
    The expert report process in legal context
    Acute toxicity : case histories of solvent exposure
    Chronic and permanent injury : bladder cancer and occupation
    Chronic and acute toxicity of herbicides and pesticides
    Toxicity of imported goods.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Print
    [edited by] Miral D. Jhaveri [and five others].
    Contents:
    Part I: Skull and brain
    I: Scalp, skull
    Anatomically based differentials
    Generic imaging patterns
    Clinical based differentials
    II: Meninges
    Anatomically based differentials
    Generic imaging patterns
    III: Ventricles, periventricular regions
    Anatomically based differentials
    Generic imaging patterns
    Modality-Specific imaging findings
    IV: Extraaxial spaces and subarachnoid cisterns
    Anatomically based differentials
    Generic imaging patterns
    Modality-Specific imaging findings
    V: Brain parenchyma, general
    Generic imaging patterns
    Modality-Specific imaging findings
    Clinically based differentials
    VI: Supratentorial brain parenchyma
    Anatomically based differentials
    VII: Infratentorial brain parenchyma
    Anatomically based differentials
    Generic imaging patterns
    Clinically based differentials
    VIII: Sella/Juxtasellar, pineal region
    Anatomically based differentials
    Modality-Specific imaging findings
    IX: Arteries
    Anatomically based differentials
    Modality-Specific imaging findings
    X: Veins, venous sinuses
    Anatomically based differentials
    Modality-Specific imaging findings
    XI: Cranial nerves
    Clinically based differentials
    Part II: Spine
    I: Transspatial
    Anatomically based differentials
    Generic imaging patterns
    Clinically based differentials
    II: Craniovertebral junction
    Anatomically based differentials
    Generic imaging patterns
    III: Vertebral body, posterior elements
    Anatomically based differentials
    Generic imaging patterns
    Modality-Specific imaging findings
    IV: Intervertebral disc, endplate
    Generic imaging patterns
    Modality-Specific imaging findings
    V: Extradural
    Anatomically based differentials
    Generic imaging patterns
    Modality-Specific imaging findings
    Clinically based differentials
    VI: Intradural extramedullary
    Anatomically based differentials
    Generic imaging patterns
    Modality-Specific imaging findings
    Clinically based differentials
    VII: Intramedullary
    Anatomically based differentials
    Generic imaging patterns
    Modality-Specific imaging findings
    Clinically based differentials.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC386.5 .E97 2018
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Len Jennings and Thomas M. Skovholt.
    Summary: "Thomas Skovholt and Len Jennings' landmark Master Therapists: Exploring Expertise in Therapy and Counseling was the first book to apply qualitative methodology to the study of validly selected expert therapists. Considering the growing number of international qualitative studies on psychotherapy expertise, the authors join forces once again to provide students, academics, researchers, and practitioners with Expertise in Counseling and Psychotherapy: Master Therapist Studies from Around the World. In this book, Jennings and Skovholt compile and compare, for the first time, a series of parallel studies of expertise in psychotherapy from around the world. The studies include therapist expertise research projects in Southeast Asia (Singapore, Japan, and Korea), North America (the U.S.A. and Canada), and Europe (Czech Republic and Portugal). Synthesizing and presenting common characteristics of master practitioners on a global scale, Expertise in Counseling and Psychotherapy is the most comprehensive description of psychotherapy expertise at the international level that has ever been conducted."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The world of expertise in counseling and psychotherapy
    Czech master therapists
    Canadian master couple therapists
    Being and becoming a psychotherapist in Portugal : a dialogue between personal and professional experiences
    Psychotherapy expertise in Singapore : a qualitative investigation
    Personal and professional characteristics of Japanese master therapists : a qualitative investigation on expertise in psychotherapy and counseling in Japan
    Characteristics of Korean master group counselors
    Bringing it all together : a qualitative meta-analysis of seven master therapists studies from around the world.
    Digital Access Oxford [2016]
  • Print
    edited by Mehul S. Raval, Mohendra Roy, Tolga Kaya, and Rupal Kapdi.
    Summary: This book combines technology and the medical domain. It covers advances in computer vision (CV) and machine learning (ML) that facilitate automation in diagnostics and therapeutic and preventive health care. The special focus on eXplainable Artificial Intelligence (XAI) uncovers the black box of ML and bridges the semantic gap between the technologists and the medical fraternity. Explainable AI in Healthcare: Unboxing Machine Learning for Biomedicine intends to be a premier reference for practitioners, researchers, and students at basic, intermediary levels and expert levels in computer science, electronics and communications, information technology, instrumentation and control, and electrical engineering. This book will benefit readers in the following ways: Explores state of art in computer vision and deep learning in tandem to develop autonomous or semi-autonomous algorithms for diagnosis in health care Investigates bridges between computer scientists and physicians being built with XAI Focuses on how data analysis provides the rationale to deal with the challenges of healthcare and making decision-making more transparent Initiates discussions on human-AI relationships in health care Unites learning for privacy preservation in health care
    Digital Access TandFonline 2023
  • Digital
    Tyler VanderWeele.
    Summary: "The book provides an accessible but comprehensive overview of methods for mediation and interaction. There has been considerable and rapid methodological development on mediation and moderation/interaction analysis within the causal-inference literature over the last ten years. Much of this material appears in a variety of specialized journals, and some of the papers are quite technical. There has also been considerable interest in these developments from empirical researchers in the social and biomedical sciences. However, much of the material is not currently in a format that is accessible to them. The book closes these gaps by providing an accessible, comprehensive, book-length coverage of mediation. The book begins with a comprehensive introduction to mediation analysis, including chapters on concepts for mediation, regression-based methods, sensitivity analysis, time-to-event outcomes, methods for multiple mediators, methods for time-varying mediation and longitudinal data, and relations between mediation and other concepts involving intermediates such as surrogates, principal stratification, instrumental variables, and Mendelian randomization. The second part of the book concerns interaction or "moderation," including concepts for interaction, statistical interaction, confounding and interaction, mechanistic interaction, bias analysis for interaction, interaction in genetic studies, and power and sample-size calculation for interaction. The final part of the book provides comprehensive discussion about the relationships between mediation and interaction and unites these concepts within a single framework. This final part also provides an introduction to spillover effects or social interaction, concluding with a discussion of social-network analyses. The book is written to be accessible to anyone with a basic knowledge of statistics. Comprehensive appendices provide more technical details for the interested reader. Applied empirical examples from a variety of fields are given throughout. Software implementation in SAS, Stata, SPSS, and R is provided. The book should be accessible to students and researchers who have completed a first-year graduate sequence in quantitative methods in one of the social- or biomedical-sciences disciplines. The book will only presuppose familiarity with linear and logistic regression, and could potentially be used as an advanced undergraduate book as well"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Cover; Explanation in Causal Inference; Copyright; Dedication; Contents; Preface; Part 1 Mediation Analysis; 1 Explanation and Mechanism; 1.1 Causal Inference and Explanation; 1.2 Forms of Explanation and Types of Mechanisms; 1.3 Motivations for Assessing Mediation, Interaction, and Interference; 1.4 Organization of this Book; 2 Mediation: Introduction and Regression-Based Approaches; 2.1 Classic Regression Approach to Mediation Analysis; 2.2 Counterfactual Approach to Mediation Analysis: Continuous Outcomes; 2.3 Assumptions about Confounding; 2.4 Binary and Count Outcomes. 2.5 Binary Mediators2.6 Comparison of Approaches: Product-of-Coefficient and Difference Methods; 2.7 Description of the SAS Macro; 2.8 Description of the SPSS Macro; 2.9 Description of the Stata Macro; 2.10 Hypothetical Example with Output; 2.11 Empirical Example in Genetic Epidemiology; 2.12 When to Include an Exposure
    Mediator Interaction; 2.13 Proportion Mediated; 2.14 Proportion Eliminated; 2.15 Study Design and Mediation Analysis; 2.16 Counterfactual Notation for Natural Direct and Indirect Effects; 2.17 An Alternative Regression-Based Estimation Approach Using Simulations. 2.18 Code for the Simulation-Based Approach in R2.19 Discussion; 3 Sensitivity Analysis for Mediation; 3.1 Sensitivity Analysis for Unmeasured Confounding for Total Effects; 3.2 Sensitivity Analysis for Unmeasured Confounding for Controlled Direct Effects; 3.3 Sensitivity Analysis for Unmeasured Confounding for Natural Direct and Indirect Effects; 3.4 Sensitivity Analysis Using Two Trials; 3.5 Sensitivity Analysis for Direct and Indirect Effects in the Presence of Measurement Error; 3.6 Discussion; 4 Mediation Analysis with Survival Data. 4.1 Earlier Literature on Mediation Analysis with Survival Models4.2 Mediation Analysis with an Accelerated Failure Time Model; 4.3 Mediation Analysis with a Proportional Hazards Model; 4.4 Mediation with an Additive Hazard Model; 4.5 A Weighting Approach to Direct and Indirect Effects with Survival Outcomes; 4.6 Sensitivity Analysis with Survival Data; 4.7 Discussion; 5 Multiple Mediators; 5.1 Regression-Based Approaches to Multiple Mediators; 5.2 A Weighting Approach to Multiple Mediators; 5.3 Controlled Direct Effects and Exposure-Induced Confounding. 5.4 Effect Decomposition with Exposure-Induced Confounding5.5 Path-Specific Effects; 5.6 Sensitivity Analysis for Exposure-Induced Confounding; 5.7 Discussion; 6 Mediation Analysis with Time-Varying Exposures and Mediators; 6.1 Notation and Definitions; 6.2 Controlled Direct Effects with Time-Varying Exposures and Mediators; 6.3 Natural Direct and Indirect Effects and their Randomized Interventional Analogues with Time-Varying Exposures and Mediators; 6.4 Counterfactual Analysis of MacKinnon's Three-Wave Mediation Model; 6.5 Discussion; 7 Selected Topics in Mediation Analysis.
  • Digital
    by Tabish Qidwai.
    Summary: This book is aimed to cover the role of genetic polymorphisms in human genes related to RBC disorders, metabolic enzymes, immune response, and cytoadherence in the susceptibility/resistance to malaria caused by Plasmodium falciparum. The chapters provide current information on the balancing trait and the significance of such traits in the malaria resistance. The book covers polymorphisms in the genes of the red blood cells-sickle cell anaemia; glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase deficiency and thalassemia that confer protection against malaria. In addition, the book explores selection of genetic variations in the human genome as genetic control mechanism against malaria in endemic regions. It also provides a comprehensive overview of the molecular epidemiology and natural selection of alleles in the genes which are associated with malaria, and presents description of the role of human genetic polymorphisms in malaria disease risk and disease outcome.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Human genetics and infectious disease
    Part 1. RBC disorders
    Chapter 2. Sickle cell gene
    Chapter 3. Alpha-Thalassemia
    Chapter 4. Beta-Thalassemia
    Chapter 5. Duffy blood group locus
    Part 2. Metabolic enzymes
    Chapter 6. Pyruvate kinase deficiency
    Chapter 7. Glucose 6-Phosphate dehydrogenase
    Part 3. Host immune response
    Chapter 8. TNF genetic polymorphisms
    Chapter 9. iNos genetic polymorphisms
    Chapter 10. Human complement receptor 1 polymorphisms
    Chapter 11. Interferonalpha receptor-1 (IFNAR1) polymorphisms
    Part 4. Cytoadherence
    Chapter 12. Intercellular adhesion molecule-1 polymorphisms
    Chapter 13. Platelet endothelial cell adhesion molecule-1 (PECAM-1) polymorphisms
    Chapter 14. Vascular cell adhesion molecule-1 (VCAM1) polymorphisms.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Tegan Kehoe.
    Summary: "This full-color book tells the story of American healthcare history through color photographs of real objects from museums and both famous and little-known medical discoveries"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Unwashed groins and child labor: cancer in the early industrial age
    George Washington's toothbrush
    The age of the vaccine
    No wrong way to eat
    A pioneering operation
    Healing by a higher power
    Morton's ether inhaler and the advent of anesthesia
    Bitters and irregulars: alternative healing in the nineteenth century
    Blood shed after the battle: bleeding cups
    Under the surgeon's tent: the physician in the Civil War
    "Inflammatory mischief" meets antiseptic techniques
    Answering the milk question
    Skull shape and scientific racism
    "Health and comfort of body, with grace and beauty of form"
    East meets West in the medicine cabinet: a Chinese doctor in America
    The "cure" that wasn't
    Cocaine the medicine and the drug
    Don Pedrito, a legendary healer
    A wooden leg in a mechanized world
    A community doctor's legacy
    Carville, the "Louisiana leper home"
    The professional nurse only
    The pandemic of the century: the 1918 flu
    The Bubonic plague meets bacteriology
    Safe, simple, sure? The power of x-rays
    "Are you playing the health game?"
    The problem with "good" genes
    Machinery and machinations
    Diabetes: a fatal disease becomes chronic
    The tools of a contested trade: a midwife's kit
    Sipping on the sunshine vitamin
    Preemie care beyond the World's Fair
    The penicillin revolution
    Blood transfusion comes of age
    Insuring and ensuring health
    Nursing at war
    The science and politics of inhaling dust
    Health uplifted, health upended
    DDT: the double-edged sword
    The iron lung and the polio epidemics
    Two eras of change in pharmacy
    More than a metaphor: the straitjacket
    Changing ways of looking at the gut
    The pill's new era of choice (for some)
    Smoking under scrutiny
    Ed Roberts and the independent living movement
    Bypassing the heart
    False hopelessness or false hope: the early years of AIDS
    September 11 and emergency response
    Saving lives amid the opioid crisis.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    RA395.A3 K45 2021
    1
  • Digital
    Gerard Ahern, Maurice Brygel.
    Summary: "Medicine is an ever-changing science. As new research and clinical experience broaden our knowledge, changes in treatment and drug therapy are required. The authors and the publisher of this work have checked with sources believed to be reliable in their efforts to provide information that is complete and generally in accord with the standards accepted at the time of publication. However, in view of the possibility of human error or changes in medical sciences, neither the authors nor the publisher nor any other party who has been involved in the preparation or publication of this work warrants that the information contained herein is in every respect accurate or complete, and they disclaim all responsibility for any errors or omissions or for the results obtained from use of the information contained in this work. Readers are encouraged to confirm the information contained herein with other sources. For example, and in particular, readers are advised to check the product information sheet included in the package of each medication they plan to administer to be certain that the information contained in this work is accurate and that changes have not been made in the recommended dose or in the contraindications for administration. This recommendation is of particular importance in connection with new or infrequently used medications."--Notice

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chapter 1: Abdomen
    Chapter 2: Distal Lower Limb
    Chapter 3: Head
    Chapter 4: Mediastinum --Chapter 5: Neck
    Chapter 6: Pelvis
    Chapter 7: Pleural Cavity
    Chapter 8: Proximal Lower Limb
    Chapter 9: Spine
    Chapter 10: Upper Limb-- Appendix: Atlas.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2014
  • Digital
    Gerard Ahern, Maurice Brygel.
    Summary: Exploring essential surgery introduces basic surgical concepts and techniques to the medical student. Each learning module is grouped by region for ease of study. Numerous videos, images, and definitions comprise each module, giving context to the topic. Clerks can track their understanding of the material with quizzes.

    Contents:
    Principles
    Skin
    Head and neck
    Thorax
    Abdomen
    Hernia
    Anorectal
    Pelvis
    Upper limb
    Lower limb
    Spine
    Procedures.
    Digital Access AccessSurgery 2014
  • Digital
    Ganji Purnachandra Nagaraju, Aramati BM Reddy, editors.
    Summary: This book comprehensively describes the association between metabolic syndrome and pancreatic cancer progression, and the mechanism of action and target definition with a view to drug discovery. Metabolic syndrome, which includes adnominal obesity, hypertension, dyslipidemia, and hyperglycemia, has recently been shown to play an important role in the etiology and progression of various cancers. Further, obesity and diabetes have been associated with an increased incidence of gastric cancers. The book reviews the key biological mechanisms underlying the association between metabolic dysregulation, including obesity-associated enhancement of growth factor signaling, inflammation, and perturbation in pancreatic cancer cell growth and metastasis. It also illustrates the role of the inflammatory signaling pathway in metabolic diseases as well as tumor growth and explores the potential of these pathways as the rational targets for pancreatic cancer therapy. Lastly, the book offers a comprehensive description of the challenges associated with diabetes and pancreatic cancer therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sonia Malik, editor.
    Summary: Natural compounds obtained from plants represent a tremendous global market due to their use as food additives, cosmetics, in agriculture and in pharmaceuticals. This book provides up-to-date information on various strategies and methods for producing compounds of interest. Leading researchers discuss the latest advances in environmentally friendly natural compound production from plants, making the book a valuable resource for biotechnologists, pharmacists, food technologists and researchers working in the medical and healthcare industries.

    Contents:
    1. Secondary Metabolite Production in Plant Cell Culture: A New Epigenetic Frontier
    2. Plant Cell Biofactories as in vitro production platforms of the anti-cancer drug Camptothecin
    3. Not One for All: The Interwoven Relationship Between Morphophysiology and Secondary Metabolite Production in Plant Cell Cultures
    4. Anthocyanins and proanthocyanidins as Anti-cancer agents
    5. Duckweeds for the production of therapeutic proteins
    6. Essential oils from plants: Industrial applications and Biotechnological production
    7. Biotechnological production of antistress compounds: Current status and future prospects
    8. Elicitors as a biotechnological tool for in vitro production of bioactive phenolic compounds
    9. Immobilization and Application of Industrial Enzymes on Plant Based New Generation Polymers
    10. Recent advances towards development plant cell culture process for sustainable production of lignans and its health benefits
    11. Physiology of camptothecin synthesis in plants and root organ cultures of Ophiorrhiza mungos L. and its production in root fermenters
    12. In vitro culture of Haloxylon recurvum and Haloxylon salicornicum: valuable source of food additives, pharmaceutical and nutritional components from extreme arid zone.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    V. Venkatramanan, Shachi Shah, Ram Prasad, editors.
    Summary: The existential environmental crisis prompted the United Nations to formulate the Millennium Development Goals at the turn of the 21st century in order to embark on an era of sustainable development. The progress and deficiencies in achieving the Millennium Development Goals provided impetus to the intelligentsia and policymakers to map out the pertinent goals for a sustainable growth trajectory for humanity and the planet. The United Nations' 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development, which was adopted in September 2015, took the shape of 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) and 169 targets. In effect, the 17 Sustainable Development Goals focus on protecting the earth's life support systems for intra- and inter-generational equity and for development that is rooted in sustainability science. Attaining these goals is an uphill task; nevertheless, scientific knowledge, trans and interdisciplinary inquiries, concerted global action and capacity building would provide an enabling environment for achieving the SDGs. This book explores the synergies and trade-offs between climate change management and other SDGs. It highlights the policy imperatives as well as the interrelations between combating climate change and its impacts (SDG 13) and food and nutritional security (SDG 2), water security (SDG 6), soil security (SDG 15), energy security (SDG 7), poverty eradication (SDG 1), gender equality (SDG 5), resilient infrastructure (SDG 9), and sustainable and resilient cities (SDG 11).

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Achieving Food and Nutrition Security and Climate Change: Clash of the Titans or Alignment of the Stars?
    Chapter 2. Climate Change, Hunger and Food Security in Asia with special reference to Sri Lanka: Can the SDGs be Achieved by 2030?
    Chapter 3. The Status of Climate Variability and Food Accessibility: A Case of Households in Gauteng Province, South Africa
    Chapter 4. Climate resilient mariculture technologies for food and nutritional security
    Chapter 5. Climate change and adaptation: Recommendations for agriculture sector
    Chapter 6. Integrated Farming Systems: Climate Resilient Sustainable Food Production System in the Indian Himalayan Region
    Chapter 7. Adaptation mechanism of methylotrophic bacteria to drought condition and its strategies in mitigating plant stress caused by climate change
    Chapter 8. Synergies and Trade-offs between Climate Change and the Sustainable Development Goals in the Context of Marine Fisheries
    Chapter 9. Increasing Synergies between Climate Change and Sustainable Development in Energy Policy
    Chapter 10. Ensuring Domestic Water Security for Cities under Rapid Urbanisation and Climate Change Risks
    Chapter 11. Improving Water Productivity for Smallholder Rice Farmers in the Upper West Region of Ghana: A Review of Sustainable Approaches
    Chapter 12. Synergies between climate change, biodiversity, ecosystem function and services, indirect drivers of change and human well-being in forests
    Chapter 13. Climate change projections of current and future distributions of the endemic Loris lydekkerianus (Lorinae) in peninsular India
    Chapter 14. Climate Change, Air Pollution and SDG 3: An Indian Perspective
    Chapter 15. Empowerment of fisherwomen through marine farming.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Eman Ali Saeed Alghamdi, Abdulmalik Yahya Al Qahtani, Mazen M. Sinjab, Khalid Mohammed Alyahya.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Abstract
    Acknowledgment
    Contents
    About the Authors
    Abbreviations
    Part I
    Chapter 1: Ocular Pharmacokinetics
    References
    Chapter 2: Factors Affecting Bioavailability and Efficacy of Topical Ophthalmic Preparations
    References
    Chapter 3: Ideal Characteristics of Ophthalmic Drug Delivery System
    References
    Chapter 4: Inactive Ingredients Used in the Preparation of Ophthalmic Products
    References
    Chapter 5: Preservatives Used in Ophthalmic Preparations
    Reference
    Part II
    Chapter 6: Topical Ophthalmic Drug Forms
    References Chapter 7: Extemporaneous Compounding of Ophthalmic Products
    Reference
    Chapter 8: Guidelines of The American Society of Health-System Pharmacists (ASHP) on Pharmacy-Prepared Ophthalmic Products
    Reference
    Chapter 9: Formulations of Extemporaneous Topical Ophthalmic Preparations
    9.1 Acetylcysteine Ophthalmic Solution [1-4]
    9.2 Amikacin Ophthalmic Solution [5, 6]
    9.3 Amphotericin B Ophthalmic Solution [7-12]
    9.4 Atropine Ophthalmic Solution [13-15]
    9.5 Autologous Serum Ophthalmic Solution [16-22]
    9.6 Bacitracin Ophthalmic Solution [15, 23] 9.7 Cefazolin Sodium Ophthalmic Solution [15, 24-29]
    9.8 Ceftazidime Ophthalmic Solution [15, 24, 30-33]
    9.9 Cefuroxime Ophthalmic Solution [15, 34, 35]
    9.10 Ceftriaxone Ophthalmic Solution [36, 37]
    9.11 Clindamycin Ophthalmic Solution [38]
    9.12 Cyclosporine Ophthalmic Solution [39-49]
    9.13 Colistimetate Ophthalmic Solution [50-54]
    9.14 Edetate Disodium Ophthalmic Solution [15, 55-58]
    9.15 5-Fluorouracil Ophthalmic Solution [59-65]
    9.16 Gentamicin Ophthalmic Solution [38, 66, 67]
    9.17 Interferon Alfa-2b Ophthalmic Solution [68-80] 9.18 Medroxyprogesterone Ophthalmic Solution [81-83]
    9.19 Mitomycin-C Ophthalmic Solution [84-100]
    9.20 Penicillin G Potassium Ophthalmic Solution [84, 85, 101]
    9.21 Tacrolimus Ophthalmic Solution [102, 103]
    9.22 Tobramycin Ophthalmic Solution [84, 85, 104]
    9.23 Vancomycin Hydrochloride Ophthalmic Solution [38, 105-107]
    9.24 Voriconazole Ophthalmic Solution [108-118]
    References
    Part III
    Chapter 10: Intravitreal Injections
    References
    Chapter 11: Intracameral Injections
    Reference
    Chapter 12: Formulations of Extemporaneous Intraocular Injections 12.1 Amikacin Sulfate Intravitreal Injection [1]
    12.2 Amphotericin B Intravitreal Injection [2-6]
    12.3 Bevacizumab Intravitreal Injection [7-12]
    12.4 Cefazolin Sodium Intravitreal Injection [3, 13]
    12.5 Ceftazidime Intravitreal Injection [3, 13, 14]
    12.6 Cefuroxime Intracameral Injection [15]
    12.7 Cidofovir Intravitreal Solution [16]
    12.8 Clindamycin Intravitreal Injection [17-20]
    12.9 Dexamethasone Phosphate Intravitreal Injection [21]
    12.10 Foscarnet Intravitreal Injection [22-24]
    12.11 Ganciclovir Intravitreal Injection [22, 25, 26]
    12.12 Penicillin G Potassium Intravitreal Injection [27-29]
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Hiro Kiyosue, editor.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    1: External Carotid Artery
    References
    2: Anterior (Visceral) Branches from the Proximal ECA (Superior Thyroidal, Lingual, and Facial Arterial System)
    2.1 Superior Thyroidal Artery
    2.1.1 Branches of the Superior Thyroidal Artery (Figs. 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, and 2.6)
    2.1.1.1 Infrahyoid Branch
    2.1.1.2 Sternocleidomastoid Branch
    2.1.1.3 Superior Laryngeal Artery
    2.1.1.4 Cricothyroid Branch
    2.1.1.5 Anterior and Posterior Branch (Figs. 2.4 and 2.5)
    2.1.1.6 Prevertebral Branch
    2.2 Lingual Artery (Figs. 2.1, 2.2, 2.7, and 2.8) 2.2.1 Branches of the Lingual Artery (Figs. 2.2, 2.7, and 2.8)
    2.2.1.1 Pharyngeal Branch
    2.2.1.2 Superior Hyoidal Branch
    2.2.1.3 Dorsal Lingual Branch
    2.2.1.4 Sublingual Artery
    2.2.1.5 Deep Lingual Artery
    2.3 Facial Artery (Figs. 2.1, 2.8, 2.9, and 2.10)
    2.3.1 Branches of the Facial Artery
    2.3.1.1 Ascending Palatine Artery
    2.3.1.2 Tonsillar Branch
    2.3.1.3 Glandular Branches
    2.3.1.4 Submental Artery
    2.3.1.5 Masseter Branches and Buccal Branches
    2.3.1.6 Inferior and Superior Labial Arteries
    2.3.1.7 Lateral Nasal Artery 2.3.1.8 Angular Artery (Fig. 2.10)
    References
    3: Posterior (Neural) Branches from the Proximal ECA
    3.1 Occipital and Ascending Pharyngeal Arterial System
    3.2 Occipital Artery
    3.2.1 Branches of the Occipital Artery
    3.2.1.1 Sternocleidomastoid Branches (Figs. 2.1, 3.3, and 3.4)
    3.2.1.2 Stylomastoid Artery
    3.2.1.3 Jugular Branch (Meningeal Branch)
    3.2.1.4 Descending Muscular Branch
    3.2.1.5 Mastoid Branches
    3.2.1.6 Small Muscular Branches and Transosseous Branch
    3.3 Ascending Pharyngeal Artery
    3.3.1 Branches of the Ascending Pharyngeal Artery 3.3.1.1 Pharyngeal Branches (Figs. 3.11, 3.12, and 3.13)
    3.3.1.2 Inferior Tympanic Artery (Fig. 3.14)
    3.3.1.3 Neuromeningeal Branches (Figs. 3.4, 3.11, 3.12, 3.13, and 3.16)
    3.3.1.4 Muscular Branches
    References
    4: Superficial Arteries from the Distal ECA
    4.1 Posterior Auricular Artery and the Superficial Temporal Artery
    4.2 Posterior Auricular Artery (Figs. 1.1, 2.1, 4.1, and 4.2)
    4.2.1 Branches of the Posterior Auricular Artery
    4.2.1.1 Parotid Branches
    4.2.1.2 Muscular Branches
    4.2.1.3 Stylomastoid Artery 4.3 Superficial Temporal Artery (Figs. 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, and 4.3)
    4.3.1 Branches of the Superficial Temporal Artery
    4.3.1.1 Transverse Facial Artery (Fig. 4.4)
    4.3.1.2 Anterior Tympanic Artery (Figs. 4.2 and 4.3)
    4.3.1.3 Anterior Auricular Branches (Figs. 4.2, 4.3, and 4.4)
    4.3.1.4 Zygomatico-Orbital Artery (Figs. 2.1, 4.3, and 4.4)
    4.3.1.5 Posterior Deep Temporal Artery
    4.3.1.6 Frontal Branch and Parietal Branch (Terminal Branches) (Figs. 2.1, 3.10, and 4.3)
    References
    5: Maxillary Artery
    5.1 Branches of the First Segment
    5.1.1 The Anterior Tympanic Artery (Fig. 5.6)
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Jennie B. Leach, Elizabeth M. Powell.
    Summary: This volume provides comprehensive procedures for analyzing the extracellular matrix in native, injured, and engineered neural tissues. Divided into four parts, each focusing on different aspects of the extracellular matrix and the nervous system, Extracellular Matrix covers methods to analyze native tissue, in vitro models for investigating cell-extracellular matrix interactions in a variety of contexts, protocols to investigate the role of the extracellular matrix in nervous system injury, degeneration, and regeneration, as well as therapeutics and engineered systems. Each chapter is written by leading experts and presents established protocols in a concise format, encompassing current technologies as well as methods developed over years of research. Beginning with an introduction to the method, chapters continue with a listing of the materials and equipment, step-by-step protocols, and a Notes section with troubleshooting tips, supplemental details and alternative approaches, as well as a list of references for further information.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Ephraim Cohen, Hans Merzendorfer, editors.
    Summary: The extracellular matrix (ECM) is an acellular three-dimensional network composed of proteins, glycoproteins, proteoglycans and exopolysaccharides. It primarily serves as a structural component in the tissues and organs of plants and animals, or forms biofilms in which bacterial cells are embedded. ECMs are highly dynamic structures that undergo continuous remodeling, and disruptions are frequently the result of pathological processes associated with severe diseases such as arteriosclerosis, neurodegenerative illness or cancer. In turn, bacterial biofilms are a source of concern for human health, as they are associated with resistance to antibiotics. Although exopolysaccharides are crucial for ECM formation and function, they have received considerably little attention to date. The respective chapters of this book comprehensively address such issues, and provide reviews on the structural, biochemical, molecular and biophysical properties of exopolysaccharides. These components are abundantly produced by virtually all taxa including bacteria, algae, plants, fungi, invertebrates and vertebrates. They include long unbranched homopolymers (cellulose, chitin/chitosan), linear copolymers (alginate, agarose), peptoglycans such as murein, heteropolymers like a variety of glycosaminoglycans (hyaluronan, dermatan, keratin, heparin, Pel), and branched heteropolymers such as pectin and hemicellulose. A separate chapter is dedicated to modern industrial and biomedical applications of exopolysaccharides and polysaccharide-based biocomposites. Their unique chemical, physical and mechanical properties have attracted considerable interest, inspired basic and applied research, and have already been harnessed to form structural biocomposite hybrids for tailor-made applications in regenerative medicine, bioengineering and biosensor design. Given its scope, this book provides a substantial source of basic and applied information for a wide range of scientists, as well as valuable textbook for graduate and advanced undergraduate students.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Aminosugar-Based Exopolysaccharides Chitin-based extracellular matrices. Chapter1. Chito-Protein Matrices in Arthropod Exoskeletons and Peritrophic Membranes (Xiaoming Zhao, Jianzhen Zhang and Kun Yan Zhu)
    Chapter2. Mineral-Chitin Composite in Mollusks (Ingrid M. Weiss)
    Chapter3. Chitosan Derivatives and Grafted Adjuncts With Unique Properties (Hans Merzendorfer)
    Chapter4. Hyaluronan Extracellular Matrix
    Synthesis and Physiological Properties (Alberto Passi and Davide Vigetti)
    Chapter5. Sulfated Chondroitin, Dermatan, Heparan and Keratan
    Structure and Function (Emiliano Bedini, Maria Michela Corsaro, Alfonso Fernández-Mayoralas and Alfonso Iadonisi)
    Chapter6. Peptidoglycan Structures, Biosynthesis and Deposition in Bacterial Cell Walls (Axel Walter and Christoph Mayer)
    Chapter7. Cellulose and Hemicellulose Synthesis and their Regulation in Plant Cells (Xiaoyu Zhu, Xiaoran Xin, and Ying Gu)
    Chapter8. Cellulose in Bacterial Biofilms (Diego O. Serra and Regine Hengge)
    Chapter9. Role of Glucan-Derived Polymers in the Pathogenic Fungus Candida albicans
    Chapter10. Structure and Biological Properties of Lasiodiplodan (Mário A.A. Cunha, Vidiany A.Q. Santos, Gabrielle C. Calegari, William N. Sánchez Luna, Sandra L.A. Marin, Robert F.H. Dekker and Aneli M. Barbosa-Dekker)
    Chapter11. Structure and Biological Properties of Botryosphaeran (Robert F.H. Dekker, Eveline A.I.F. Queiroz, Mario A.A. Cunha, and Aneli M Barbosa-Dekker)
    Chapter12. Pectic Polysaccharides in Plants: Structures, Biosynthesis and Functions (Charles Anderson)
    Chapter13. Alginate-based bacterial biofilms (M. Fata Moradali and Bernd H.A. Rehm)
    Part2. Industrial and Biomedical Applications of Biopolysaccharides. chapter14. Chitin/Chitosan
    Versatile Ecological, Industrial and Biomedical Aapplications (Hans Merzendorfer and Ephraim Cohen)
    Chapter15. Marine Glycosaminoglycans (GAGs) and GAG-Mimetics
    Applications in Medicine and Tissue Engineering (Sy lvia Colliec-Jouault and Agata Zykwinska)
    Chapter16. Alginate
    Pharmacological and Medical Applications (Patrícia Sofia Pinhanços Batista, Alcina Maria Miranda Bernardo de Morais, Maria Manuela Estevez Pintado, and Rui Manuel Santos Costa de Morais)
    Chapter17. Nanocellulose Composite Biomaterials in Industry and Medicine (Oded Shoseyov, Doron Kam, Tal Ben Shalom, Zvi Shtein, Sapir Vinkler and Yehudit Posen).
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Sheila Spada, Lorenzo Galluzzi.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Extracellular Vesicles
    Copyright
    Contents
    Contributors
    Preface
    Extracellular vesicles: An exciting and rapidly expanding field of investigation
    Acknowledgments
    Disclosures
    References
    Chapter One: Genetic labeling of extracellular vesicles for studying biogenesis and uptake in living mammalian cells
    1. Introduction
    2. Equipment and materials
    2.1. Equipment
    2.2. Cells and culture medium
    2.3. Reagents and chemicals
    3. Protocol
    3.1. Cell culture
    3.2. Generation of transient and stable CD63-GFP/VSVG-GFP expressing cells 3.3. Exosome preparation from conditioned medium
    3.4. Cell and exosome imaging
    3.5. Cellular uptake of exosomes by confocal microscopy and flow cytometry
    4. Concluding remarks
    5. Notes
    Acknowledgments
    References
    Chapter Two: Fluorescent labeling of extracellular vesicles
    1. Introduction
    1.1. Uptake studies
    1.2. Biodistribution studies
    1.3. Characterization studies
    2. Fluorescent labeling
    2.1. EV Labeling approaches
    2.1.1. Surface marker labeling of EVs
    2.1.2. Lipid membrane labeling of EVs
    2.1.3. Luminal labeling of EVs 2.2. Post-labeling clean-up
    2.2.1. Differential ultracentrifugation
    2.2.2. Density gradient centrifugation
    2.2.3. Size exclusion chromatography
    2.2.4. Filtration
    3. Materials, equipment and reagents
    4. Protocols
    4.1. Sample labeling
    4.2. Removing excess dye
    4.3. Coverslip preparation
    4.4. Fluorescent imaging
    4.5. Size assessment using NTA
    5. Pros and cons
    5.1. Surface marker labeling
    5.2. Lipid membrane labeling
    5.3. Luminal labeling
    6. Conclusion
    References Chapter Three: Use of antibody arrays to probe exosome and extracellular vesicle mediated functional changes in cells
    1. Introduction
    1.1. Exosomes and extracellular vesicles
    1.2. Antibody arrays
    2. Methods
    2.1. Cell culture
    2.2. Isolation of exosome fraction
    2.3. Labeling of exosome fraction
    2.4. Treatment of cells
    2.5. Antibody arrays
    3. Notes
    4. Concluding remarks
    References
    Chapter Four: Analysis of individual extracellular vesicles by imaging flow cytometry
    1. Introduction
    2. Single EV analyses
    2.1. Equipment
    2.2. Materials 2.3. Protocol optimization
    2.4. Instrument calibration
    3. Protocol
    3.1. Preparation of antibody solution
    3.2. Sample preparation
    3.3. Controls
    3.4. Sample acquisition with the ISX
    4. Data analysis
    4.1. Defining of masks to analyze the raw image file data
    4.2. Using the feature manager to determine single events
    4.3. Data presentation and calculation of subset concentrations
    5. Summary
    Acknowledgments
    References
    Chapter Five: Imaging intercellular interaction and extracellular vesicle exchange in a co-culture model of chronic lymph ...
    1. Introduction
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Print
    editors, Thomas V. Brogan, Laurance Lequier, Roberto Lorusso, Graeme MacLaren, Giles Peek.
    Contents:
    I. Extracorporeal life support: General principles
    II. Extracorporeal life support: Neonatal respiratory disease
    III. Extracorporeal life support: Pediatric respiratory disease
    IV. Extracorporeal life support: Neonatal and pediatric cardiac disease
    V. Extracorporeal life support: Adult respiratory disease
    VI. Extracorporeal life support: Adult cardiac disease
    VII. Extracorporeal life support: Special indications
    VIII. ECLS: Procedures and adjunctive extracorporeal therapies
    IX. Extracorporeal life support: Organization.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RD598.35.A77 M49 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Gregory A. Schmidt, editor.
    Contents:
    Physiology of Extracorporeal Life Support (ECLS), Matthew J. Brain, Warwick W. Butt, Graeme MacLaren
    Hypoxemic Respiratory Failure: Evidence, Indications, Exclusions, Darryl Abrams, Matthew Bacchetta, Daniel Brodie
    Cardiogenic Shock: Evidence, Indications, Exclusions, Nicolas Bréchot, Alain Combes
    ECCO2R in Obstructive Diseases: Evidence, Indications, Exclusions, Lorenzo Del Sorbo, V. Marco Ranieri
    ECLS as a Bridge to Lung Transplantation, Christian Kuehn.- Modes of ECLS, L. Keith Scott, Benjamin Schmidt
    Vascular Access for ECLS, Steven A. Conrad
    Circuits, Membranes, and Pumps, Bradley H. Rosen
    Ventilator Management during ECLS, Antonio Pesenti, Giacomo Bellani, Giacomo Grasselli, Tommaso Mauri
    Daily Care on ECLS, Giles J. Peek
    Crises during ECLS, Cara L. Agerstrand, Linda B. Mongero, Darryl Abrams, Matthew Bacchetta, Daniel Brodie
    Mobilization during ECLS, Gregory A. Schmidt
    ECMO Weaning and Decannulation, Sundar Krishnan and Gregory A. Schmidt
    The Story of ECLS: History and Future, J. Ann Morris, Robert Pollock, Brittany A. Zwischenberger, Cherry Ballard-Croft, Joseph B. Zwischenberger.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Gregory A Schmidt, editor.
    Summary: This new edition presents an evidence-based review of extracorporeal membrane oxygenation (ECMO) for adults, with a particular focus on veno-venous (VV) ECMO. Due to the dramatic impact of COVID-19, the number of institutions offering ECMO, thus the number of clinicians performing ECMO (or referring their patients for ECMO), has exploded in a truly unprecedented way. While the pandemic may fade, programs built in response will survive by extending the application of ECMO to previously overlooked populations. This fully updated second edition refines its focus to VV ECMO, which has seen the most dramatic increase and relevance. This allows expert authors to go further in depth regarding VV ECMO and provide readers with better guidance from the physiology of VV ECMO to weaning and decannulation. Several areas have been expanded, including anti-thrombotic approaches; how to set the mechanical ventilator and judge the complex interactions between patient, ventilator, and ECMO circuit; assessing the systemic circulation during VV ECMO (especially right ventricular function and intravascular volume); and recognizing membrane lung dysfunction. Finally, new chapters addressing how the VV-capable clinician should think about VA ECMO and how to incorporate ethical principles in patient selection and withdrawal of ECMO have been added. This is an ideal guide for intensive care and respiratory medicine specialists, fellows training in critical care, ECMO specialist staff, perfusionists, nurses, and respiratory therapists.

    Contents:
    Physiology of Extracorporeal Life Support (ECLS)
    Circuits, Membranes, and Pumps
    Modes of ECMO
    Vascular Access
    Hypoxemic Respiratory Failure: Evidence, Indications, Exclusions
    Ventilator management during ECLS
    Managing the Systemic Circulation: Volume Status and RV Function
    Antithrombotic therapy for ECMO
    Membrane Dysfunction
    ECCO2R in Obstructive Diseases: Evidence, Indications, Exclusions
    ECMO as a bridge to lung transplantation
    Daily management of patients on VV ECMO
    Crises During ECLS
    Mobilization During ECLS
    ECMO Weaning and Decannulation
    Veno-arterial ECMO in respiratory failure
    Ethical Challenges in Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Sachinder Singh Hans, editor.
    Summary: Carotid and vertebral artery disease affects a large segment of the population with the potential of causing severe disability from a major stroke. This book places emphasis on the medical, endovascular and surgical approaches in managing patients with extracranial carotid and vertebral artery disease following pertinent diagnostic studies. Sections focus on carotid and vertebral anatomy, physiology and diagnostic modalities. Subsequent chapters discuss specific disease processes and their management with the best medical therapy neuro-interventions. Contributions from many interrelated specialties, including cerebrovascular physiology, pathology, neuro-radiology, neuro-interventions, stroke-neurology and vascular surgery significantly enhance our knowledge of carotid and vertebral artery disease. Extracranial Carotid and Vertebral Artery Disease: Contemporary Management provides an comprehensive and state-of-the-art approach to managing complex arterial reconstructions. .
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Rochelle Buffenstein, Thomas J. Park, Melissa M. Holmes, editors.
    Summary: This volume focuses on the huge advances in the last 25 years on the use of this animal model for biomedical research (cancer, heart disease and neurodegeneration), fundamental neuroscience and basic subterranean biology. In 2013, Science magazine named the naked mole-rat as the Vertebrate of the Year. This was partly due to research carried out documenting its extreme longevity, negligible senescence, and prolonged maintenance of cancer free, good health well into old age as well as seminal work on mechanisms involved in these processes, pain and hypoxia resistance. In addition to this research focus on longevity and chronic diseases such as cancer and cardiovascular disease, the naked mole-rat has also made a substantial contribution to the fields of ecophysiology, neuroscience and behavior. With international contributions, this book provides a valuable text for zoological students, behavioral scientists and biomedical researchers.

    Contents:
    Dedication
    About the editors
    Preface (Jarvis JUM)
    Chapter 1. Social evolution in African mole-rats - a comparative overview (Faulkes CG & Bennett NC)
    Chapter 2. Social behavior in naked mole-rats: individual differences in phenotype and proximate mechanisms of mammalian eusociality (Holmes MM & Goldman BD)
    Chapter 3. Neuropeptidergic and neuroendocrine systems underlying eusociality and the concomitant social regulation of reproduction in naked mole-rats: a comparative approach (Coen CW, Bennett N, Holmes MM, & Faulkes CG)
    Chapter 4. Adult neural plasticity in naked mole-rats: implications of fossoriality, longevity and sociality on the brains capacity for change (Mooney SJ, Forger NG, & Holmes MM)
    Chapter 5. Sensory Systems of the African Naked Mole-Rat (Vice EN, Lagestee S, Browe BM, Deb D, Smith ESJ, Park TJ)
    Chapter 6. Hearing and vocalizations in the naked mole-rat (Barker AJ, Koch, U, Lewin GR, Pyott, SJ)
    Chapter 7. The somatosensory world of the African naked mole-rat (Lewin GR, Smith ESJ, Reznick J, Debus K, Barker A, and Park TJ)
    Chapter 8. The idiosyncratic physiological traits of the naked mole-rat; a resilient animal model of aging, longevity, and healthspan (Buffenstein R and Craft W)
    Chapter 9. African Naked Mole-Rats Demonstrate Extreme Tolerance to Hypoxia and Hypercapnia (Park TJ, Smith ESJ, Reznick J, Bennett NC, Applegate DT, Larson J, Lewin GR)
    Chapter 10. A sweet story of metabolic innovation in the naked mole-rat (Reznick J, Park TJ, and Lewin GR)
    Chapter 11. Insights into the molecular basis of genome stability and pristine proteostasis in naked mole-rats (Narayan V, McMahon M, OBrien J, McAllister F and Buffenstein R)
    Chapter 12. The Unusual Immune System of the Naked Mole-Rat (Lin TD and Buffenstein R)
    Chapter 13
    Induced Pluripotent Stem Cells from Cancer-Resistant Naked Mole-rats (Miura. K, Oiwa Y, and Kawamura Y)
    Chapter 14. Naked mole-rats: resistant to developing cancer or good at avoiding it? (Hadi F, Smith ESJ and Khaled WT)
    Chapter 15. Spontaneous Disease and Pathology of Naked Mole-rats (Delaney MA, Imai DM, Buffenstein R)
    Chapter 16. Managed Care of Naked Mole-rats (Smith M, and Buffenstein R)
    Chapter 17. Some exciting future directions for work on naked mole-rats (Smith ESJ, ParkTJ, Holmes MM and Buffenstein R).
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Douglas D. Brunette.
    Contents:
    Airway
    Appendages
    Central nervous system
    Cardiovascular and pulmonary
    Obstetrics and gynecology
    Foreign bodies
    Otolaryngology
    Abdomen
    Electrocardiogram
    Intriguing
    Ophthalmology
    Orthopedics
    Dermatology
    Genitalia
    Self imposed
    Life saving.
  • Digital
    Alper Sener, Hakan Erdem, editors.
    Summary: This book brings awareness to a neglected condition that is nevertheless prevalent world-wide. Much focus is justly given to pulmonary tuberculosis, one of the key medical scourges of humanity, but this disease also often manifests itself in organs outside of the lungs. There is however a surprising lack of information available on extrapulmonary TB, which this book aims to remedy. Specifically, research, as well as epidemiology, diagnosis, and treatment options, are discussed in detail by an international list of experts.

    Contents:
    1. Epidemiology of extrapulmonary tuberculosis
    2. Pleural Tuberculosis
    3. Gastrointestinal Tuberculosis
    4. Hepatobiliary and splenic tuberculosis
    5. Lymphatic Tuberculosis
    6. Bone and Joint Tuberculosis
    7. Tuberculous Spondylodiscitis
    8. Tuberculous Meningitis
    9. Tuberculous Encephalitis
    10. Spinal tuberculosis
    11. Genitourinary Tuberculosis
    12. Cardiovascular Tuberculosis
    13. Cutaneous Tuberculosis
    14. Tuberculosis of Eye
    15. Infection control in extrapulmonary TB
    16. Tuberculosis in the ICU.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Emilia Pauline Liao, editor.
    Contents:
    Intro; Series Editor Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: Vitamin D Biochemistry and Physiology; Introduction; Vitamin D Production; Vitamin D Metabolism; Transport of Vitamin D Metabolites in the Blood and Their Cellular Uptake; Vitamin D Mechanism of Action; Vitamin D Regulation of Cellular Function; Classic Vitamin D Target Tissues; Nonclassic Vitamin D Target Tissues; Regulation of Proliferation and Differentiation; Regulation of Hormone Secretion; Regulation of the Immune System; References;
    Chapter 2: Vitamin D and Autoimmune Diseases; Introduction; Vitamin D Deficiency
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Eduardo de Santibañes, Victoria Ardiles, Fernando A. Alvarez, Virginia Cano Busnelli, Martin de Santibañes, editors.
    Summary: This book describes the diagnoses; staging and management of patients with colorectal liver metastases initially considered unresectable and portrays the different strategies to increase resectability along with their tactics and tricks. Colorectal carcinoma is the third most commonly diagnosed cancer in the world and according to recent cancer statistics around 1.23 million patients are diagnosed each year. Of these patients, approximately 50% will develop liver metastases during the course of their disease and around 15-25% are found to have stage IV disease at diagnosis. Liver resection has been recognized as the treatment of choice for these patients, offering overall 5-year survival rates of up to 50-60% and the only hope for cure. However, at diagnosis only 10-20% of these patients are possibly amenable to surgical resection with curative intent. The possibility to achieve an R0 resection is many times limited by the amount and quality of the future liver remnant (FLR), being posthepatectomy liver failure (PHLF) the most feared and severe complication after major liver resections. With the years, diverse strategies have been developed with the intention to increase resectability by increasing the future liver remnant and/or reducing tumor size, e.g. ALPPS. Along with these techniques, associated surgeries are developed including multivisceral resections, which broadens even more the resectability for patients.

    Contents:
    Part I Introduction. 1. Introduction
    2. Liver surgical anatomy
    II. Global patient evaluation and oncological assessment
    3. Resectability assessment with diagnostic imaging
    4. Liver function evaluation before extreme liver surgery
    5. Imaging-based preoperative planning
    6. Choosing the best strategy. Multidisciplinary evaluation
    III
    Non-operative multimodal therapies
    7. Conversion and neoadjuvant therapies
    8. Portal embolization
    9. Intraarterial chemotherapy
    10. Radioembolization
    IV. Surgical strategies
    11. Anesthetics management
    12. Intraoperative evaluation of resectability
    13. Vascular control in major hepatic resections
    14. Two-stage liver surgery
    15. Two-stage liver surgery with portal occlusion
    16 ALPPS
    17. Parenchymal-sparing liver resections
    18. Combined vascular resections
    19. Ex-vivo liver surgery
    20. Liver transplant
    21. The roll of laparoscopy in advanced liver disease
    V. Management of concomitant extrahepatic disease
    22. Pulmonary metastases
    23. Nodal involvement
    24. Peritoneal disease
    25. Adjacent organs invasion. Multivisceral resections
    VI. Postoperative complications and their management
    26. Complications of hepatic resections
    VII. Palliative care
    27. Palliative care in patients with extensive disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Francesco Feletti, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I. Medicine in extreme sports: 1Psychology and the extreme sports experience
    2 Nutrition for extreme sports
    3 Endocrine responses to extreme sports
    4 Infectious diseases and extreme sports
    5 Ocular problems in extreme sports: high altitude trekking and surfing
    6 Extreme sports dermatology
    7 Medical support for expedition-length adventure races
    8 Emergency medicine in mountain sports: treatment of casualties in hostile environments
    9 Drug abuse and doping in extreme sports. Part II. Injuries and illnesses in the most popular extreme sports: 10 Rock and ice climbing medicine
    11. Alpine skiing and snowboarding: current trends and future directions
    12 Extreme mountain biking injuries
    13 Ultramarathon running: medical issues
    14Skateboarding: accidents and injuries
    15 BASE jumping and wingsuit flying: accidents and injuries,
    16 Foot-launched flying: accidents and injuries. Hang gliding, paragliding, powered hang gliding and powered paragliding
    17 Paragliding medicine
    18 Kitesports medicine: Kite surfing, snow kiting and kite buggying
    19 Injuries associated with skydiving
    20 Surfing and skimboarding medicine
    21 Windsurfing injuries
    22 Extreme sailing injuries
    23 White-water paddlesports medicine: canoeing, kayaking and rafting
    24 Wakeboarding injuries. 25 Extreme scuba diving medicine. Part III. Prevention, training and rehabilitation: 26 Training and injury prevention strategies in extreme sports
    27 An ecological dynamics framework for the acquisition of perceptual motor skills in climbing
    28 Windsurfing: the physiology of athletic performance and training
    29 Employment of near-infrared spectroscopy to assess the physiological determinants of hiking performance in single-handed dinghy sailors
    30 Whole body vibration in extreme sports
    31 Physiology and risk management of cold exposure
    32 Helmets: technological innovations for safety
    33 The eye in extreme sports: prevention, treatment and rehabilitation
    34 Rehabilitation of extreme sports injuries
    35 Legal issues related to extreme sports.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RD97 .E98 2017
    1
  • Digital
    A. Neil Salyapongse, Samuel O. Poore, Ahmed M. Afifi, Michael L. Bentz, editors.
    Summary: Extremity Replantation is a comprehensive text covering all aspects of the upper and lower limb, with an emphasis on state-of-the-art techniques in the surgical and medical management of amputation and avulsion injuries as well as the current understanding of the recovery of function following replantation. It is organized following anatomical zones ? thumb, digits, wrist, forearm and elbow; foot, ankle and lower leg ? with special chapters dedicated to issues common to all replants, such as complications, medical management, nerve recovery and rehabilitation. Furthermore, the international team of authors demonstrates approaches from the entire spectrum of replantation care specialists, including plastic and reconstructive surgeons, orthopedists, and hand therapists. Generously illustrated with intra-operative photos, this book will serve as a standard reference for orthopedic, reconstructive, plastic, and hand surgeons as well as physicians or ancillary medical staff caring for the replant patient.

    Contents:
    The History of Extremity Replantation
    Principles of Musculoskeletal Repair in Extremity Replantation
    Principles of Nerve Repair and Neural Recovery in Extremity Replantation Surgery
    Replantation of the Thumb
    Replantation of the Digits
    Replantation at the Level of the Radiocarpal Joint
    Replantation of the Forearm or Arm
    Optimizing Vascular Patency in Replantation
    Toe-to-Hand Transplantation after Failed Replantation
    Heterotopic Digital Replantation
    Replantation in the Child and Adolescent
    Lower Limb Replantation
    Management of Complications after Replantation
    Secondary Procedures in Replantation
    Rehabilitation following Replantation in the Upper Extremity.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Sikha Mandal, Jnanendra Rath.
    Summary: This volume presents recent developments in the novel drug development and potential of extremophilic cyanobacteria. It discusses how these tiny organism originated, produce oxygen that leads to evolution of life on the earth, how their survival strategies in extreme climatic conditions lead to diverse metabolic pathways, and the opportunity to use them to develop novel drugs. The book is comprised of five chapters, starting with the origin of cyanobacteria, their survival strategies under extreme conditions, and their capabilities to change metabolic activities.The second chapter explores the different metabolic pathways found in cyanobacteria and examines advances in this field and recent techniques like MALDI-TOF imaging and metagenomics tools as well as in silico techniques for rapid screening of secondary metabolites. Further chapters cover the glycomics of cyanobacteria, anticancer drug development, and some issues and challenges of using cyanobacteria to develop drugs. Extremophilic Cyanobacteria For Novel Drug Development provides insight into future perspectives in drug development and is a key resource for students, researchers and professionals in pharmacy, medicinal chemistry, pharmacognosy biotechnology, biology, and academics.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction
    2 Secondary Metabolites of Cyanobacteria and Drug Development
    3 Glycoconjugates of Cyanobacteria and Potential Drug Development from them
    4 Anticancer Drug Development from Cyanobacteria
    5 Issues and Challenges of Drug Development from Cyanobacteria.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Rajesh K. Sani, Navanietha Krishnaraj Rathinam, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a review and in-depth analyses of improved biotechnological processes emphasizing critical aspects and challenges of lignocellulosic biomass conversion into biofuels and value-added products especially using extremophiles and recombinant microorganisms. The book specifically comprises extremophilic production of liquid and gaseous biofuels (bioethanol, biobutanol, biodiesel, biohydrogen, and biogas) as well as value added products (e.g. single cell protein, hydrocarbons, lipids, exopolysaccharides, and polyhydroxyalkanoates). The book also provides the knowledge on how to develop safe, more efficient, sustainable, and economical integrated processes for enhanced conversion of lignocellulosic feedstocks to liquid and gaseous biofuels. Finally the book describes how to perform the techno-economical and life-cycle assessments of new integrated processes involving extremophiles. These modeling exercises are critical in addressing any deficiencies associated with the demonstration of an integrated biofuels and value-added products production process at pilot scale as well as demonstration on the commercialization scale.

    Contents:
    Bioprospecting of Extremophiles for Biotechnology Applications / Navanietha Krishnaraj Rathinam, Rajesh K. Sani
    Conversion of Lignocellulosic Feedstocks into Bioethanol Using Extremophiles / Sean Michael Scully, Johann Orlygsson
    Biobutanol Production Using Recombinant Microorganisms / Rakhee Khandeparker, Rajesh K. Sani
    Biodiesel (Microalgae) / Karen M. Moll, Todd C. Pedersen, Robert D. Gardner, Brent M. Peyton
    Biohydrogen Production from Lignocellulosic Feedstocks Using Extremophiles / Raman Rao, Rajesh K. Sani, Sachin Kumar
    Biogas from Extremophiles / Karthik Rajendran, Gergely Forgacs
    Conversion of Lignocellulosic Feedstocks into Biogas / Ritika Verma, Abhilash Kumar Tripathi, Sudhir Kumar
    Bioconversion of Methane for Value-Added Products / Qiang Fei, Philip T. Pienkos
    Synthetic Biology Enables Photosynthetic Production of Limonene from CO2 and H2O / Charles Halfmann, Liping Gu, William Gibbons, Ruanbao Zhou
    Exopolysaccharide Productions from Extremophiles: The Chemical Structures and Their Bioactivities / Paola Di Donato, Annarita Poli, Giuseppina Tommonaro, Gennaro Roberto Abbamondi, Barbara Nicolaus
    Polyhydroxyalkanoates Production from Renewable and Waste Materials Using Extremophiles/Recombinant Microbes / Özkan Danış, Ayşe Ogan, Meral Birbir
    Rewiring Extremophilic Electrocatalytic Processes for Production of Biofuels and Value-Added Compounds from Lignocellulosic Biomass / Navanietha Krishnaraj Rathinam, Rajesh K. Sani, David Salem
    Integrated Consolidated Bioprocessing for Conversion of Lignocellulosic Feedstock to Biofuels and Value-Added Bioproducts / Jia Wang, Navanietha Krishnaraj Rathinam, David R. Salem, Rajesh K. Sani
    Value-Added Products from Wastes Using Extremophiles in Biorefineries: Process Modeling, Simulation, and Optimization Tools / Elias Martinez-Hernandez, Kok Siew Ng, Myriam A. Amezcua Allieri, Jorge A. Aburto Anell, Jhuma Sadhukhan
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    edited by Hugh Davson.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Vegetative physiology and biochemistry.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP475 .E92
    2
  • Digital
    John V. Forrester, Andrew D. Dick, Paul G. McMenamin, Fiona Roberts, Eric Pearlman.
    Summary: "The Eye: Basic Sciences in Practice provides highly accessible, one-stop coverage of all the essential basic science required by today's ophthalmologists and optometrists in training. It is also core reading for those embarking on a career in visual and ophthalmic science, as well as an invaluable, current refresher for the range of practitioners working in this area. Building on previous success, this fifth edition has been fully revised in line with current curricula, key research developments and clinical best practice. It succinctly incorporates critical developments in fast-moving fields related to the eye and vision, including genetics, pharmacology, microbiology, immunology, pathology, neurophysiology, neuroanatomy and imaging"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Anatomy of the eye and orbit
    Embryology and early development of the eye and adnexa
    Genetics
    Biochemistry and cell biology
    Physiology of vision and the visual system
    General and ocular pharmacology
    Immunology
    Microbial infections of the eye
    Pathology
    Addendum.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Alex V. Levin, Robert W. Enzenauer, editors.
    Summary: "Written and edited by experts in areas of pediatric ophthalmology and pediatrics, this new text describes ocular manifestations of systemic diseases in the pediatric populations in a comprehensive and cataloged fashion. The Eye in Pediatric Systemic Disease is designed as an in-depth and up-to-date reference work that provides extensive citations, thus allowing the reader ready access to the international supporting literature. Everything from ocular manifestations of hematologic disease, child abuse, psychiatric diseases, renal disorders, and vitamin disorders are covered, allowing readers to know what to look for in the eyes of children with a given systemic disorder. The Eye in Pediatric Systemic Disease is written in language that is accessible to ophthalmologists and pediatricians and virtually every physician and allied health who cares for children" -- Back cover.

    Contents:
    Normal postnatal ocular development / Laura J. Heinmiller and Alex V. Levin
    Ocular manifestations of prematurity / Edward W. Cheeseman, Jr., Brita S. Deacon, and Dorothea Jenkins
    Ocular manifestations of allergic and immunologic diseases / Logan Christensen, John T. McDonnell, and Jasleen Singh
    Ocular manifestations of cardiac disease / Tara j. Guretzky, Peter C. Dyke II, and Herbert G. Whitley
    Ocular manifestations of child abuse / Naomie Warner, Kathryn M. McCans, and Alex V. Levin
    Oculofacial manifestations of chromosomal aberrations / Mario Zanolli, Alex V. Levin, and Guillermo Lay-Son
    Ocular manifestations of craniofacial disorders / Edward P. Buchanan, Emily R. Gallagher, Kara C. LaMattina, Veeral S. Shah, Amy S. Xue, and Jane Edmond
    Ocular manifestations of dermatologic diseases / Jennifer L. Jung, Lance M. Siegel, Lawrence F. Eichenfield, and Gregg Lueder
    Ocular manifestations of endocrinologic diseases / Rebecca Sands Braverman and Sarah K. Bartz
    Ocular manifestations of gastrointestinal disease / James E. Elder and winita Hardikar
    Hematologic disorders of the eye / Mary Ellen Hoehn, James E. Elder, and Jeremie Heath Estepp
    Ocular manifestations of infectious diseases / Mariam Ahmad, Cara Elise Capitena, Donna Curtis, and Emily A. McCourt
    Ocular manifestations of inborn errors of metabolism / Anuradha Ganesh, Fethiya Al-Murshedi, Sana Al-Zuhaibi, and Khalid Al-Thihli
    Ocular manifestations of musculoskeletal disorders / Michael Clarke, Gar-Yun Wong, and Jeffry Hogg
    Ocular manifestations of neurologic diseases / Rebecca B. Mets-Halgrimson, Melissa L. Cirillo, WanWan Xu, Radha Ram, Allison R. Soneru, Kirstin Tawse, Abigail Angulo, and Robert W. Enzenauer
    Phakomatoses-neurocutaneous syndromes / Sabra Lofgren Leitenberger, Mariah N. Mason, Jason Coryell, Robert W. Enzenauer, and Daniel J. Karr
    Ocular manifestations of psychiatric diseases / James E. Elder and Andrew Court
    Ocular manifestations of pediatric pulmonary diseases / Sylvia H. Yoo, MyMy C. Buu, Marin H. Kollef, and Robert W. Enzenauer
    Ocular manifestations of pediatric renal diseases / Sudhi P. Kurup, Mahima Keswani, and Robert W. Enzenauer
    Ocular manifestations of pediatric rheumatic diseases / R. Christopher Walton, Clara Lin, and Robert W. Enzenauer
    Ocular manifestations of systemic syndromes / Arcot Sadagopan Karthikeyan and Adele S. Schneider
    Ocular manifestations of vitamin disorders / Eun Young Choi, Rebecca Freedman Neustein, nancy F. Krebs, and David S. Walton.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Aasef Shaikh, Fajun Wang.
    Summary: This book describes the abnormal eye movements encountered in the critical care unit in everyday practice and elaborates on the mechanism and clinical significance behind them. Beginning with a thorough grounding of the basic anatomy and physiology ocular motor system and how they move the eyeballs; chapters explore the pathological descriptions of all the signs that a practicing neurologist, ophthalmologist, or emergency medicine specialist might see in other ICU's, as well as the diagnostic and prognostic evidence to answer the consult questions. Further chapters describe the abnormal ocular movements seen in the Neuro-ICU, Eye Movements in the Critical Care Setting is a comprehensive resource on eye movement in the critical care setting, and a useful guide for the neurologist, ophthalmologist, and emergency medical specialist and residents alike.

    Contents:
    Basic anatomy and physiology of ocular motor system
    Eye movement disorders in critically ill patients.-Gaze disorders
    Roving eye movements.-Ocular dipping.-Inverse ocular dipping.-Medication-induced opsoclonus
    Medication-induced nystagmus
    Saccades disorders.-Saccadic slowing in encephalopathy.-Medication-induced saccadic slowing
    Vestibulo-ocular reflex (VOR) disorders
    VOR impairments in cooling
    VOR impairments in encephalopathy
    Eye movement disorders leading to Neuro-ICU admissions
    Eye movements in cerebellar lesions leading to ICU admission
    Eye movements in medullary lesions leading to ICU admission
    Eye movements in pontine lesions leading to ICU admission
    Eye movements in midbrain lesions leading to ICU admission
    Eye movements in cerebral cortex lesions leading to ICU admission
    Myasthenia gravis crisis
    Guillain-Barre syndrome (Miller-Fischer variant)
    Eye movements in epilepsy
    Medication-induced abnormal eye movements
    Epileptic eye movements
    Abnormal eye movements in autoimmune disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ralph C. Eagle, Jr.
    Contents:
    An introduction to ocular anatomy and histology
    Congenital and developmental anomalies
    Inflammation
    Ocular trauma
    Conjunctiva
    Cornea and sclera
    The lens
    Glaucoma
    Retina
    Vitreous
    Intraocular tumors in adults
    Retinoblastoma and simulating lesions
    The eyelid and lacrimal drainage system
    Orbit
    Optic nerve
    Laboratory techniques, special stains, and immunohistochemistry.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Steffen Heegaard, Hans Grossniklaus, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive, in-depth, and up-to-date resource on eye pathology that will be of great practical value for ophthalmic and general pathologists and ophthalmologists. Congenital abnormalities, inflammatory conditions, infections, injuries, degenerative diseases, and tumors are all covered with the aid of more than 700 images. In the case of tumors, the wide variety of neoplasms that occur in the eyelid, conjunctiva, retina, uveal tract, lacrimal gland and sac, orbit, and optic nerve are comprehensively reviewed, and the most recent knowledge on the relation between genetics and prognosis is presented. Entries on specific diseases are organized in a standard way, with information on etiology, epidemiology, clinical presentation, pathological characteristics, differential diagnosis, therapy, and prognosis. The authors are all recognized experts and members of the European and American ophthalmic pathology societies.

    Contents:
    The Eye
    Conjunctiva
    Cornea
    Sclera
    Lens
    Glaucoma
    Optic Nerve
    Vitreous
    Retina
    Uvea
    Eyelid
    Orbit.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Dominique Raynaud.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    QM511 .R39 2020
    1
  • Digital
    Saif Aldeen Saleh AlRyalat.
    Summary: The book provides high yield information in basic ophthalmology including anatomy, physiology, pathology, pharmacology, microbiology, and embryology that are required for preparation of ophthalmology exams. The book focusses on all parts of the eye, with special focus on basic science including appropriate amount of information on clinical science for students and trainees. It is written in a lucid manner with textual notes and illustrations for quick learning and better understanding. Each section contains high yield information in separate points, with commonly asked information in Eye Yield Note boxes. It also includes estimated study time for each section to better plan the study. It also includes a pre-exam night study section at the end of the book that provides the information to be reviewed just before the exam. The book will be very helpful in passing almost all basic ophthalmology exams in a relatively short study time, by skipping the filling text available in most of the textbooks. It will be an excellent read for post graduate students looking for concise revision material. It will be relevant for medical students, ophthalmology residents, and medical doctors applying for ophthalmology residency and also for FRCS Part 1 exam.

    Contents:
    How to use the book
    Structural anatomy, physiology, and pathology of eye
    Essential pathology and immunology for ophthalmologists
    Genetics and embryology for ophthalmologists
    Pharmacology for ophthalmologists
    Microbiology for ophthalmologists
    Neurology for ophthalmologists
    Pre-exam eye yields.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mark A. Codner, Clinton D. McCord ; with illustrations by Bill Winn, Amanda Yarberry Behr, Brenda Bunch.
    Contents:
    Volume 1. Part I: Fundamentals
    Part II: Aesthetic surgery
    Part III: Aesthetic nonsurgical periorbital treatments
    Volume 2. Part IV: Reconstructive surgery
    Part V: Orbital and lacrimal surgery.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme MedOne Ophthalmology
  • Digital
    Jerry A. Shields, Director, Ocular Oncology Services, Wills Eye Hospital, Professor of Ophthalmology, Thomas Jefferson University, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, USA, Carol L. Shields, Co-Director, Ocular Oncology Services, Wills Eye Hospital, Professor of Ophthalmology, Thomas Jefferson University, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, USA.
    Summary: The authors provide guidance on recognition, evaluation, and treatment of ocular tumors, highlighted by more than 3,000 photographs and surgical drawings. This guide to the clinical features, diagnosis, management, and pathology of eyelid, conjunctival, and orbital tumors and pseudotumors, depicting clinical variations, treatment and histopathologic characteristics of the wide spectrum of neoplasms and related lesions includes clinical and scientific innovations.

    Contents:
    Pt. 1. Benign tumors of the eyelid epidermis
    Premalignant and malignant tumors of eyelid epidermis
    Eyelid sebaceous gland tumors
    Eyelid sweat gland tumors
    Eyelid hair follicle tumors
    Eyelid melanocytic tumors
    Neural tumors of the eyelid
    Vascular tumors of the eyelids
    Eyelid lymphoid, plasmacytic, and metastatic tumors
    Eyelid histiocytic, myxoid, and fibrous lesions
    Eyelid cystic lesions simulating neoplasms
    Eyelid inflammatory lesions simulating neoplasms
    Eyelid miscellaneous conditions simulating neoplasms
    Tumors of the lacrimal drainage system
    Surgical management of eyelid tumors
    pt. 2. Tumors of the conjunctiva. Conjunctival and epibulbar choristomas
    Conjunctival benign epithelial tumors
    Premalignant and malignant lesions of the conjunctival epithelium
    Conjunctival melanocytic lesions
    Vascular tumors and related lesions of the conjunctive
    Conjunctival neural xanthomatous, fibrous, myxomatous, and lipomatous tumors
    Conjunctival lymphoid, leukemic, and metastatic tumors
    Caruncular tumors
    Miscellaneous lesions that simulate conjunctival neoplasms
    Surgical management of conjunctival tumors
    pt. 3. Tumors of the orbit. Inflammatory orbital lesions that simulate neoplasms
    Orbital cystic lesions
    Orbital vascular and hemorrhagic lesions
    Orbital peripheral nerve tumors
    Optic nerve, meningeal, and other neural tumors
    Orbital myogenic tumors
    Orbital fibrous connective tissue tumors
    Orbital osseous, fibro-osseous, and cartilaginous tumors
    Orbital lipomatous and myxomatous tumors
    Orbital histiocytic tumors
    Orbital primary melanocytic tumors
    Lacrimal gland primary epithelial tumors
    Orbital metastatic cancer
    Orbital lymphoid tumors and leukemias
    Orbital secondary tumors
    Surgical management of orbital tumors.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Mathilde Kaspi, Elisa Cinotti, Jean-Luc Perrot, Thibaud Garcin.
    Summary: This Atlas gives the complete expert opinion on the diagnostic features of eyelid and conjunctival tumors (benign and malignant): a state-of-the-art guide with numerous images, useful for both dermatologists and ophthalmologists. This invaluable resource, illustrating clinical, histological and re fectance confocal microscopy features, first addresses the normal conditions of the ocular surface, then reviews lesions due to epidermal, melanocytic and adnexal tumors. A final part is devoted to conjunctiva conditions, from normal to malignant conjunctival tumors. The high number of illustrations and their description of many ocular surface lesions with in vivo confocal microscopy make this atlas an essential guide for the practitioners of both specialities.

    Contents:
    Preface
    I EXAMINATION OF THE OCULAR AND PERIOCULAR SURFACE
    1 Clinical examination of the eyelid and conjunctiva
    2 In vivo Reflectance Confocal Microscopy examination of eyelid and conjunctiva
    3 Histopathological examination of the eyelid and conjunctiva
    II EYELID AND EYELID MARGIN
    4 The normal eyelid
    5 Benign epidermal lesions of the eyelid: Squamous papilloma
    6 Benign epidermal lesions of the eyelid: Molluscum contagiosum
    7 Benign epidermal lesions of the eyelid: Seborrheic keratosis
    8 Benign epidermal lesions of the eyelid: Melanoacanthoma
    9 Benign epidermal lesions of the eyelid: Epidermal cyst
    10 Precancerous epidermal lesions of the eyelid: Actinic keratosis
    11 Malignant epidermal tumors: Squamous cell carcinoma
    12 Malignant epidermal tumors: Basal cell carcinoma
    13 Benign lesions with basal melanocyte proliferation: Actinic lentigo
    14 Benign melanocytic tumors: Junctional nevus
    ^15 Benign melanocytic tumors: Subepithelial nevus
    16 Benign melanocytic tumors: Compound nevus
    17 Malignant melanocytic tumors : Melanoma
    18 Benign Adnexal tumors of the eyelid: Trichoepitelioma
    19 Benign Adnexal tumors of the eyelid: Pilomatricoma
    20 Benign Adnexal tumors of the eyelid: Hidrocystoma
    21 Malignant adnexal tumors of th eyelid: Sebaceous carcinoma
    22 Vascular tumors of the eyelid: Infantile Hemangioma
    23 Vascular tumors of the eyelid: Lobular capillary Hemangioma
    24 Miscellaneous tumors of the eyelid: Nerve sheath tumors (Neurofibroma)
    25 Non lymphoid cutaneous infiltrates (Xanthelasma)
    III CONJUNCTIVA
    26 Normal conjunctiva
    27 Benign conjunctival lesions: Pterygium
    28 Benign conjunctival lesions: Primary acquired melanosis
    29 Benign conjunctival lesions:: Nevus
    30 Primary acquired melanosis: Epithelial cystic nevus
    31 Malignant conjunctival tumors: Squamous cell carcinoma
    32 Malignant conjunctival tumors: Melanoma
    ^33 Malignant conjunctival tumors: B-cell Lymphoma. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Suzanne K. Freitag, N. Grace Lee, Daniel R. Lefebvre, Michael K. Yoon.
    Summary: Highly practical eyelid surgery resource informs important reconstruction decisions and strategies Skin malignancies frequently affect the periocular area, necessitating excision followed by eyelid reconstruction. Periocular trauma is also quite common, and because of the highly complex regional anatomy, requires expertise for effective reconstruction. Preparation by ophthalmic plastic surgeons prior to periorbital reconstruction is often not possible due to the unpredictability of defects left after Mohs micrographic surgeons clear tumor margins or in cases of trauma. Eyelid Reconstruction by.

    Contents:
    1 Periocular Anatomy
    2 Periorbital Surgical Principles
    3 Mohs Micrographic Surgery for Periorbital Cutaneous Malignancies
    4 Medial Canthal Eyelid Reconstruction
    5 Lower Eyelid Reconstruction
    6 Upper Eyelid Reconstruction
    7 Lateral Canthal Eyelid Reconstruction
    8 Eyelid Reconstruction following Trauma
    Index
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Ophthalmology
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Digital
    Arnab Biswas.
    Summary: Eyelid tumors are commonly encountered by oculoplastic as well as plastic surgeons. The challenge of managing these cases lies not only in performing the surgery in a precise manner in small area, but also in ensuring a visually-appealing cosmetic outcome. This is an innovative and concise portable handbook that guides the surgeons on how to approach and manage these cases in a step-by-step manner. Each chapter of this practical guidebook has outstanding illustrations drawn in full color clearly showing each incision line, flap management, suture placement and its technique, and the expected cosmetic outcome. When a lid tumor is excised, there is a tissue defect that needs to be corrected. Ophthalmologists and plastic surgeons will find this work an excellent reference material to solve the jigsaw puzzle of tissue defects in and around the periorbital region. Importantly, they can quickly refer to the images just before starting a procedure. The author has first explained the anatomical aspects and anesthetic techniques for eyelid surgery, followed by review of the benign and malignant tumors, finally describing the flap creation and reconstruction techniques that are currently used in various lid tumors in an organized fashion.

    Contents:
    Eyelid Anatomy
    Types of Lesions Involving the Eyelid Skin
    Clinical Evaluation for a Suspected Case of Eyelid Tumor
    Classification of Eyelid Tumors
    Benign Eyelid Lesions
    Malignant Eyelid Lesions
    Histopathology of Eyelid Tumors
    Anesthesia for Eyelid Surgery
    Flaps in Eyelid Reconstruction
    Biopsy and Frozen Section
    Basics of Eyelid Reconstruction
    Upper Eyelid Reconstruction
    Lower Eyelid Reconstruction
    Medial Canthal Reconstruction
    Lateral Canthal Reconstruction
    Technique of Repair of Defects Not Involving the Eyelid Margin.
    Digital Access Springer 2014

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Lane Library Bookmarklet

To install, drag this button to your browser bookmarks or tools bar.

What is it?

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Bookmark on Other Websites

Bookmark on Lane

  • To Install, Right Click this Button.
  • Select "Add to Favorites" (click “Continue” if you see a security alert)
  • From the "Create in" menu, select “Favorites Bar” (IE8, IE9) to install
  • Once installed it will look like this
  • Click "Bookmark on Lane" to bookmark any webpage
  • Your saved bookmark will appear on this page
To Install, Right Click this Button.

What is it?

Beyond Stanford

Derived from Current Medical Diagnosis & Treatment, AccessMedicine's Quick Medical Diagnosis & Treatment provides topic reviews with key diagnostic and treatment features for more than 500 diseases.

A repository of medical knowledge from internal medicine, cardiology, genetics, pharmacy, diagnosis and management, basic sciences, patient care, and more.

Continuously expanding, all databases in the repository contain the latest editions of selected medical titles.

MicroMedex: Premier pharmaceutical information source containing multiple databases and drug reference tools. Of particular value is DRUGDEX Evaluations, one of the most comprehensive drug sources available. DynaMed is a clinical information resource used to answer questions quickly at the point-of-care. Easy-to-interpret Levels of Evidence help clinicians rapidly determine the quality of the available evidence.

Biomedical and pharmacological abstracting and indexing database of published literature, by Elsevier. Embase® contains over 32 million records from over 8,500 currently published journals (1947-present) and is noteworthy for its extensive coverage of the international pharmaceutical and alternative/complementary medicine literature.

Scopus is the largest abstract and citation database of peer-reviewed literature: scientific journals, books and conference proceedings. A drug information resource containing: American Hospital Formulary System (AHFS), drug formulary for Lucile Packard Children's Hospital (LPCH) and Stanford Hospital & Clinics (SHC), Lexi-Drugs (adverse reactions, dosage and administration, mechanism of action, storage, use, and administration information), Lexi-Calc, Lexi-ID, Lexi-I.V. Compatibility (King Guide), Lexi-Interact, and Lexi-PALS. Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature (CINAHL) contains coverage of nursing and allied health literature. A knowledge database that provides access to topic reviews based on over 6000 clinically relevant articles. The evidence-based content, updated regularly, provides the latest practice guidelines in 59 medical specialties. Provides critical assessments of systematic reviews compiled from a variety of medical journals. Selects from the biomedical literature original studies and systematic reviews that are immediately clinically relevant and then summarizes these articles in an enhanced abstract with expert commentary.

Multidisciplinary coverage of over 10,000 high-impact journals in the sciences, social sciences, and arts and humanities, as well as international proceedings coverage for over 120,000 conferences.

Includes cited reference searching, citation maps, and an analyze tool.

Features systematic reviews that summarize the effects of interventions and makes a determination whether the intervention is efficacious or not.

Cochrane reviews are created through a strict process of compiling and analyzing data from multiple randomized control trials to ensure comprehensiveness and reliability.

Provides systematic coverage of the psychological literature from the 1800s to the present through articles, book chapters and dissertations. PIER (Physicians' Information and Education Resource) is a Web-based decision-support tool designed for rapid point-of-care delivery of up-to-date, evidence-based guidance for primary care physicians. Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) provides access to 300,000 controlled trials that have been identified the Cochrane Collaboration. Provides drug information targeted for patients. A continually updating drug monograph. ECRI Guidelines Trust: A comprehensive database of evidence-based clinical practice guidelines and related documents. MedlinePlus: A repository of health information from the National Library of Medicine. Links are from trusted sites. No advertising, no endorsement of commercial companies or products LPCH CareNotes via MicroMedex: Patient education handouts customized by LPCH clinical staff Micromedex Lab Advisor: Evidence based laboratory test information Provides patient handouts from the American Academy of Family Physician.

Largest, broadest eBook package; covers all sciences, as well as technology (including software), medicine, and humanities.

In addition to covering Wiley and Springer, MyiLibrary is also the only provider for Oxford and Cambridge University Press titles. No seat restrictions.

A collection of biomedical books that can be searched directly by concept, and linked to terms in PubMed abstracts.

A web-based, decision support system for infectious diseases, epidemiology, microbiology and antimicrobial chemotherapy. The database, updated weekly, currently includes 337 diseases, 224 countries, 1,147 microbial taxa and 306 antibacterial (-fungal, -parasitic, -viral) agents and vaccines.

Over 10,000 notes outline the status of specific infections within each country.

Large number of high quality software and database programming titles from O'Reilly. Other software titles are also available from Sams and Prentice Hall. Limited to 7 concurrent users. Includes peer-reviewed life science and biomedical research protocols compiled from Methods in Molecular Biology, Methods in Molecular Medicine, Methods in Biotechnology, Methods in Pharmacology and Toxicology, Neuromethods, the Biomethods Handbook, the Proteomics Handbook, and Springer Laboratory Manuals. Contains full text access to selected biomedical and nursing books.

Provides online, full-text access to Springer's journal titles as well as journals from other publishers.

Subjects include: life sciences, chemical sciences, environmental sciences, geosciences, computer science, mathematics, medicine, physics and astronomy, engineering and economics. Also includes eBooks.

Collection of over 8 thousand fulltext titles in engineering, math, and basic and applied biomedical research. Coverage is from 1967 to the present. A library of ebooks on a wide array of topics, digitized and made available online in conjunction with the original publishers.